JP2015036028A - Device for game - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a device for a game capable of making detailed information of a member portable terminal (called "terminal detailed information" hereafter) received in a non-contact manner impossible to be displayed to other players.SOLUTION: When a player performs operation of holding up a member portable terminal over a token dispenser after performing operation of touching an "information inquiry" button on a menu screen of the token dispenser, the token dispenser displays terminal detailed information of the member portable terminal on a display. After the display start of the terminal detailed information, when one of a condition that terminal detailed information display time has exceeded display possible time, a condition that the player has terminated the game and a condition that the player has performed operation for terminating the display of the terminal detailed information is established, the token dispenser executes processing for making the terminal detailed information impossible to be displayed.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus, and in particular, can perform a game enabling process for enabling a game on a gaming machine using a valuable value associated with medium identification information recorded on a recording medium. The present invention relates to a gaming device.

  Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2010-253055 (Patent Document 1) discloses a card unit that pays out a ball in response to holding a pre-registered portable terminal. This card unit pays out the ball when the portable terminal is held over for the first time on condition that the personal identification number is input and the payout operation is performed. Thereafter, the card unit pays out the ball only when the portable terminal is held over.

JP 2010-253055 A

  For example, in a configuration in which the card is received when the card is inserted, the state of receiving the card may be terminated when the card is ejected.

  However, as described in Patent Document 1, in the configuration in which the portable terminal is received by holding the portable terminal, there is no concept that “the portable terminal is discharged”. It is unclear whether the state of accepting the portable terminal should be terminated. Therefore, for example, when displaying information related to a portable terminal that has once been received on a display or the like, if the information is displayed unnecessarily, it may be seen by other players. However, the above-mentioned Patent Document 1 does not show any such problem and means for solving the problem.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of the actual situation, and the object of the present invention is to make it possible to disable display of detailed information of a recording medium received in a non-contact manner by other players. Is to provide a device.

(1) Valuable value (for example, prepaid balance, holding ball, storage ball, game score) associated with medium identification information (for example, terminal ID) recorded on a recording medium (for example, portable terminal 171 owned by a player) ) Using a gaming machine (for example, a slot) that can execute a game enabling process for enabling a game in a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) including a gaming board and a gaming frame. Machine 1, card unit 750),
Unique information acquisition means (communication control IC 325aF, FIG. 66, FIG. 68, FIG. 69, FIG. 75) for acquiring unique information (main control ID) for authenticating the game board;
Authentication means (CU control unit 323F, FIG. 66, FIG. 68, FIG. 69, FIG. 75) for executing processing for authenticating the game board based on the unique information acquired by the unique information acquisition means;
As a result of the processing by the authentication means, when the authentication is successful, the permission means (CU control unit 323F, communication control IC 325aF, FIG. 66, FIG. 68, FIG. 69, FIG. 75) that allows the game enabling processing;
Acquisition means (for example, terminal reader / writers 170 and 7170) capable of acquiring the medium identification information from the recording medium in a non-contact manner when the recording medium is held over;
Input means (for example, touch panel 124, numeric keypad 120) for inputting an operation;
Receiving means (for example, step Sna2 in FIG. 17) for receiving the medium identification information acquired by the acquiring means;
A game enabling means (for example, step Sna7 in FIG. 17) for executing the game enabling process in response to the medium identification information being received by the receiving means;
In accordance with execution of the game enabling process, valuable value information (for example, prepaid balance remaining, number of balls, number of balls, game score) associated with the medium identification information received by the receiving means is displayed. First display processing means (for example, step Sna8 in FIG. 17) for executing processing for
Medium identification information is received by the receiving means (for example, it is determined that a terminal ID has been received in step Sta1 of FIG. 32), and a predetermined display start operation is input to the input means (for example, step of FIG. 27). When it is determined that there is an information inquiry operation in Sg6), the second display process for displaying medium detailed information (for example, terminal detailed information) associated with the received medium identification information is executed. Second display processing means (for example, step Sta2 in FIG. 32),
The second display processing means displays the medium detailed information when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the second display processing (for example, after the terminal detailed information display time is started in step Sta4 in FIG. 32). A display disable process for making display impossible is executed (for example, the process of step Su8 in FIG. 34 is performed), and the same medium identification information as the previously received medium identification information is newly received during the execution of the display disable process. If so (for example, if it is determined as YES in step Su7 in FIG. 34), the second display process is executed again (for example, the process in step Su5 in FIG. 34 is performed).

  According to such a configuration, the medium identification information associated with the recording medium received in a non-contact manner when the medium identification information is received and a predetermined display start operation is input is performed by the second display process. Although the information is displayed, the medium detailed information cannot be displayed when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the second display processing. For this reason, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus capable of making it impossible to display medium detailed information to other players after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the second display process. In addition, when the same medium identification information as the previously received medium identification information is newly received during the execution of the display disable process, the second display process is executed again, so that the same player can see the medium details. Information can be displayed again. Further, by authenticating the game board based on the unique information, it is possible to prevent a game using an unauthorized game board.

(2) In the gaming apparatus described in (1) above,
The predetermined condition is a condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the second display process (for example, a condition shown in Step Su2 of FIG. 34).

  According to such a configuration, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the second display process, the medium detailed information can be disabled from being displayed to other players.

(3) In the gaming apparatus described in (1) above,
The predetermined condition is a condition that the game has ended (for example, a condition shown in step Su3 in FIG. 34).

  According to such a configuration, when the game is over, the medium detailed information can be disabled from being displayed to other players.

(4) In the gaming apparatus described in (1) above,
The predetermined condition is a condition that a predetermined display end operation is input to the input means (for example, the condition shown in step Su4 in FIG. 34).

  According to such a configuration, when the display end operation is input, the medium detailed information can be disabled from being displayed to other players.

(5) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
Even if the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second display processing means receives a new medium identification information that is the same as the previously received medium identification information (for example, YES in step Su7 in FIG. 34). Is determined), the display disable process is not executed (for example, the process of step Su5 in FIG. 34 is performed).

  According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined condition is satisfied after the start of the second display process, the non-displayable process is not executed when the same recording medium is held over. Therefore, the same player can redisplay the medium detailed information.

(6) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
When the medium identification information is received by the receiving means, the game enabling means executes the game enabling process even if no operation is input to the input means (for example, in FIG. If the terminal ID is accepted in Sna2, the replay process is executed in step Sna7 even if there is no operation input).
In the case where the display start operation is input to the input unit and the medium identification information is subsequently received by the receiving unit (for example, there is an information inquiry operation in step Sg6 in FIG. 27). And then the second display process is executed (for example, the process of step Sta2 of FIG. 32 is performed).

  According to such a configuration, the player can display the medium detailed information by a simple operation of holding the recording medium after inputting the display start operation. Therefore, the convenience for the player can be improved.

(7) In the gaming apparatus described in (6) above,
The accepting means is
When the newly acquired medium identification information does not match the previously received medium identification information (for example, when it is determined NO in step Sna1 in FIG. 17), the player is requested to input a personal identification number ( For example, in step Sna3 of FIG. 17, a message prompting the input of a personal identification number is displayed), and medium identification information newly acquired on condition that the inputted personal identification number is authenticated (for example, in FIG. 17) If it is determined in step Sna5 that the password is valid, the terminal ID is accepted in step Sna2).
If the newly acquired medium identification information matches the previously received medium identification information (for example, if it is determined YES in step Sna1 in FIG. 17), the player is requested to input a personal identification number. The newly acquired medium identification information is received (for example, the terminal ID is received in step Sna2 without performing the processing of step Sna3, step Sna4, and step Sna4 in FIG. 17).

  According to such a configuration, when the newly placed recording medium is the same as the previously received recording medium, it is not necessary to input a personal identification number. Therefore, the convenience for the player can be improved.

(8) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (1) to (7),
The game enabling means executes a process for paying out a game medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball) used for a game on a gaming machine as the game enabling process,
The gaming device includes a type (for example, medal, pachinko ball) and a unit price (for example, 1 yen per ball, 2 yen per ball, 4 yen per ball, 1 sheet 5) associated with the medium identification information. Communication with a management device (for example, a card management computer 500, a hall computer 540, a medal management computer 550) that manages the number of game media for each medium identification information (e.g., circle, 20 yen, etc.). A communication means (for example, the communication unit 184 of the medal lending machine 100);
The second display processing means acquires, as the second display process, the number of game media for at least one of the type and unit price of the game media associated with the received medium identification information from the management device. Processing for displaying the number of game media as the medium detailed information (for example, processing for displaying the terminal detailed information screen shown in FIG. 33C) is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the number of game media for at least one of the type and unit price of the game media associated with the received medium identification information is acquired from the management device, and the acquired number of game media is the medium detailed information. Is displayed. Therefore, not only the type or unit price of game media that can be played on the gaming machine corresponding to the gaming device but also the number of types or unit price of game media that can be played on other gaming machines can be shown to the player. . As a result, the convenience for the player can be improved.

(9) In the gaming apparatus according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
The gaming device has a counting control means (for example, a built-in counting device 190, a process for controlling each external counter) for counting game media paid out from the gaming machine. For example, the control unit 181 further includes the counting process of FIG. 22 executed in step Sb28 of FIG.
The game enabling means is a payout process for paying out game media based on at least one of the number of game media associated with the received medium identification information and the number of game media counted by the counting process (for example, Executing at least one of step Sna7) in FIG. 17 and a lending process for lending a game medium used in a game on the gaming machine based on the valuable value (for example, step Sb21 in FIG. 15);
The counting control means disables the counting process while the medium detailed information is being displayed (for example, if it is determined in step Sc26 in FIG. 22 that the ball information display flag is on), the counting control unit performs steps Sc4 and Sc5. Processing for counting is not executed.),
The game enabling means disables the payout process during display of the medium detailed information (for example, if it is determined that the ball information display flag is on in step Sp10 of FIG. 21), the process of step Sp1 is repeated. The play main process is not executed.) On the other hand, the lending process is not disabled (for example, the lending process in step Sb21 in FIG. 15 can be executed even if the ball information display flag is on or off). )

  According to such a configuration, while the detailed medium information is being displayed, the counting process and the payout process are controlled to be disabled, while the lending process is controlled not to be disabled. For this reason, while the medium detailed information is being displayed, it is possible to prevent the medium detailed information from fluctuating and to lend gaming media. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving a player distrust or inconvenience even when the medium detailed information is being displayed.

(10) In the gaming apparatus described in (9) above,
The game enabling means, as the lending process, accepts a valuable value (for example, 100 yen) smaller than a normal lending unit amount (for example, 500 yen) and lends a small amount of lending game media (for example, 100 yen). For example, a small amount lending function can be executed (for example, step Sg13 in FIG. 27),
The game enabling means does not disable the small amount lending process during the display of the medium detailed information (for example, step Sg13 in FIG. 27 regardless of whether the ball information display flag is on or off). The small amount lending process can be executed.)

  According to such a configuration, when it is desired to rent a game medium urgently while the medium detailed information is being displayed, it is possible to minimize the loan of the game medium. As a result, the convenience for the player can be improved.

(11) Valuable value (for example, prepaid balance, holding ball, storage ball, associated with medium identification information (for example, terminal ID) acquired in a contactless manner from the recording medium in response to the holding of the recording medium, A gaming device (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit, etc.) capable of executing a game enabling process for enabling a game in a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) using a gaming score) 750), which is a management device capable of communicating with
In accordance with the execution of the game enabling process, valuable information associated with the medium identification information of the recording medium (for example, prepaid balance remaining, number of possessed balls, number of stored balls, game score) is stored in the gaming device. Display information transmission means for transmitting the first display information for display by the communication unit (for example, the communication unit 559 of the medal management computer 550, the communication unit 509 of the card management computer 500, the communication unit of the hall computer 540, or card management) A computer communication unit combining any two or three of the computer 500, the hall computer 540, and the medal management computer 550);
When the medium identification information is received by the gaming device and a predetermined display start operation is input, medium detailed information (for example, terminal detailed information) associated with the medium identification information is used for the game. Second display information transmitting means (for example, transmitting second display information for making the medium detailed information undisplayable by the gaming device when a predetermined condition is satisfied after the medium detailed information is displayed while the medium detailed information is displayed) The communication unit 559 of the medal management computer 550, the communication unit 509 of the card management computer 500, the communication unit of the hall computer 540, or any two or three of the card management computer 500, the hall computer 540, and the medal management computer 550. A communication unit of a combined computer).

  According to such a configuration, the management device transmits the second display information to the gaming device, whereby the medium detailed information associated with the recording medium received by the gaming device in a non-contact manner is transmitted to the gaming device. In addition to displaying the information, the medium detailed information can be disabled when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to provide a management device capable of making it impossible to display the medium detailed information to other players.

(12) In the management device according to (11) above,
The gaming device can execute a counting process (for example, a built-in counting device 190 and a process for controlling each external counter) for counting game media paid out from the gaming machine, As the game enabling process, the number of game media associated with the received medium identification information (for example, the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls acquired from a management computer or a card) and the number of game media counted by the counting process A payout process for paying out game media (for example, the replay operation board 185, the payout device 182, and the ball payout device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is controlled based on at least one of (for example, the counted number of balls). Processing) and a lending process (for example, a lending operation board 189) for lending gaming media used for gaming in the gaming machine based on the value of value. Dispensing device 182, the process of controlling the ball dispensing apparatus 797 of the pachinko machine 701) and is capable of executing at least one,
The second display information is information for disabling the payout process while the gaming apparatus is displaying the medium detailed information, while preventing the lending process from being disabled.

  According to such a configuration, the management device disables the counting process and the payout process by the gaming device while displaying the medium detailed information by the gaming device, and disables the lending process by the gaming device. You can avoid it.

(1-1) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), (For example, banknotes), rent game media, and based on receiving a return operation (for example, operation of return buttons 114 and 752), it is used for renting game media out of the accepted money. Remaining amount specifying information (for example, card ID or member ID or prepaid remaining amount data) capable of specifying a remaining amount (for example, prepaid balance), and a counting device (for example, counting device 190, each counter 705) capable of counting game media ) Count identification information (for example, member ID, card) that can identify the number of counted game media (for example, the number of medals, the number of balls) A gaming device (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750) capable of discharging a recording medium (for example, a membership card or a visitor card (registered trademark)) that can specify the ID, number of medals, number of balls itself. A management device (for example, a card management computer 500, a hall computer 540, a medal management computer 550, or a computer combining any two or three of these),
Management for managing settings (for example, setting of function validity / invalidity, setting of password) for functions (for example, card lock function, theft card restriction function, small-scale lending function) for the recording medium received by the gaming device Means (for example, the settings changed in step Sq5 to step Sq8, step Sq12 to step Sq17, step Sq21 to step Sq24 in FIG. 30 executed in step Sg14 in FIG. 27 are managed. Specifically, the card management computer. 500, the membership card table and the visitor card table of FIG. 7 are stored with a password, a card lock valid flag, and a theft card flag, which are the settings of the respective functions.
The management means includes: a process of invalidating the first recording medium by receiving the second recording medium in a state where the first recording medium is received by the gaming device; Processing for adding the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified on the recording medium to the remaining amount or the number of counted game media that can be specified on the second recording medium (for example, a diagram executed in step Sg12 of FIG. 27) 29, when the game device executes the process of taking over the setting of the function for the first recording medium to the second recording medium, the setting of the function for the first recording medium is performed. Further management of the transfer to the second recording medium is performed (for example, the function setting for the first recording medium stored in the management device or the gaming device is set in the second recording medium). Step Sj20 in Figure 29 to be executed in step Sg12 of associating the media. Figure 27).

  According to such a configuration, even when the first recording medium is integrated with the second recording medium, the function setting for the first recording medium is inherited by the second recording medium. As a result, even when a plurality of recording media are integrated, it is not necessary to set functions again, and a convenient management device can be provided.

(1-2) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), (For example, banknotes), rent game media, and based on receiving a return operation (for example, operation of return buttons 114 and 752), it is used for renting game media out of the accepted money. Remaining amount specifying information (for example, card ID or member ID or prepaid remaining amount data) capable of specifying a remaining amount (for example, prepaid balance), and a counting device (for example, counting device 190, each counter 705) capable of counting game media ) Count identification information (for example, member ID, card) that can identify the number of counted game media (for example, the number of medals, the number of balls) ID) and a gaming device (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750) capable of discharging a recording medium (for example, membership card, visitor card),
Storage means for storing the number of counted game media and the remaining amount (for example, the card table of FIG. 5A stored in the RAM 181b of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. The RAM 181b of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100) )When,
Updating means (for example, the counting process of FIG. 22 executed in step Sb25 of FIG. 15) for updating the number of counting game media stored in the storage means based on the counting by the counting device;
In a state where there is the remaining amount and the number of counted game media, a predetermined operation (for example, a withdrawal operation for taking out the remaining amount of money) is accepted (for example, YES is determined in step Sg1 of the touch panel operation process in FIG. 27, and the remaining amount is extracted in FIG. 28). Based on the determination in step Sh7 of the process), the remaining amount stored in the storage unit is deleted and the remaining amount is specified while the number of counted game media is stored in the storage unit Residual amount discharge control processing for controlling the discharge of a remaining amount recording medium that can identify the remaining amount specifying information that can be specified (for example, a card corresponding to a deposit amount, a membership card when accepting a membership card, a visitor card when not accepting a membership card) The remaining amount discharge control means to be executed (for example, step Sh12, step S12 of the remaining amount extraction process in FIG. 28 executed in step Sg11 in FIG. 27). -Up Sh13, step Sh15, step Sh17) and equipped with a,
The update means can update the number of game media stored in the storage means even when the remaining amount recording medium is discharged by the remaining amount discharge control means (for example, the remaining amount takeout in FIG. 28). After the card corresponding to the deposit remaining amount is discharged in step Sh15 of the process, the number of possessed balls at that time is reflected in the visitor card in step Sh18, and thereafter the number of possessed balls can be updated).

  According to such a configuration, by performing a predetermined operation, only the remaining amount is discharged to the outside of the gaming device while the counted number of gaming media remains in the gaming device. As a result, when there are counted game media, it is possible to prevent the ball lending using the remaining amount of the accepted money that is not used for game media lending from being erroneously performed. A device can be provided.

(1-3) Provided corresponding to a gaming machine (for example, slot machine 1, pachinko gaming machine 701) capable of playing a game using a predetermined gaming medium (for example, medal M, pachinko ball), (For example, banknotes), rent game media, and based on receiving a return operation (for example, operation of return buttons 114 and 752), it is used for renting game media out of the accepted money. Remaining amount specifying information (for example, card ID or member ID or prepaid remaining amount data) capable of specifying a remaining amount (for example, prepaid balance), and a counting device (for example, counting device 190, each counter 705) capable of counting game media ) Count identification information (for example, member ID, card) that can identify the number of counted game media (for example, the number of medals, the number of balls) ID) and a gaming device (for example, medal lending machine 100, card unit 750) capable of discharging a recording medium (for example, membership card, visitor card),
Storage means for storing the number of counted game media and the remaining amount (for example, the card table of FIG. 5A stored in the RAM 181b of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. The RAM 181b of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100) )When,
Updating means (for example, the counting process of FIG. 22 executed in step Sb25 of FIG. 15) for updating the number of counting game media stored in the storage means based on the counting by the counting device;
In a state where there is the remaining amount and the number of counted game media, a predetermined operation (for example, a withdrawal operation for taking out the remaining amount of money) is accepted (for example, YES is determined in step Sg1 of the touch panel operation process in FIG. 27, and the remaining amount is extracted in FIG. 28). Based on the determination in step Sh7 of the process), the remaining amount stored in the storage unit is deleted and the remaining amount is specified while the number of counted game media is stored in the storage unit Residual amount discharge control processing for controlling the discharge of a remaining amount recording medium that can identify the remaining amount specifying information that can be specified (for example, a card corresponding to a deposit amount, a membership card when accepting a membership card, a visitor card when not accepting a membership card) The remaining amount discharge control means to be executed (for example, step Sh12, step S12 of the remaining amount extraction process in FIG. 28 executed in step Sg11 in FIG. 27). -Up Sh13, step Sh15, a step Sh17),
When the remaining amount recording medium is received, the remaining amount specifying information that can specify the remaining amount stored in the storage unit and the count specifying information that can specify the number of counting game media stored in the storing unit Change means (for example, step Sj16 of post card insertion processing of FIG. 29 executed in step Sg12 of FIG. 27) for changing to a state that can be specified by the remaining amount recording medium,
The update means can update the number of game media stored in the storage means even when the remaining amount recording medium is discharged by the remaining amount discharge control means (for example, the remaining amount takeout in FIG. 28). After the card corresponding to the deposit remaining amount is discharged in step Sh15 of the process, the number of possessed balls at that time is reflected in the visitor card in step Sh18, and thereafter the number of possessed balls can be updated).

  According to such a configuration, by performing a predetermined operation, only the remaining amount is discharged to the outside of the gaming device while the counted number of gaming media remains in the gaming device. Further, when the remaining amount recording medium is received by the gaming device, the remaining amount specifying information capable of specifying the remaining amount stored in the gaming device and the counting specifying information capable of specifying the number of counting gaming media include the remaining amount recording medium. Therefore, the remaining amount and the number of counted game media existing in the gaming apparatus are collected in the remaining amount recording medium. As a result, when there are counted game media, it is possible to prevent the ball lending using the remaining amount that has not been used for the game media lending out of the accepted money from being mistakenly performed. At the same time, it is possible to provide a gaming apparatus capable of preventing inconvenience in a situation where the lending using the remaining amount is not mistakenly performed.

(1-4) In the above gaming device or management device,
The gaming device further includes:
Usable processing means (for example, FIG. 45) that performs usable processing (for example, remaining number storage processing) for making the received received value (for example, received amount) usable for the game based on the receipt of the money. Step S117, step S108),
Use processing means (for example, step S135 in FIG. 45) that performs use processing (for example, ball lending processing) that uses the usable value (for example, the remaining number) made available by the usable processing for lending the game medium. )When,
Discharge control means (for example, step S126 in FIG. 45) for discharging the recording medium that can specify the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the use value used in the use process from the usable value;
The usable processing means, as the usable processing, converts all of the received value as a condition on condition that the received value is less than a predetermined value (for example, NO is determined in step S116 in FIG. 45). All available processing to be used value is performed (for example, step S117 in FIG. 45), and the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, YES is determined in step S116 in FIG. 45). As described above, a partially usable process is performed in which a part of the received value is used as the usable value (for example, step S118 in FIG. 45),
The discharge control means discharges the recording medium on the basis of accepting the return operation (for example, YES is determined in step S125 of FIG. 45), while the partially usable process is performed. On the basis of this, a return process at the time of value reception for discharging the recording medium that can specify the remaining amount that has not been made the usable value of the received value without accepting the return operation (for example, , Step S119 of FIG. 45).

  According to such a configuration, if the reception value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the partial usable process is performed in which a part of the reception value is used, and the usable value of the reception value is Return processing at the time of value reception for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining amount that has not been performed is performed. For this reason, in order to use the remaining amount for the game, it is necessary to accept a recording medium. As a result, overuse of value for games can be prevented.

(1-5) In the above gaming device or management device,
The gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and the management device,
The gaming device further includes:
Comprising transmission means for transmitting information generated by the gaming machine to the management device;
The transmission means includes information conversion means (for example, an external output terminal) for converting the information generated by the gaming machine to the management apparatus and transmitting or relaying the information to the conversion apparatus.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and the management device, and information generated by the gaming machine is converted and transmitted to the management device by the gaming device or converted. Relayed to the device. For this reason, even if the information generated by the gaming machine is not information for the conventional management device, the information generated by the gaming machine is converted for the conventional management device, so that the conventional management device can be used. .

(1-6) In the above gaming device or management device,
The gaming machine is capable of giving a predetermined game point by generating a prize and playing a game using the game point,
The gaming device further includes:
Based on accepting the lending operation, game point transmitting means (for example, a card unit 750) that transmits information that can identify a game point to be added using at least a part of the accepted money to the gaming machine. Thus, based on the fact that the operation of the ball lending button 751 is accepted, information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 701.) When,
Based on accepting the counting operation, the game point receiving means (for example, each card counter 705 by the card unit 750 receives the information that can identify the game points stored in the gaming machine from the gaming machine). Based on the reception of the counting operation, information that can specify the game points stored in the pachinko gaming machine 701 is received from the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming machine can give a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and can play a game using the game point. Based on the fact that the lending operation is accepted by the gaming device. Based on the fact that information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the gaming machine and the counting operation is accepted, the gaming points stored in the gaming machine are The identifiable information is received from the gaming machine. For this reason, it is possible to deal with a gaming machine capable of giving a predetermined game point by the occurrence of a prize and capable of playing a game using the game point.

(1-7) In the above gaming device or management device,
The gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and a management device (eg, key management server 600),
The gaming device further includes:
Authentication data transfer means (for example, an authentication / communication control circuit 7501) for transferring data in communication exchange between the gaming machine and the management device for authenticating the gaming machine is provided.

  According to such a configuration, the gaming device is communicably connected to the gaming machine and the management device, and data is transferred by the gaming device in the exchange of communication between the gaming machine and the management device for authenticating the gaming machine. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming device that can contribute to improving the security of the gaming machine.

(1-8) In the above gaming device or management device,
The management device further includes receiving means for receiving a signal output from the gaming machine and indicating the launch strength of the game medium.

  According to such a configuration, information related to the emission intensity can be totaled in the management device.

(1-9) In the above gaming device or management device,
The management device further includes receiving means for receiving a changing signal output from the gaming machine and indicating that a plurality of pieces of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a changing manner.

  According to such a configuration, information corresponding to the fact that the identification information is changing can be totaled in the management device.

It is a system configuration figure showing the whole picture of a game system in an embodiment. It is a front view showing a slot machine and a medal lending machine. It is a partial sectional view showing the structure of a medal lending machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a medal lending machine. (A) is a figure which shows the card table of a medal lending machine, (b) is a figure which shows the game information during card reception of a medal lending machine, (c) shows the medal information of a medal lending machine. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the counter information of a medal lending machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a card management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the membership card table of a card management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the visitor card table of a card management computer. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a medal management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the member saving management table of a medal management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the visitor saving management table of a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the unit management table of a medal management computer. (A) is a figure which shows the member information table of a medal management computer, (b) is a figure which shows the game history table classified by member of a medal management computer. It is an illegal medal related setting screen figure in a medal management computer. It is a figure which shows the business end process screen in a medal management computer. It is an unauthorized medal user face image screen figure in a medal management computer. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content performed in a medal lending machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a card | curd acceptance process. It is a flowchart which shows the content of a terminal reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of issue / payment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a return process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a card lock collation process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a replay process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a count process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of an unauthorized medal process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a medal storage process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a fastening related process. It is a display screen figure which shows an example of a menu screen. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a touchscreen operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a remaining amount extraction process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a post card insertion process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a card lock process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a possession ball division | segmentation process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of an information inquiry process. It is a figure for demonstrating the display procedure of terminal detailed information. It is a flowchart which shows the processing content of a terminal detailed information display impossibility process. It is a front view which shows a pachinko gaming machine and a card unit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko gaming machine and a card unit. It is a figure showing the signal transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a setting screen figure displayed on the display of a card management computer. It is a flowchart showing an example of an alerting display process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a return process. It is a figure showing an example of a predetermined amount table. It is a figure showing an example of a display reference amount corresponding goods table. It is a figure showing an example of card DB. It is a figure showing an example of player DB. It is a flowchart showing an example of the process which a card unit performs. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the authentication of an enclosure type game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a hall server and hall control. It is a block diagram which shows another structure of a hall server and hall control. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the transmission process of the number of addition balls. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the transmission process of game information. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram for demonstrating display control of a game ball number display and a display. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process when abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication. It is a figure for demonstrating the encryption key used for communication between a key management server and communication control IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure explaining the process of the business message sequence between SC and communication control IC. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication sequence of communication control IC. It is a figure explaining the process of a 1st authentication sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of a gaming machine chip information authentication sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the authentication abnormality sequence of communication control IC. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting process at the time of power activation of CU control part 323F, and hall installation. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of power activation and normal start-up of CU control part 323F. It is a figure for demonstrating the process at the time of power activation and factory shipment of CU control part 323F. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate maker code. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of a board | substrate initial stage key or a board | substrate shipping key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of the authentication sequence of board | substrate serial ID and a board | substrate authentication key. It is a figure for demonstrating the process in the case of inquiring about security board information. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence. It is a figure for demonstrating the process of a board | substrate authentication key authentication abnormality sequence. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry timeout sequence of security board | substrate information. It is a figure explaining the process of the inquiry (collation) timeout sequence of gaming machine chip information. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the process of board | substrate authentication key authentication. It is an example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is a communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) demonstrates the communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. FIG. It is another example of the flowchart for demonstrating the switching process of communication mode, (a) is a communication mode switching process between CU control part-SC, (b) is a communication mode switching process between SC-communication control IC. It is a figure explaining. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of the check of a unified store code. It is a flowchart for demonstrating the authentication operation | movement of a board maker code. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a reception interval monitoring process. It is a flowchart for demonstrating abnormal message monitoring processing. It is a flow chart for explaining gaming machine chip inquiry processing. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. An embodiment of the gaming system of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, FIG. 1 is a system configuration diagram showing an overall image of the gaming system of the embodiment of the present invention. The gaming system mainly includes a slot machine 1, a medal lending machine 100, a card management computer 500, a medal management computer 550, a hall computer 540, a call lamp 200, a gift exchange POS 570, and a checkout device 580. It is configured.

  The slot machine 1 is a gaming machine that is arranged in parallel on each gaming island (not shown) arranged in the game hall. The medal lending machine 100 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the slot machine 1 at a predetermined side position of the slot machine 1 and is issued mainly for general players who are not registered as members. A visitor card (registered trademark) having a prepaid function as a game recording medium, a member card as a game recording medium issued to a member player registered as a member in the gaming machine, and the same as the member card A game used for a game in a game machine by accepting a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by a member player (hereinafter referred to as a “member portable terminal”) registered in advance by a member player as a game recording medium having the function of The medal earned in the process for lending out the medal as a medium and the game in the corresponding slot machine 1 is counted, and the medal within the range of the counted medal number is counted. Performing Le payout (the return) is the game apparatus of the present invention.

  In the following description, a visitor card, a member card, and a member portable terminal may be described as “cards” without distinction. Further, there is a case where “member card” is described without distinguishing between the member card and the member portable terminal.

  The card management computer 500 manages the cards used in the medal lending machine 100, the medal lending machine 100, and the like. The medal management computer 550 manages the number of medals counted in each medal lending machine 100, and the number of saved medals owned by a member player who possesses a member card or a member mobile terminal (hereinafter referred to as a medal number) , The number of stored balls) and the number of medals recorded on the visitor card (hereinafter also referred to as the number of held balls). The hall computer 540 manages game information such as table data of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall.

  The call lamp 200 receives an operation button for calling a store clerk of the game hall, and information on the game from the gaming machine, and the game situation such as the number of jackpots and big bonuses, the number of rotations from the previous jackpot and big bonuses, etc. And a display unit for displaying a game history and the like. The prize exchange POS 570 is installed in a counter where there is a store clerk in the game hall, and is operated by the store clerk to exchange the game value corresponding to the number of medals and the number of stored medals associated with the cards with a prize. Execute. The payment apparatus 580 receives the cards and executes a process for paying the prepaid balance associated with these cards into cash.

  And each apparatus which comprises these gaming systems of this embodiment is connected so that bidirectional | two-way data communication is possible via the hub (HUB) 70 and the communication cable 80, as shown in FIG. Each connected device is assigned a local IP address to form a local area network (LAN), and each of these devices connected to the local area network (LAN) can be individually identified. Each device has an IP address table in which each device (unit) ID is associated with a local IP address, a unit management table (see FIG. 10) described later, and the like. (Unit) By assigning each local IP address specified by the ID to the transmission data and transmitting / receiving it, each other It has to be able to perform the transmission and reception of data.

  As described above, the card management computer 500 according to the present embodiment manages the prepaid balance (game value) remaining in each card and manages these cards via the communication line 81. Connected to a management server 82 installed in a card management company outside the game hall so that bidirectional data communication can be performed. Various management information is transmitted from the card management computer 500 to the management server 82. Thus, the card management company can grasp the sales etc. of the cards at each game hall by the management server 82.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a monitoring camera system 21 for monitoring the inside of the game hall is connected to the hall computer 540 of the present embodiment, and the inside of the gaming hall imaged by the monitoring camera system 21 is connected. The monitoring image is stored and managed together with the base data of each slot machine 1 and the like. Furthermore, the hall computer 540 of the present embodiment is connected to a wireless broadcast system 20 that controls the income 9 used by the store clerk of the game hall. The hall computer 540 is connected to the store employee's income via the radio broadcast system 20. 9 can send an automatic voice message.

  Next, a slot machine that is an example of a gaming machine and a medal lending machine that is an example of a gaming device will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 1 and the medal lending machine.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of slot machines 1 are juxtaposed on a plurality of game islands (not shown) arranged in the amusement hall, and a housing 1a having an open front surface and a left side of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported by the front door 1b. The reels 2L, 2C and 2R having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in the horizontal direction at the upper position inside the housing 1a. Of the symbols arranged on these reels 2L, 2C and 2R, Three consecutive symbols are arranged so that they can be seen from the perspective window 3.

  When a game (game) is performed in the slot machine 1, first, a medal M, which is an example of a disk-shaped game medium, is inserted from the medal insertion unit 4, or a bet number is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 are valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. In the present embodiment, when the prescribed number of bets is set to three regardless of the gaming state and the prescribed number of bets is set, the pay lines L1 to L5 become valid. In addition, when the medal M is inserted exceeding the maximum number among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The medal lending machine 100 is installed corresponding to a side position on a predetermined side of the slot machine 1 (in the present embodiment, on the right side of the slot machine 1), accepts bills or cards, and is used for gaming in a gaming machine. A process for lending medal M, which is a disc-shaped game medium to be used, and a process for receiving a medal M acquired by a player in a game in the slot machine 1 and counting the received medal M Then, processing for making it possible to specify the counted number of acquired medals from the cards is performed.

  The medal lending machine 100 includes a card management computer 500 that manages the cards used in the medal lending machine 100 and the medal lending machine 100, and a medal management computer 550 that manages the number of stored medals and the number of medals. In addition, various computers such as a hall computer 540 for managing game information such as stand data of each slot machine 1 installed in the game hall are connected, and bidirectional data communication is possible between these computers. It is said that.

  The cards used in the present embodiment execute non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device as well as a non-volatile memory for storing various data, and rewriting and reading of the recorded information. IC cards having an IC chip having a control unit to be used are used, and for these cards, a card ID that can identify individual cards, specifically, a visitor card that starts with VC In the membership cards (member cards and member mobile terminals), the membership card IDs beginning with KC are stored in advance in an rewritable manner, the type of which can be identified from the card ID, and the prepaid balance Various data such as identifiable prepaid balance data are stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the amusement hall, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. Further, the member portable terminal has a function equivalent to that of the member card in a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the member player, and the member card ID and the member ID are stored in a non-rewritable manner. A member player can use a member card to obtain a medal M that has been once acquired and counted, and a saving medal that can be used again in the game after the next day. The number of saving medals, which is data of the saving medals, is not directly recorded, and the number of saving medals is stored in association with the card ID and the member ID in the medal management computer 550 that manages the information of the saving medals. Thus, the card ID and the member ID are specified.

  Similarly to the saving medal, the medal management computer 550 also stores the card ID, the member ID, and the medal information in association with each other, so that the card ID and the member ID are stored. The number of medals can be specified from. In addition to the membership cards, the medal management computer 550 stores the medal information associated with the card ID, and the visitor card has the possession medal. Medal information is not recorded. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store information on medals in a visitor card so that it can be compared with information on medals in the medal management computer 550.

  The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / depositing machine (not shown) installed in the amusement hall and also issued by the medal lending machine 100.

  Next, the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 2, the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 101 that has a vertically long rectangular front view and an opening / closing plate 102 that can open and close the front lower opening of the housing 101. And various devices to be described later are built in.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a bill insertion slot 110 for inserting bills is provided at the upper front of the opening / closing plate 102, and a liquid crystal display 123 with a touch panel 124 is provided at a lower position thereof. In the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124, various operations on the medal lending machine 100 are accepted, and information associated with these operations and information such as the prepaid balance, the number of medals, and the number of stored medals are displayed. Is done. At a lower position of the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124, a state notification lamp 111 configured by a full color LED and lit in a plurality of colors so that the state of the medal lending machine 100 can be notified, a membership card, A card insertion slot 112 for inserting a visitor card is provided.

  Below the status notification lamp 111, a deposit enabling lamp 113 for notifying that the deposit is available, a return button 114 for discharging the inserted membership card or visitor card, and a card for displaying a card balance, an error code, and the like. The balance display unit 115, the medal lending button 116 for paying out the medal M, the medal lending lamp 117 for displaying that the medal M can be lent, and the state of the lending medal storage unit (not shown) are notified. When the medal expired lamp 118, the numeric keypad 120 for inputting the personal identification number of the membership card, and the membership card are accepted, the membership card ID recorded on the membership card and the saving specified by the membership ID are received. Replay button 121 for performing a replay game using the number of medals, and input when performing a replay game A personal identification number display unit 119 for displaying a personal identification number, a face image photographing camera 188 (player imaging means) capable of photographing a facial image of a player playing a game in the corresponding slot machine 1, and a medal M A counting button 122 is provided for manually starting counting.

  A terminal reader / writer 170 for obtaining (reading out) the member card ID and the member ID stored in the member portable terminal from the member portable terminal is disposed below the various operation units.

  Below the terminal reader / writer 170, a medal replenishment door 130 for opening a part of the opening / closing plate 102 when replenishing the medal M to the rental medal storage 183 is provided so as to be openable and closable with the lower side as a rotation axis. ing. The medal supply door 130 cannot be opened unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a shop clerk or the like is inserted into the medal supply door key 131.

  A receiving unit 140 for receiving and counting the medals M acquired by the player through the game is provided at a position below the medal supply door 130, and a receiving unit 140 is provided from the lower part of the receiving unit 140. An introduction path cover 141 that constitutes an introduction path for guiding the received medal M downward and introducing it into the introduction port 142 of the counting device 190 described later is extended downward.

  Further, a nozzle 150 for guiding the medal M paid out from the payout device 182 (see FIG. 4) to the lower plate 5 of the slot machine 1 slightly below the central position in the vertical direction of the introduction path cover 141. The introduction path cover 141 is inserted in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 3 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the structure of the medal lending machine 100. As shown in FIG. The medal M inserted into the opening 140a of the receiving unit 140 is guided into the introduction path cover 141 by the receiving unit 140, and falls downward in the introduction path K including the introduction path cover 141 and the opening / closing plate 102. . In the middle of dropping, the medal M collides with the rod-shaped members 146a to 146c facing in the front-rear direction, so that the posture of the medal M is changed to a lateral posture in which the front and back surfaces face the left and right side plates 141b.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a protective member 145 that guides the medal M falling from above to the left side of the nozzle 150 and bypasses the nozzle 150 so as not to collide with the nozzle 150 at the upper position of the front insertion hole 143 a. Is provided. The protection member 145 has a guide inclined surface 145 b that is inclined downward from the right side to the left side, and is formed so as to surround the nozzle 150. Thus, the front insertion hole 143a and the rear insertion hole 143b for inserting the nozzle 150 in the front-rear direction are formed so as to be biased toward one end side in the left-right width direction (right side in the present embodiment). The narrow path K1 formed so as to avoid the nozzle 150 may be formed on the right side instead of the left side.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the base 151 of the nozzle 150 protruded ahead rather than the front insertion hole 143a, the protrusion part 152 was rotatably connected in the front position rather than this front insertion hole 143a. In the introduction path K, the base 151 may be rotatably connected. In this case, it is necessary to enlarge the front insertion hole 143a so that the movement of the protrusion 152A can be allowed. However, since the medal M may flow out from the gap, the protection member 145 surrounds the nozzle 150. Good.

  Further, by surrounding the periphery of the nozzle 150 in a cylindrical shape with the protective member 145 in this way, the medal M does not enter the protective member 145, so that the protrusion 152A can be rotated with respect to the base 151. Even if it is provided, the drop of the medal M is not adversely affected.

  A light emitting unit 165 that emits light when the counting device 190 counts the medal M is located at a position corresponding to the opening 140 a of the receiving unit 140 in the opening / closing plate 102, that is, the entrance side of the opening 140 ′ of the receiving unit 140. Is provided. The light emitting unit 165 is exposed to the front side from a horizontally long rectangular opening provided in the opening / closing plate 102. As shown in FIG. 4, an LED unit 190 f that emits light when the medal M is counted is provided at the front of the counting device 190, and the LED unit 190 f of the counting device 190 is provided on the back side of the opening / closing plate 102. A light receiving unit 168 that receives light emission is provided. The light receiving unit 168 is connected to a decorative optical fiber 167 that guides the introduced light to the light emitting unit 165, and the optical fiber 167 extends upward along the back surface of the opening / closing plate 102 to emit the light emitting unit. 165.

  By providing the light emitting unit 165 in this manner, it is possible to notify the player that the medal M is counted by the counting device 190. In addition, it is possible to notify surrounding players by light emission that the medal M has been paid out in the corresponding slot machine 1, so that it is possible to enhance the production effect and collect the gaze of the surrounding players. Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal medal (a rooster medal) or the like from being inserted into the receiving unit 140.

  Further, the LED unit 190f is provided in the counting device 190, and the light emission of the LED unit 190f is guided to the light emitting unit 165 by the optical fiber 167 to the light emitting unit 165, so that the wiring between the counting device 190 and the opening / closing plate 102 is unnecessary. Therefore, the structure can be simplified and the attaching / detaching operation of the opening / closing plate 102 is facilitated as compared with the case where an LED lamp is directly provided in the light emitting portion 165.

  The narrow path K1 is provided with a medal detection sensor 190h as shown in FIGS. 3 (A) and 3 (B). The medal detection sensor 190h detects whether or not the medal M has passed through the narrow path K1. In the present embodiment, the medal detection sensor 190h is configured by a pair of a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion of a photosensor provided at both ends of a diagonal line of a rectangular cross section of the narrow path K1. However, the medal detection sensor 190h is not limited to such a structure, and may be another structure as long as it can detect whether or not the medal M has passed through the narrow path K1.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The medal lending machine 100 includes a bill recognition unit 180, an internal card reader / writer 187, a terminal reader / writer 170, a lending operation board 189, a replay operation board 185, a counting device 190, a payout device 182, a control unit 181 and the like. The

  The banknote recognition unit 180 is connected to the banknote insertion slot 110, takes in the banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 110, executes authentication of the authenticity and banknote type, and outputs the identification result to the control unit 181. The banknote recognition unit 180 can accept various banknotes (10,000, 5,000, 2,000, and 1,000 yen banknotes).

  The internal card reader / writer 187 is built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 112. The internal card reader / writer 187 reads and writes recorded information such as a card ID recorded on the member card and visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 112, a member ID (member card only), and prepaid balance data. And a card stock part (not shown) for storing visitor cards (including collected cards) used for issuing, and the cards stored in the card stock part (not shown) can be issued. Yes.

  The terminal reader / writer 170 performs wireless communication with the member portable terminal when the member portable terminal is held over (approached within a predetermined distance), and the card ID, member ID, prepaid balance data, etc. are transmitted from the member portable terminal. Reading and writing of recorded information is performed in a non-contact manner.

  Thus, the medal lending machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a means for receiving a visitor card or a member card (card insertion slot 112, internal card reader / writer 187, etc.) and a means for receiving a member portable terminal (terminal reader / writer 170, etc.). ) And both. In addition, the structure provided only with the means to receive a member portable terminal may be sufficient, without providing the means to receive a visitor card or a membership card.

  The counting device 190 counts the number of introduced medals M. The medals M introduced into the counting device 190 are inserted into the rotating disk 190g, and the medals M discharged one by one from the rotating disk 190g are aligned and detected by the photo sensor 190e. At the moment when the medal M is detected by the photo sensor 190e, an image of the medal M is taken by the medal photographing camera 190c.

  Then, the controller 190a of the counting device 190 instantaneously determines the authenticity of the medal M (whether it is a regular medal or an illegal medal) based on the medal image photographed by the medal photographing camera 190c, and uses the medal judgment information as the judgment result. While transmitting to the control unit 181, the flow path of the medal M is switched by the flow path switch 190 d, and the regular medal M is counted as the regular medal M and flows toward the discharge port (not shown). Are counted as illegal medals and flow toward a medal storage box (not shown). As described above, the illegal medals are not discharged from the discharge port after being counted, but are stored in the medal storage box, and the unauthorized medals are prevented from being circulated and reused. Yes. Thus, the medal M introduced into the counting device 190 is determined for authenticity and counted. Further, the medal M discharged from the discharge port is discharged into a gaming machine installation island (not shown) through an opening formed on the lower surface of the housing 101, and a collection device (not shown) provided in the gaming machine installation island. It has come to be collected.

  The control unit 181 controls the operation of each device of the medal lending machine 100. The control unit 181 includes a central processing circuit (CPU) 181a capable of executing a control program, a card ID of a card, a prepaid balance, the number of medals, the number of stored medals, the number of points visited, and the number of corresponding slot machines 1 Rewrite the setting information including the RAM 181b that can store various data such as data, game information of members who are playing games, the control program executed by the central processing circuit (CPU) 181a, and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 It includes an EEPROM 181c, which is a storable nonvolatile memory, and a real-time clock (RTC) 181d that can output time information, calendar information, and the like at that time. The RAM 181b is backed up by a battery (not shown), and the stored data is retained for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off. Further, the control unit 181 can perform bidirectional data communication with various computers via the communication unit 184 and the HUB 70 described above.

  The control unit 181 includes a display control board 129 for controlling the liquid crystal display 123 and the touch panel 124, a bill recognition unit 180, a state notification lamp 111, an internal card reader / writer 187, a terminal reader / writer. 170, a face image photographing camera 188, a payout device 182, and a sound control board (not shown) for controlling a speaker (not shown) are connected. In the speaker, notification from the medal lending machine 100 is performed by voice. The medal lending machine 100 itself may be configured to output a control signal for notification from the speaker of the calling lamp 200 without providing a means for outputting a voice. Further, the control unit 181 is connected to a reset switch 186 for resetting values of the total medal storage number, the own store medal storage number, and the fake medal storage number of medal information described later. The reset switch 186 is provided inside the casing 101 and can be operated when the opening / closing plate 102 (see FIG. 2) at the lower front of the casing 101 is opened.

  An open / close plate key 106 is provided at the upper end of the open / close plate 102 (see FIG. 2). By locking with the opening / closing plate key 106, the opening / closing plate 102 is detachably attached to the front side of the medal lending machine 100. The opening / closing plate 102 cannot be removed unless a predetermined key (not shown) carried by a store clerk or the like of the game hall is inserted into the opening / closing plate key 106.

  In addition, a lending operation board 189 is connected to the control unit 181. The lending operation board 189 includes a card balance display 115 ′ corresponding to the card balance display unit 115, a medal lending button switch 116 ′ corresponding to the medal lending button 116, and a return button switch corresponding to the return button 114. 114 ′, a deposit enabling lamp 113, a medal lending lamp 117, a medal expired lamp 118, and a counting button switch 122 ′ corresponding to the counting button 122 are provided.

  Further, a replay operation board 185 is connected to the control unit 181. On the replay operation board 185, the code number display unit 119 ′ corresponding to the code number display unit 119, the numeric keypad switch 120 ′ corresponding to the numeric keypad 120, and the replay button switch 121 corresponding to the replay button 121 are displayed. 'And is provided.

  Further, the control unit 181 is connected to a counting device 190 provided at a lower position of the medal lending machine 100 so that each counting signal from the counting device 190 can be input. In response to the input of the counting signal from the counting device 190, various tables to be described later are updated. The counting device 190 is provided with the above-described medal photographing camera 190c, the flow path switch 190d, and the LED unit 190f. Further, the counting device 190 is provided with a memory 190b for temporarily storing medal images taken by the medal shooting camera 190c, and a controller 190a for controlling these devices and determining the authenticity of the medal M. The counting device 190 is provided with an open / close sensor 190k and a medal detection sensor 190h.

  FIG. 5 is a diagram showing information (card table, card receiving game information, medal information, counter information) stored in the RAM 181b of the control unit 181. In the card table stored in the RAM 181b of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5A, the card ID read from the card, the member ID (member card only), and the password (member card) Class only), prepaid balance based on card ID and prepaid balance data, number of medals specified from card ID, number of saved medals specified from card ID and member ID (member cards only), and member ID Indicates the number of points visited (member card only), a deposit-amount flag indicating whether the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card, and whether the card lock function for the card is enabled or disabled A card lock valid flag and a theft indicating whether or not the card is registered for the theft card restriction function. A card flag, and today the jackpot number that is aggregated in the history accumulation processing in the game history summary functions for the cards, a small amount lent valid flag small amount lent function to the cards, indicating a valid or invalid is stored.

  The deposit remaining amount corresponding card is a membership card or a visitor card discharged in step Sh15 in FIG. 28 executed in step Sg11 in FIG. 27 when a “remaining amount withdrawal” button in FIG. 26 described later is operated. The remaining amount corresponding card is associated.

  The card lock function is a function that prevents the card from being returned or the card lock function from being switched from valid to invalid unless the password is entered. In the present embodiment, when the card lock function is enabled, the ball splitting function and the post-card insertion function, which will be described later, cannot be executed unless a password is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any function that is restricted from being executed when the card lock function is effective may be any function.

  The stolen card restriction function is a function that restricts a stolen card from being used by registering a stolen card. The registration of the theft card is performed as follows.

  For example, the card ID received in the unit management table of FIG. 10 of the medal management computer 550 by inputting the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 and the time during which the card has been used in the card management computer 500. And the theft card flag of the card ID is registered in the ON state in the member card table or visitor card table of FIG.

  Alternatively, the card of the card used immediately before the member card table or the visitor card table of FIG. 7 can be obtained by inputting to the medal lending machine 100 that the card has been stolen with the remote controller immediately after being stolen. The theft card flag corresponding to the ID is registered as an on state.

  The game history totaling function is a function for totaling game history (for example, the number of jackpots, the number of variations between jackpots, the number of reach, etc.) in association with the card ID of the card. The small amount lending function is a function that lends medals for an amount smaller than the normal lending unit amount. For example, normally, lend medal in units of 1000 yen, but the small amount lending function sets 1000 yen or less. It is possible to lend in the amount of money, for example, in units of 100 yen.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5B, the game information stored in the RAM 181b includes game information from the time when the member card or visitor card is inserted into the card reader / writer 187, that is, The game information relating to the game of the player who has the member card or visitor card that has been played is collected.

  Specifically, the start time (card acceptance time) when the player started the game, the end time (card return time) when the player finished the game, the player's game time, and the player's card The number of used medals indicating the number of medals used since receiving the player, the number of replay medals used for replay after receiving the player's card (member only), and the counting device after receiving the player's card When a medal inserted in 190 is determined as an illegal medal, the cumulative illegal medal number indicating the cumulative number determined as the illegal medal is stored, and a player playing a game in the corresponding slot machine 1 plays a game. The game information can be grasped since it started.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5C, the medal information stored in the RAM 181b includes the payout total medal number that is the total number of medals paid out today from the payout device 182 and the counting device 190 in the current date. The total number of medals counted (the number of counting game media), which is the total number of medals inserted, the total number of illegal medals, the total number of medals determined to be illegal medals by the counting device 190, and the illegality by the counting device 190 The total number of medals stored as the total number of medals determined to be medals and stored in the medal storage box, and of the total number of medals stored, the store medals used in other areas of the store The number of own store medals stored indicating the number and the number of stored false medals indicating the number of stored false medals that are medals brought in from outside such as other stores are stored.

Further, the counter information stored in the RAM 181b is incremented by 1 when it is determined that the medals inserted into the counting device 190 are continuously illegal medals, as shown in FIG. 5D. A continuous illegal medal counter to be (incremented) is set.
<<< Card Management Computer 500 >>>
Next, the card management computer 500 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 6, a card management computer 500 used in the present embodiment has a CPU 502 that performs various processes executed by the card management computer 500 on a data bus 501 that transmits and receives data inside the computer. RAM 503 used as a work memory, RTC 504 for outputting time information and calendar information, a storage device 505 including a hard disk, an input device 506 such as a keyboard and a mouse, a display device 507 for displaying and outputting various screens, and various information A printer 508 for print output, a communication unit 509 that performs data communication with each device such as a medal lending machine 100 (control unit 181) and a card issuing / payment machine connected to a local area network (LAN), and a card company. Data communication with the management server 82 Digital service unit (DSU) 510 is connected is a conventional computer.

  In the storage device 505, in addition to a processing program in which processing contents for performing various processes executed in the card management computer 500 are described, a membership card table (see FIG. 7 (a)) and a visitor card table (see FIG. 7 (b)) for managing the prepaid balance remaining in the visitor card.

  In the member card table, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), each member card is associated with a member card ID that can be individually identified, and the member ID of the member player who owns the member card and the prepaid Used for the remaining amount, an unusable flag indicating whether or not the member card is unusable, a deposit remaining amount corresponding flag indicating whether or not the member card is a deposit remaining amount corresponding card, a card lock function, etc. Whether the card is a registered card stating that the member card has been stolen in the stolen card restriction function, and a card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function is valid or invalid. A theft card flag indicating whether or not is stored. As a result, from the membership card ID or membership ID stored in the membership card, the prepaid balance, whether the membership card can be used, whether the membership card is a card corresponding to the balance of payment, a PIN, a card lock It is possible to specify whether the function is valid or invalid, and whether or not the card is registered for theft. In the present embodiment, the password for the membership card is set in advance when the membership card is issued.

  In the visitor card table, as shown in FIG. 7B, each visitor card is associated with a card ID that can be individually identified, and the status of the visitor card (whether it is being used or stored). ), The latest issuance date and time when the visitor card was issued, the prepaid balance, the unusable flag indicating whether or not the visitor card is unusable, and the visitor card corresponding to the balance of deposit In the receipt balance corresponding flag indicating whether or not the card, the card lock valid flag indicating whether the card lock function for the visitor card is valid, the PIN used for the card lock function, etc., and the theft card restriction function A theft card flag indicating whether or not the visitor card has been registered that the theft has been stolen is stored. As a result, based on the card ID stored in the visitor card, the prepaid balance, whether the visitor card can be used, whether the visitor card is a card for remaining payment, the latest issue date, and whether the card lock function is valid or invalid It is possible to specify the personal identification number and whether or not the card is registered for theft.

  The card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment transmits the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 and the accepted cards transmitted from each medal lending machine 100 in response to the acceptance of the cards in the medal lending machine 100. In response to the reception of the card acceptance notification including the (member) card ID read out from the card and the prepaid balance, a process of determining whether or not the card can be used and returning it to the medal lending machine 100 is executed.

  Further, the card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment is included in the received lending completion notification in response to the reception of the lending completion notification transmitted along with the lending processing in the medal lending machine 100 (membership). ) A process of subtracting and updating the tax-included use amount included in the lending completion notice from the prepaid balance stored in the member card table or visitor card table corresponding to the card ID is performed.

  In addition, the card management computer 500 (CPU 502) of the present embodiment receives the card payment notice in response to the receipt of the card payment notice transmitted along with the execution of the issue / payment process in the medal lending machine 100 or the card issuance / payment machine. A process of adding and updating the deposit amount included in the card deposit notification to the prepaid balance stored in the member card table or the visitor card table corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the card deposit notification is performed.

  Next, the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 8, the medal management computer 550 used in the present embodiment has a central operation for performing various processes executed by the medal management computer 550 on a data bus 551 that transmits and receives data inside the computer. A processing unit (CPU) 552, a RAM 553 used as a work memory, a real-time clock (RTC) 554 that outputs time information and calendar information, a storage device 555 including a hard disk, an input device 556 such as a keyboard and a mouse, various types It is a normal computer to which a display device 557 for displaying and outputting a screen, a printer 558 for printing various information, and a communication unit 559 for performing data communication with a medal lending machine 100 connected to a local area network (LAN). .

  The storage device 555 stores the member game on the business day owned by the member player who owns the membership card in addition to the processing program in which the processing contents for performing various processings executed in the medal management computer 550 are described. A member saving management table (see FIG. 9 (a)) for managing the number of medals acquired by the user and the number of saving medals acquired by the member player before the business day, and recorded on the visitor card A visitor savings management table (see FIG. 9B) for managing the number of medals earned on the day of business by the player possessing the visitor card, and the current medal lending machine 100 in the game hall A unit management table for managing the total number of illegal medals etc. and the cards accepted by each medal lending machine 100 ( 10), a member information table (see FIG. 11 (a)) in which member information about the member player who owns the member card is stored, and a member ID for each member ID that can identify the member player. And a member-specific game history table (see FIG. 11B) in which a game history including the game information is stored.

  In the member saving management table, as shown in FIG. 9 (a), a member ID, which is member identification information that can individually identify a member player possessing the member card in association with each member card ID, and , The total number of medals earned by the member player on that business day, and the number of medals that have not been used for game or prize exchange, and the gain obtained by the member player before the business day The number of stored medals, which is the total number of medals and is not used for game or prize exchange, and the number of today's jackpots counted by the history count processing of the game history count function for the member cards are stored. ing. Thereby, from the card ID or the member ID stored in the member card, the number of medals possessed by the member player, the number of stored medals, and the number of hits of today can be specified.

  The number of medals managed in the member savings management table is managed as the number of medals only on the day of business, and the number of medals present in the member savings management table in the closing process after the closing of business is the savings medal All are reset after being added to the number. Further, the number of jackpots managed in the member saving management table is reset after being added to the cumulative number of jackpots in the member-specific game history table of FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, the visitor saving management table associates each visitor card with a card ID that can be individually identified, and possesses the latest issue date and time of the visitor card and the visitor card. The total number of medals earned by the player on that business day, which is the number of medals that have not been used for game or prize exchange, and is counted by the history counting process of the game history counting function for the visitor card The number of today's jackpots is stored. Thereby, from the card ID memorize | stored in the visitor card | curd, the number of medals possessed by the said player and today's jackpot number can be specified now.

  Note that the number of medals managed in the visitor savings management table is valid only on the day of the business, and all medals existing in the visitor savings management table are reset in the closing process after the end of business. , Disabled. The number of jackpots managed in the visitor savings management table is valid only on the business day, and is reset after the business ends.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the unit management table stores the local IP address of the medal lending machine 100 in association with the device ID uniquely assigned to each medal lending machine 100 installed in the game hall. IP, an installed island that stores the island number of the game island where the medal lending machine 100 is installed, and a situation that stores whether the medal lending machine 100 is accepting a card or is waiting. The corresponding machine number in which the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 is stored, the reception ID in which the card ID of the card being accepted is stored, and each medal lending machine 100 at that time The total number of illegal medals counted and the total number of medals stored in each medal lending machine 100, the number of own medals stored, and the number of false medals stored are stored. Medals related information, by periodically be transmitted from each medal lending machine 100 in the counting process which are executed by the medal management computer 550, so that the latest Medals related information is managed.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the member information table is associated with the member ID of the member player who owns the membership card, according to the personal identification number and acceptance of the membership card. From visit points that are updated once a day by a predetermined number of visit points, rank based on visit status, member's name (last name and name), gender, age, birthday, occupation, address, e-mail address Member attribute information (personal information) is registered.

  In the member-specific game history table, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), for each member ID, the game history of the member player, specifically, the date of visit to the store, the number of the slot machine 1 that played the game. Game consisting of number, model name, game start time (time), game end time (time), game time from game start to game end, number of replay medals, number of used medals, number of medals, total number of hits History is stored. The visit date of the member-specific game history table stores the date when the game history is stored based on the calendar information output from the RTC 554, and the game history of the game start time, game end time, and game time is This is stored based on member game history data transmitted from the medal lending machine 100 when the card is returned.

  Here, the illegal medal-related settings that can be executed by the medal management computer 550 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 12. In the medal management computer 550 according to the present embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 in the game hall. Various settings relating to notifications and operation conditions when detecting illegal medals executed in the above are made possible on the illegal medal related setting screen (threshold setting means) shown in FIG.

  In the illegal medal related setting screen of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, the setting items of “unit setting” and “island unit setting” are provided at the upper part of the screen. The slot machine 1 to be set can be designated in units of units or in units of islands.

  For example, if “set by unit” is used, the slot machines 1 to be set can be designated one by one by using the unit number, and if “set by island” is used, a plurality of slot machines 1 to be set can be specified. You can specify each island by island number. If "island unit setting" is used, a game area where a game can be performed with a medal worth 5 yen per one, a game area where a game can be played with a medal worth 20 yen per piece, etc. Can be specified for each amusement island. In the “island unit setting”, the island unit is set so that a plurality of slot machines 1 installed on one side of one amusement island and a plurality of slot machines 1 installed on the other side can be individually set. It is divided.

  Further, the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen is notified when each medal lending machine 100 determines that a medal inserted into the counting device 190 is an illegal medal. A selection input unit is provided for setting “total number of illegal medals”, “cumulative number of illegal medals”, and “number of consecutive illegal medals detected” which are conditions to be performed.

  Further, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input section of “total illegal medal number”, the total number of medals determined as illegal medals by the counting device 190 from the time of starting the game hall, that is, the above-mentioned It can be set to notify when the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment).

  In addition, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input section of “cumulative illegal medal number”, the counting device 190 illegally operates from the time when the player inserts the member card or the visitor card into the medal lending machine 100. When the total number of medals determined as medals, that is, the cumulative number of illegal medals (see FIG. 5B) in the above-described card receiving game information reaches a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment), a notification is given. Can be set to do.

  In addition, in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition”, in the selection input unit of “continuous illegal medal detection count”, the number of times that the counting device 190 continuously determines as illegal medal, that is, the above-described counter information consecutive fraud It can be set to notify when a medal counter (see FIG. 5D) reaches a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, when an illegal medal is detected three times in succession).

  In this way, by setting “total number of illegal medals”, “cumulative illegal medals”, and “number of consecutive illegal medals detected”, several medals paid out from the payout device 182 of the medal lending machine 100 are set. When the player counts without noticing that these illegal medals are mixed in (unintentional case), it is not necessary to report them as illegal medals. It is also possible to make a setting so that notification is made when at least one illegal medal is detected.

  Also, in the item of “operation when detecting illegal medals” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, when the condition set in the item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” is met, an alarm notification (status notification lamp) is set. A check box is provided for selecting whether to turn on 111 and notify medal management computer 550 only) or to stop alarming and counting of counting device 190.

  In addition, in the item “handling of illegal medals” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, when an illegal medal (own medal or fake medal) is detected in the counting device 190, the illegal medal is stored in the medal storage box. You can set whether or not to do so. In the “handling of illegal medals”, check boxes for “invalid storage unit”, “discharge illegal medals to the island when the storage unit is full” and “stop error when the storage unit is full” are provided.

  Here, if the check box of “invalid storage unit” is checked, when an illegal medal is detected by the counting device 190, it can be discharged from the outlet to the game island without being stored in the medal storage box. This “reservoir invalid” setting is a setting used when there is a device for collecting illegal medals by providing a separate medal authenticity determination machine on the game island.

  In addition, if the check box “Discharge illegal medals into the island when the storage part is full” is checked, only if the medal storage box becomes full, it is discharged from the outlet to the amusement island without being stored in the medal storage box. You can do that.

  In addition, when the check box of “Stop error when the storage unit is full” is checked, the counting process of the counting device 190 can be stopped and error notification can be performed when the medal storage box becomes full.

  In addition, in the item of “reservoir state notification condition” provided on the illegal medal related setting screen, a selection input unit for setting the number of sheets to be “full tank notification condition” and the number of sheets to be “closed notification condition” And a selection input unit for setting.

  Here, in the “full tank notification condition”, it is possible to set a first threshold value (first storage amount) that is the number of medals serving as a reference for determining that the medal storage box is full. For example, in this embodiment, the “full tank notification condition” is set to “100”, which is when 100 illegal medals are stored in the medal storage box, that is, the total of the aforementioned medal information. When the number of stored medals (see FIG. 5C) reaches 100, it is determined that the tank is full. In addition, the medal lending machine 100 notifies the medal management computer 550 while notifying by lighting the state notification lamp 111 as described later when the “full tank notification condition” is satisfied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a predetermined number of medals are stored in the medal storage box when the game hall is closed (when the business is closed), the medal lending for which medals are collected from the medal storage box The machine 100 is informed by turning on the status notification lamp 111 and also notified to the medal management computer 550. In the “closing notification condition”, a second threshold (second storage amount) is set which is the number of medals serving as a reference for determining whether or not the medal lending machine 100 is a target for collecting medals from the medal storage box. Can be done. For example, in the present embodiment, “50 notifications” (50% of when the store is full) is set as the “closing notification condition”, and this is set to 50 in the medal storage box when the store is closed (when the store is closed). Is set to notify when the number of illegal medals is stored, that is, when the total number of medals stored in the aforementioned medal information (see FIG. 5C) is 50.

  In the present embodiment, medals of different sizes (for example, φ25 medal and φ30 medal) are set by appropriately setting the number of thresholds in the “full tank notification condition” and “closed shop notification condition”. It can be set according to the size of the medal storage box. For example, even when the same number of medals are stored, the storage amount of the medal storage box changes according to the size of the medals (for example, 100 medals of φ25 are full but 80 medals of φ30). Therefore, notification can be made at an appropriate level by changing the threshold according to the size of the medal.

<Operation of medal lending machine 100>
Hereinafter, operation | movement of the medal lending machine 100 of this Embodiment is demonstrated using FIGS. 15-31. First, as shown in FIG. 15, the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 is activated by turning on the power to the medal lending machine 100, thereby executing the activation process of Sb <b> 1 to initialize various tables and each unit. The connection management request, transmission of a connection confirmation request to the card management computer 500, hall computer 540, and medal management computer 550, and the card management computer 500, hall computer 540, medal management computer in response to the transmission of the connection confirmation request. Settings such as initial values are executed for each setting data based on the setting information returned from 550.

  Then, after the activation process is completed, the process of Sb2 to Sb8 is cyclically performed, so that the member portable terminal is received by the member player by accepting the card (Sb2), which is the insertion of the membership card or visitor card into the card insertion slot 112. Terminal ID reception (Sba2) performed when held over the terminal reader / writer 170, operation of a lending button by a player (member or visitor) (Sb3), cash acceptance by insertion of a bill from the bill insertion slot 110 (Sb4) The player enters a standby state for detecting a return button operation (Sb5), a replay button 121 operation (Sb6), a medal insertion detection to the counting device 190 (Sb7), and a predetermined error signal detection (Sb8). .

<< Card acceptance process >>
When the player inserts a visitor card or a membership card into the card insertion slot 112 in the standby state of these Sb2 to Sb8, the insertion detection information accompanying the insertion of the visitor card or membership card is controlled from the card reader / writer 187. By outputting to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is card acceptance in Sb 2, proceeds to step Sb 20, and executes card acceptance processing.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the contents of the card receiving process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 16, in the card accepting process of the present embodiment in Sb20, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 issues an instruction for taking in the member card or visitor card inserted into card insertion slot 112. The data is output to the card reader / writer 187, the inserted member card or visitor card is taken into the card reader / writer 187, and the stored data stored in the member card or visitor card, specifically, the member card or The (member) card ID, member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, medal count data (visitor card only), etc. of the visitor card are read (step Sn1).

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 transmits a theft card confirmation request including the (member) card ID read from the accepted member card or visitor card and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 to the card management computer 500 (step). Sn21).

  The CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 indicates that the theft card flag corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the theft card confirmation request is on based on the membership card table or the visitor card table described in FIG. Check whether it is “1”. Based on the confirmation result, information indicating whether the card is a theft card is transmitted to the medal lending machine 100 having the device ID included in the theft card confirmation request.

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the received card is a theft card based on the received information indicating whether or not it is a theft card (step Sn22).

  If it is determined that the card is a theft card (YES in step Sn22), the CPU 181a transmits information indicating that the theft card has been received and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 to the hall computer 540 (step Sn23).

  The hall computer 540 controls the radio broadcast system 20 based on the reception of the information, and informs that the theft card has been received from the income 9 worn by the store clerk and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100. Is output, and the surveillance camera system 21 is controlled to photograph the player who has inserted the theft card into the medal lending machine 100. This makes it possible to identify a player who has attempted to use a card that is suspected of being stolen, and to leave evidence of the use of the stolen card.

  Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a reset operation has been performed by determining whether or not a reset signal has been received from a remote control possessed by the store clerk (step Sn24). When determining that there is no reset operation (NO in step Sn24), the CPU 181a repeats this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the store clerk rushed to the medal lending machine 100 and performed a reset operation (YES in step Sn24), the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to return the card (step Sn4), and the card Return the process to the caller of the acceptance process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not a theft card (NO in step Sn22), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 includes an authentication request including the (member) card ID, prepaid balance data, and device ID read from the accepted member card or visitor card. Is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sn2). Then, a card authentication process for receiving an authentication result from the card management computer 500 is executed, and it is determined whether or not the authentication is NG (step Sn3).

  When the authentication result returned from the card management computer 500 is “authentication NG” (in the case of YES in step Sn3), the medal lending machine 100 gives a card reader / writer 187 with an instruction to eject the accepted member card or visitor card. And the inserted member card or visitor card is returned to complete the card acceptance process (step Sn4). On the other hand, if the returned authentication result is “authentication OK” (NO in step Sn3), the (member) card ID read from the received card, the member ID (member only), and the prepaid balance are displayed. In addition to storing in the card table, the medal management computer 550 transmits a card acceptance notification including the received (member) card ID, device ID, and medal count (visitor card only) read from the visitor card. Then, a card acceptance notification including the (member) card ID read from the accepted membership card or visitor card and the device ID is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sn5).

  Next, the medal management computer 550 has the number of medals (all types and unit prices of game media) corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the received card acceptance notification, the number of saved medals (members only) (all of the game media Type and total unit price) and the number of today's jackpots are identified from each data stored corresponding to the (member) card ID in the member saving management table or visitor saving management table, and the card ID is the membership card ID. If it is, the personal identification number and store visit point stored in the member information table corresponding to the member card ID are further specified, and the specified number of medals, number of saved medals (member only), store visit point (Members only), the car that received the acceptance processing completion notification including the PIN (members only) and (members) card ID Accepted to reply to the sender of the medal lending machine 100 of the notification.

  In addition, the card management computer 500 displays the PIN code corresponding to the (member) card ID, the card lock valid flag, and the theft card flag included in the received card acceptance notification in the member card table or visitor card table. The medal lending machine 100 that is the sender of the received card acceptance notification is identified from each data stored corresponding to the ID, and the acceptance processing completion notice including the identified personal identification number, card lock valid flag, and theft card flag is received. Reply to

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not a processing completion notification has been received from the medal management computer 550 and the card management computer 500 (step Sn6). In response to the reception of the acceptance processing completion notification (in response to YES in step Sn6), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 (storage processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 is included in the received acceptance processing completion notification. Number of medals held (all types and unit prices of game media), number of saved medals (members only) (all types and unit prices of game media), store points (members only), PIN, today's jackpot number, card lock valid The flag and theft card flag are stored in the card table, the prepaid balance stored in the card table is displayed on the remaining amount display unit 115, and the game information (see FIG. 5B) during card reception is reset. At the same time, the current time is stored in the “start time” (step Sn7). For members, the same password is received from the medal management computer 550 and the card management computer 500.

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the accepted card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sn11). Whether or not the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card, in the case of a membership card, is the deposit-amount-recognition flag stored in the membership card table shown in FIG. It is determined by inquiring the card management computer 500 whether or not. In the case of a visitor card, in addition to the same method, a deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is recorded on the card itself, so that it may be determined with reference to this.

  If it is determined that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (YES in step Sn11), the CPU 181a stores the card ID stored in step Sh14 when executing a later-described balance withdrawal process shown in FIG. This time, it is determined whether or not the card IDs of the accepted cards match (step Sn12). When it is determined that they match (YES in step Sn12), the CPU 181a turns off the deposit balance corresponding flag in the membership card table of the card management computer 500 when it is a membership card, and when it is a visitor card, In addition, the deposit balance corresponding flag recorded on the card itself is also turned off (step Sn13).

  The CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposit remaining amount corresponding card has been discharged is on (step Sn14). If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is in the on state (YES in step Sn14), the CPU 181a sets the remaining amount discharge flag in the off state, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit amount correspondence card (step Sn15). Thereafter, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8.

  Here, the card is received from the outside without storing the remaining amount of money and the number of medals in the medal lending machine 100, and the number of medals and the remaining amount of money to be added later are no longer added to the card corresponding to the remaining amount of deposit. Therefore, in step Sn13 and step Sn15, the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag and the remaining amount discharge flag are turned off.

  Further, when the player operates the lending button, a signal from the lending button switch 116 ′ for detecting the operation of the lending button 116 by the player is output to the control unit 181 so that the control is performed. The unit 181 determines that there is a lending button operation in the step Sb3 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8, proceeds to the step Sb21, and executes the lending process for lending the medal M for 1000 yen as described above.

  The lending process is not disabled even when the liquid crystal display 123 displays the number of balls and the number of stored balls. Specifically, the process of step Sb21 is executed regardless of whether the ball information display flag is on or off.

<< Terminal acceptance process >>
Further, when the member portable terminal is held over the terminal reader / writer 170 by the member player in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 in FIG. 15 described above, the member card ID and the member ID ( Hereinafter, the terminal reader / writer 170 is also transmitted in a non-contact (wireless) manner. The terminal reader / writer 170 outputs the terminal ID acquired (received) from the member portable terminal to the control unit 181.

  When the control unit 181 receives a terminal ID from the terminal reader / writer 170 (YES in Sba2 in FIG. 15), the control unit 181 executes a terminal receiving process (Sba20 in FIG. 15).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the detailed contents of the terminal receiving process (the process of Sba20 of FIG. 15) performed by the control unit 181. In step Sna1, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the terminal ID received this time matches the terminal ID received last time. If the terminal ID received this time matches the terminal ID received last time (YES in step Sna1), control unit 181 receives the terminal ID received this time (step Sna2). On the other hand, when the terminal ID received this time does not match the terminal ID received last time (NO in step Sna1), control unit 181 displays a message prompting the input of the password on liquid crystal display 123 (step Sna3). ). The display place may be a place other than the liquid crystal display 123.

  In step Sna4, the control unit 181 determines whether or not a password has been input. If the password has not been entered (NO at step Sna4), the process returns to step Sna3, and the message prompting the input of the password is continued. When the code number is input (YES in step Sna4), the control unit 181 determines whether or not to authenticate the input code number (whether or not it is recognized as valid) (step Sna5). For example, the control unit 181 authenticates the input code number when the input code number matches the code number associated with the terminal ID received this time (see the table in FIG. 7). If it is not, the entered password is not authenticated (not recognized as valid).

  When the input personal identification number is authenticated (YES in step Sna5), control unit 181 accepts the terminal ID received this time (step Sna2). On the other hand, when the input personal identification number is not authenticated (in step Sna5), the control unit 181 does not accept the terminal ID received this time (step Sna6).

  In response to receiving the terminal ID in step Sna2, the control unit 181 executes a replay process (step Sna7). The replay process is one of processes (hereinafter also referred to as “game enabling process”) for enabling a game on a gaming machine using a valuable value associated with a card ID and a member ID. The detailed procedure of the replay process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  In accordance with the execution of the replay process, the control unit 181 can play a game in the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 that has received the terminal ID from the valuable value information associated with the received terminal ID. Information is acquired (received) from the medal management computer 550 and displayed on the display 123 (Sna8). In this process, the medal management computer 550 may not be queried whenever valuable value information is displayed. For example, information obtained by increasing or decreasing the valuable value information acquired and stored by the medal lending machine 100 from the medal management computer 550 locally (within the medal lending machine 100) according to the progress of the game is displayed. Also good. The display of the valuable value information in this process is continued at least until the medal payout is completed, and is terminated when the medal payout ends or when the medal payout ends.

<< Issuance / Payment processing >>
Further, in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, when the player inserts cash (banknote) from the banknote insertion slot 112, the currency identification information accompanying the insertion of the cash (banknote) is controlled from the banknote identification unit 180. By outputting to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is acceptance of cash in the step of Sb 4, proceeds to the step of Sb 22, and executes issue / payment processing.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the issue / payment processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 18, in this issuance / payment process, first, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposited amount corresponding card has been discharged is on. Is determined (step Sk1).

  If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sk1), the CPU 181a indicates that the deposit / remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged and whether or not to continue the deposit as it is. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 for notification. The notification may be notified by voice from a speaker or the like. The display on the liquid crystal display 123 displays a button for inputting that payment is to be continued and a button for inputting that payment is not to be continued.

  When it is determined which input indicating that the deposit is continued or not is performed on the touch panel 124 of the liquid crystal display 123, and when it is determined that the input is not performed (NO in Step Sk3), the CPU 181a The bill recognition unit 180 is controlled so as to be returned. Thereafter, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sk1), and if it is determined that the payment is continued (YES in step Sk3), the CPU 181a performs the issue / payment main process. The following processing is executed (Step Sk5).

  In the issuance / payment main processing, first, the amount of money inserted is specified from the input money identification information, and it is determined whether or not there is a member card or visitor card accepted by the card reader / writer 187. .

  When it is determined that there is no member card or visitor card being received, the control unit 181 places the visitor card stored in the card storage unit (not shown) at a predetermined reading position in the card insertion slot 112. The card ID of the visitor card is read out, and an issuance request including the read card ID, the inserted amount, and the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 is transmitted to the card management computer 500.

  In response to the receipt of the issuance request, the card management computer 500 determines whether or not the card ID included in the received issuance request exists in the visitor card table, and if it exists, corresponds to the card ID. Update “Status” of the visitor card table to “In Use”, store the current date and time output from the RTC 181d as the latest issue date and time, and store the received input amount as “Prepaid balance” in “Remaining amount” , “Issue permission” is returned to the medal lending machine 100 of the transmission source of the issue request. If the received card ID does not exist in the visitor card table, “Issuance impossible” is returned.

  In addition, with the transmission of the “issue permission”, the card management computer 500 gives the medal management computer 550 an issuance notification including the latest issuance date and time stored, the card ID included in the received issuance request, and the device ID. By notifying the computer 550, the medal management computer 550 stores the latest issue date / time included in the received issue notification in the latest issue date / time of the visitor saving management table corresponding to the card ID included in the received issue notification. At the same time, the “status” of the unit management table corresponding to the device ID included in the received issue notification is updated to “accepting”, and the received card ID is stored in “reception ID” to update the unit management table. To do.

  In response to the reception of the “issuance permission”, the control unit 181 (discharge / issue processing means) of the medal lending machine 100 writes and stores the prepaid balance corresponding to the inserted amount in the visitor card moved to the card insertion slot 112. The card ID of the visitor card and the prepaid balance corresponding to the inserted amount are stored in the card table, and the prepaid balance is displayed on the balance indicator, and then the issuance / payment process is terminated and the standby of Sb2 to Sb8. Return to state.

<< Return processing >>
Further, when the player operates the return button 114 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, a signal from the return button switch 114 ′ for detecting the operation of the return button 114 by the player is controlled. As a result of the input to the unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is an operation of the return button in Sb5, proceeds to Sb23, and executes return processing.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the return processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 19, in this return process, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not there is a member card or a visitor card being received by the card reader / writer 187 ( Step Sm1). If it does not exist (NO in step Sm1), the operation is invalidated and the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8 is restored.

  On the other hand, if it exists (YES in step Sm1), a card lock verification process for verifying whether the card lock function is valid or invalid is executed (step Sm21).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the contents of the card lock verification process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 20, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether the card lock function is valid or invalid based on the card lock valid flag in the card table of FIG. 5 (step Ss1). If the CPU 181a determines that the card is invalid (NO in step Ss1), the CPU 181a ends the card lock collation process and returns the process to the caller.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is valid (YES in step Ss1), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 so as to notify the player that the portable terminal used for inputting or locking the code number is held up. . Then, the CPU 181a determines whether a personal identification number has been input or whether a portable terminal held up has been detected (step Ss3). If it is determined that there is none (NO in step Ss3), the CPU 181a repeats this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is any (YES in step Ss3), the CPU 181a determines whether the input personal identification number or the terminal ID of the portable terminal held up coincides with the personal identification number in the card table of FIG. These are collated (step Ss4). Thereafter, the card lock verification process is terminated, and the process is returned to the caller.

  Returning to FIG. 19, the CPU 181 a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether the card lock function is invalid as a result of the card lock verification process or whether the passwords match with each other. If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sm22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sm23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the caller of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by collation of the password (YES in step Sm22), the CPU 181a invalidates the operation of the return button 114 and A count prohibition instruction is output to prohibit a new count (step Sm2).

  Then, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 gives the medal management computer 550 the device ID of the medal lending machine 100, the card ID of the returned card, the number of medals stored in the card table, the number of saved medals (only members) ) And a return notification including the number of jackpots (step Sm3).

  In response to the reception of the return notification, the medal management computer 550 stores the number of medals held in the member saving management table or the visitor saving management table corresponding to the (member) card ID included in the received return notification, and the savings. The number of medals (member only) and the number of jackpots are updated to the number of medals held, the number of saved medals and the number of jackpots included in the received return notification, and the “status” corresponding to the device ID received in the unit management table is set to “standby” The card ID stored in the “accepting ID” is deleted, and an update completion notification is transmitted to the medal lending machine 100 that is the transmission source of the return notification.

  The CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not an update completion notification has been received from the medal management computer 550 (step Sm4). In response to receiving this update completion notification (in response to YES in step Sm4), the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the receiving card is a visitor card. (Step Sm11). If it is a visitor card (YES in step Sm11), the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information is recorded on the visitor card (step Sm12).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag is on (step Sm13). When it is determined that it is in the on state (YES in step Sm13), the liquid crystal display 123 notifies that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card associated with the deposit remaining amount has been discharged (step Sm14). The notification may be output by voice from a speaker.

  Then, the fact that the card corresponding to the deposit balance is discharged and recorded is recorded in the receiving visitor card (step Sm15). Next, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sm16).

  If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sm13), and after step Sm16, the CPU 181a outputs a discharge instruction to the card reader / writer 187, and the received visitor card or membership card is carded. Next, the CPU 181a resets the card table, cancels the invalidation of the operation of the return button 114, validates it, and cancels the count prohibition (step Sm18). Then, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to grasp and manage how many illegal medals are counted by a predetermined player by recording the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information on the visitor card.

<< Replay process >>
Further, when the player operates the replay button 121 in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 in FIG. 15, the replay operation is performed from the replay operation board 185 that detects the operation of the replay button 121. When the information is input to the control unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that there is an operation of the replay button 121 in Sb6 of FIG. 15, proceeds to Sb24 of FIG. 15, and executes a replay process.

  Further, as described above, the control unit 181 proceeds to Sna7 in FIG. 17 in response to receiving the terminal ID in step Sna2 in FIG. 17, and executes the replay process.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the replay processing executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 21, in this replay process, first, CPU 181a of control unit 181 of medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the ball information display flag is in an on state (step Sp10). The ball information display flag is a flag indicating whether the card detailed information screen or the terminal detailed information screen (see FIG. 33C described later) is being displayed, and will be described in detail later.

  If it is determined that the ball information display flag is on (YES in step Sp10), the CPU 181a ends this replay process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process. That is, while the card detailed information screen or the terminal detailed information screen is being displayed, execution of replay is disabled.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball information display flag is not on (NO in step Sp10), the CPU 181a executes a replay main process (step Sp1).

  In the replay main process, the payout device 182 is controlled so that the number of medals or the number of saved medals managed by the medal management computer 550 is subtracted and the subtracted amount is paid out. When there are medals, the medals are paid out, and when there are no medals and there are saved medals, the medals are paid out. If there is none, nothing is paid out even if the replay button 121 is operated.

  After the replay main process, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the number of medals has become 0 (step Sp2). When it is determined that the number of medals has become 0 (YES in Step Sp2), the CUP 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag shown in FIG. 16 is on (Step Sp3). If it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sp3), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the payment remaining amount correspondence card associated with the remaining amount is displayed on the liquid crystal display 123. (Step Sp4). The notification may be output by voice from a speaker.

  Next, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag, and deletes the card ID of the stored deposit-amount-compatible card (step Sp5). When it is determined that the number of medals is not 0 (NO in step Sp2) or the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sp3), and after step Sp5, the process returns to the standby state of steps Sb2 to Sb8. .

  In addition, in the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 described above, when a predetermined error signal is input from each device to the control unit 181, the control unit 181 determines that an error has been detected in Sb8 and proceeds to Sb26 to report an error. Execute the process.

<< Touch panel operation process >>
Further, after the standby state of Sb2 to Sb8 in FIG. 15 described above, the CUP 181a executes a touch panel operation process (step Sb27 in FIG. 15). The touch panel operation process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

<< Coefficient processing >>
After executing the touch panel operation process in step Sb27 of FIG. 15, the CPU 181a executes a counting process.

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. With reference to FIG. 22, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 determines whether or not the rotating disk 190g is stopped (step Sc21). If it is determined that the rotating disk is stopped (YES in step Sc21), that is, if it is determined that the medal M is not being counted, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the counting button 122 has been operated (step Sc22). .

  If it is determined that the count button 122 has been operated (YES in step Sc22), the CPU 181a changes the manual count flag to the on state (step Sc23) in order to start the manual count process, and executes the process to be executed in step Sc27. Proceed to

  On the other hand, when determining that the counting button 122 has not been operated (NO in step Sc22), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a condition for starting the automatic counting process is satisfied in steps Sc24 to Sc25.

  Specifically, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the lid member is in an open state (step Sc24), and determines whether or not a medal is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h (step Sc25).

  If it is determined that any of the conditions is not satisfied (NO in step Sc24, NO in step Sc25), the CPU 181a ends the counting process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that both conditions are satisfied (YES in step Sc24 and YES in step Sc25), CPU 181a determines whether or not the above-described ball information display flag is not in an on state (step Sc26). If it is determined that the ball information display flag is on (YES in step Sc26), the CPU 181a ends the counting process and returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  If it is determined that the ball information display flag is not in the on state (NO in step Sc26), the CPU 181a substitutes a value corresponding to 10 seconds for the counting timer for counting the remaining time for rotating the rotating disk 190g (step Sc27). ), The drive of the rotating disk 190g is started (step Sc28).

  Thereby, when it is determined in step Sc22 that the counting button is operated, the manual counting process is started, and when it is determined that the counting button is not operated, the automatic counting process is started. It will be.

  After step Sc28, that is, after starting the manual counting process or automatic counting process, and when it is determined that the rotating disk 190g is not stopped (NO in step Sc21), that is, the medal M is being counted. If it is determined, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the medal M is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h (step Sc31).

  If it is determined (YES in step Sc31), the CPU 181a substitutes a value corresponding to 10 seconds for the counting timer (step Sc32), thereby resetting the remaining time for rotating the rotating disk to 10 seconds.

  When it is determined that no medal is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h (NO in step Sc31), and after step Sc32, the CPU 181a decrements the counting timer by 1 (step Sc33).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a condition for terminating the counting is satisfied from step Sc34 to step Sc37. Specifically, the CPU 181a determines whether the value of the counting timer does not exceed 0 (step Sc34), determines whether the ball information display flag has been turned on (step Sc35), It is determined whether the ball information display flag is not on and the manual counting flag is on (step Sc35, step Sc36). The ball information display flag is not on and the manual counting flag is not on. It is determined whether the lid member 160 is not in the open state (ie, during the automatic counting process) (step Sc35 to step Sc37).

  Either condition is satisfied (NO in step Sc34, YES in step Sc34 and YES in step Sc35, YES in step Sc34 and NO in step Sc35 and YES in step Sc36, or YES in step Sc34 and NO in step Sc35 and When it is determined NO in step Sc36 and NO in step Sc37), the CPU 181a stops driving the rotating disk 190g (step Sc38), ends the manual counting process or the automatic counting process, and calls the process to be executed. Return to the original process.

  On the other hand, it is determined that none of the conditions is satisfied (YES in step Sc34, NO in step Sc35, YES in step Sc36, or YES in step Sc34, NO in step Sc35, NO in step Sc36, and YES in step Sc37). In this case, the CPU 181a acquires medal determination information from the counting device 190 (step Sc2). The medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 includes medal authenticity information (information on whether a medal is a regular medal or an illegal medal) determined based on a medal image photographed by the medal photographing camera 190c.

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not there is medal determination information (step Sc3). If it is determined that there is no (NO in step Sc3), the CPU 181a ends this process, and returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is medal determination information (YES in step Sc3), the CPU 181a adds 1 to the total number of medals in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) (step Sc5), and the card table (FIG. 1 is added to the number of medals held (see 5 (a)) (step Sc6).

  Next, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 determines whether or not the counted medals are illegal medals based on the medal determination information acquired from the counting device 190 (step Sc6). Here, the control unit 181 refers to the authenticity information of the medals included in the medal determination information. If it is determined that the medal is an illegal medal (YES in step Sc6), the CPU 181a executes an illegal medal process described later (step Sc12), and executes a medal storage process described later (step Sc13).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not an illegal medal (NO in step Sc6), the CPU 181a resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 5D) (step Sc7) and is determined to be a regular medal. The medal is discharged from the discharge port to the game island (step Sc8). After step Sc13 and step Sc8, CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the caller process of this process.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the illegal medal process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the illegal medal process, the control unit 181 executes the processes of Sd1 to Sd18 described below.

  First, in Sd1 of the illegal medal process, the control unit 181 uses the face image capturing camera 188 to capture the face image of the player who has inserted the illegal medal, and proceeds to Sd2. In Sd2, the control unit 181 obtains the medal image used for determining the authenticity of the medal from the counting device 190, and proceeds to Sd3.

  In Sd3, the control unit 181 generates a single notification image (see FIG. 14) by combining the player's face image and the medal image in parallel, and stores this notification image in the RAM 181b (imaging data storage means). The process proceeds to Sd4. In Sd4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 5C), and proceeds to Sd5.

  In Sd5, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 5D), and proceeds to Sd6. In Sd6, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 5B), and proceeds to Sd7.

  In Sd7, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 5B) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “10 sheets” is set in the “cumulative illegal medal number” item of the “invalid medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 12). That is, when the cumulative value determined as an illegal medal after the player inserts a member card or a visitor card is 10, the value of the cumulative illegal medal number is set as a threshold. Here, if the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals is a set threshold value (if it is 10), the process proceeds to Sd8, and if the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals is not a set threshold value (if it is less than 10) ) Go to Sd15.

  In Sd8, the control unit 181 subtracts the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals from the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 5A) and proceeds to Sd9. In the present embodiment, if an illegal medal is included in the medals paid out and counted from the slot machine 1, the illegal medal is also counted if the illegal medal detection notification condition (inappropriate condition) is not satisfied. A player who uses an unauthorized medal unintentionally is prevented from being disadvantaged, and when the unauthorized medal detection notification condition is satisfied, the cumulative number of unauthorized medals counted up to that point becomes invalid. It is possible to prevent the number of held medals from being added due to illegal medals.

  In Sd9, the control unit 181 resets the value of the cumulative number of illegal medals in the card receiving game information (see FIG. 5B), and proceeds to Sd10. In Sd10, the control unit 181 resets the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 5D), and proceeds to Sd11.

  In Sd15, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the continuous illegal medal counter in the counter information (see FIG. 5D) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “3 times” is set in the “number of consecutive illegal medals detected” item of the “illegal medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 12). . That is, when an illegal medal is detected three times in succession, the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter becomes a set threshold value. Here, if the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter is the set threshold value (when it is three times), the process proceeds to Sd8, and if the value of the consecutive illegal medal counter is not the set threshold value (when it is less than three times). ) Go to Sd16.

  In Sd16, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the value of the total number of illegal medals in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) is a set threshold value. In the present embodiment, “10 sheets” is set in the “total number of illegal medals” item of “illegal medal detection notification condition” on the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 12). That is, when the value of the total number of medals determined as illegal medals by the counting device 190 from the time of starting business in the game hall is 10, the total illegal medals count value is set. Here, if the value of the total number of illegal medals is a set threshold value (when it is 10), the process proceeds to Sd11, and if the value of the total number of illegal medals is not a set threshold value (when it is less than 10) ) Ends the process.

  In Sd11, the control unit 181 determines whether or not an unauthorized notification has already been sent to the medal management computer 550. If the notification of unauthorized notification has already been made, the process is terminated, and if the notification of unauthorized notification has not been notified yet, the process proceeds to Sd12.

  In Sd12, the control unit 181 sends a fraud notification notifying the medal management computer 550 that a fraudulent medal is being used, and proceeds to Sd13. In Sd13, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 and proceeds to Sd14. In addition, when the state notification lamp 111 is turned on, if it is turned on in a manner that clearly notifies the abnormal situation (for example, fast blinking or red display), an illegal player who uses an illegal medal is illegal. Since it is noticed that the notification notification is being performed and it may be escaped, it is difficult to notice that the unauthorized player is notified of the unauthorized notification when the state notification lamp 111 is turned on. It is made to light in a mode (for example, slow blinking or blue display).

  The medal management computer 550 that has received the fraud notification notification from the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 issues a notification request for requesting the hall computer 540 to notify the store clerk. And the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the machine 100.

  In addition, the hall computer 540 that has received the notification request from the medal management computer 550 generates an automatic voice message to notify that, together with the machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 in which the illegal medal is used. Then, an automatic voice message is transmitted to the income 9 worn by the store clerk via the wireless broadcasting system. The store clerk who receives the notification through the income 9 can specify the player who uses the illegal medal. In addition, the hall computer 540 operates the monitoring camera system 21 to automatically shoot (or record) a zoom-in video of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100 in which the illegal medal is used. Then, the store clerk can identify an unauthorized player and monitor (or record) the behavior through the monitoring camera system 21.

  In Sd14, the control unit 181 causes the alarm notification and the counting device 190 to stop counting (error stop) when detecting illegal medals in the item of “operations when detecting illegal medals” in the aforementioned illegal medal related setting screen (see FIG. 12). ) Is determined whether or not the selection is made. If the selection to stop the error has been made, the process proceeds to Sd17. If the selection to stop the error has not been made, the process ends.

  In Sd17, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information on a full tank notification flag, which will be described later, a notification image, and the like to the medal management computer 550, and proceeds to Sd18. In Sd18, the control unit 181 performs a count stop process in which the counting device 190 stops counting medals. This counting stop process is maintained until the store clerk operates the reset switch 186 (see FIG. 4) of the medal lending machine 100.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a medal storage process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the medal storage process, the control unit 181 executes the processes of Se1 to Se14 described below.

  First, in Se1 of medal storage processing, the control unit 181 determines whether or not “reservation part invalid” is set in the item of “illegal medal handling” on the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 12). Determine. Here, if “reservoir invalid” is not set, the process proceeds to Se2. If “reservoir invalid” is set, the process proceeds to Se14.

  In Se2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the full tank notification flag is set. If the full tank notification flag is not set, the process proceeds to Se3. If the full tank notification flag is set, the process proceeds to Se14.

  In Se14, the control unit 181 causes the medal determined to be an illegal medal to be discharged from the outlet to the game island, that is, the process is ended without switching the flow path by the flow path switch 190d via the counting device 190. .

  In Se3, the control unit 181 switches the medal flow path by the above-described flow path switch 190d via the counting device 190 so that the medal determined to be an illegal medal is stored in the medal storage box. Proceed to In Se4, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) (storage medium counting means), and proceeds to Se5.

  In Se5, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the medal determined to be an illegal medal is a medal brought from another area of the own store, that is, the own store medal. Here, if it is the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se6, and 1 is added to the number of own store medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) and the process proceeds to Se7. If it is not the own store medal, the process proceeds to Se11, 1 is added to the number of false medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 5C), and the process proceeds to Se7. In the present embodiment, the own store medals and the fake medals are counted, respectively, and it is easy to understand how many of the illegal medals stored in the medal storage box are the own store medals. Thus, it is possible to return to the area that is collected early and determined as an appropriate medal.

  In Se7, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) is the first threshold (full tank) (first determination means). In the present embodiment, “100 sheets” is set in the “full tank notification condition” item of the “reservoir state notification condition” on the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 12). . That is, when the total number of medals stored as the number of medals stored in the medal storage box is 100, it is determined to be the first threshold (full tank). Here, when the total medal storage number is the first threshold (full tank) (when it is 100), the process proceeds to Se8, and when the total medal storage number is not the first threshold (full tank) (less than 100 sheets). If there is, the process ends.

  In Se8, the control unit 181 sets a full tank notification flag and proceeds to Se9. In Se9, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 (first notification means) and proceeds to Se10.

  In Se10, the control unit 181 determines whether or not “error stop when the storage unit is full” is set in the “illegal medal handling” item of the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 12). To do. Here, if the error stop when the storage unit is full is set, the process proceeds to Se12. If the error stop is not set when the storage unit is full, the process is terminated.

  In Se12, the control unit 181 transmits update information of each table, information on the full tank notification flag, a notification image, and the like to the medal management computer 550, and proceeds to Se13. In Se13, the control unit 181 performs a count stop process in which the counting device 190 stops counting medals. This counting stop process is maintained until the store clerk operates the reset switch 186 (see FIG. 4) of the medal lending machine 100.

  Next, an unauthorized medal user face image screen displayed on the medal management computer 550 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. A notification image in which the player's face image and medal image generated in the aforementioned illegal medal process are combined in parallel is transmitted from the medal lending machine 100, and the medal management computer 550 that receives this notification image uses the illegal medal The notification image can be displayed on the person face image screen.

  In the unauthorized medal user face image screen of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the date and time when the notification image was taken together with the notification image, and the apparatus of the medal lending machine 100 that took the notification image An ID, a machine number of the slot machine 1 corresponding to the medal lending machine 100, and a member ID when a game is played using a member card are displayed. By doing so, it is possible to specify which of the medals stored in the medal storage box of the medal lending machine 100 is used by a predetermined player, so that it is easy to specify fraud.

<< Tightening-related processing >>
In the present embodiment, a closing-related process request for making a request to execute a closing-related process (business closing process) from the medal management computer 550 to each medal lending machine 100 when the game hall is closed (when the business is closed). (Predetermined signal) is transmitted. The control unit 181 of each medal lending machine 100 that has received the tightening related process request executes a tightening related process (business closing process).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a tightening related process executed by the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100. In the tightening related process, the control unit 181 executes processes Sf1 to Sf4 described below.

  First, in Sf1 of the tightening related process, the control unit 181 transmits various histories. For example, information such as a prepaid balance usage history is transmitted to the card management computer 500, and data such as forced cancellation history data in the absence of seat is transmitted to both the card management computer 500 and the medal management computer 550, and the process proceeds to Sf2. .

  In Sf2, the control unit 181 determines whether or not the total number of medals stored in the medal information (see FIG. 5C) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold) (second determination unit). In the present embodiment, “50 sheets” is set in the item “Notification condition at closing” of “Storage section condition notification condition” in the above-described illegal medal relation setting screen (see FIG. 12). That is, when the total number of medals stored as the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box is 50 or more, it is determined to be the second threshold value. Here, if the total number of medals is greater than or equal to the second threshold (if it is greater than or equal to 50), the process proceeds to Sf3. If the total number of medals is not the second threshold (if less than 50), processing is performed. Exit.

  In Sf3, the control unit 181 turns on the state notification lamp 111 (second notification means) and proceeds to Sf4. In Sf4, the control unit 181 transmits a notification notifying the medal management computer 550 that the number of illegal medals stored in the medal storage box is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold), and ends the process.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the medal management computer 550 that has received a notification from the medal lending machine 100 (control unit 181) notifying that the number of illegal medals stored is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (second threshold value) Display the processing (illegal medal) screen. On the business end processing (illegal medal) screen, the machine ID of the corresponding slot machine 1 is displayed together with the device ID of the medal lending machine 100 whose stored number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number (second threshold). The store clerk can specify the medal lending machine 100 that collects illegal medals based on this business end processing (illegal medal) screen.

  FIG. 26 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen displayed on the display 123 of the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 26, on the menu screen, a “remaining amount withdrawal” button, an “insert after card” button, a “small amount lending” button, a “card lock” button, a “mob ball split” button, and an “information inquiry” are displayed. A button is displayed.

<< Touch panel operation process >>
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the processing content of the touch panel operation processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. This touch panel operation process is a process executed in step Sb27 of the process described in FIG.

  Referring to FIG. 27, first, the CPU 181a of the control unit 181 of the medal lending machine 100 determines whether or not the operation of the “remaining amount withdrawal” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 is detected on the touch panel 124 (step). Sg1).

<<< Remaining amount withdrawal processing >>>
If it is determined that the “remaining amount withdrawal” button has been operated (YES in step Sg1), the CPU 181a executes remaining amount withdrawal processing (step Sg11).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the remaining amount extraction processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 28, first, the CPU 181a invalidates the operation of the lending button 116 (step Sh1).

  As a result, it is necessary to operate the return button 114 after this, but the loan button 116 is erroneously operated, and medals are lent out using the deposit amount that is to be taken out now. Can be prevented. Further, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation caused by the close positions of the return button 114 and the lending button 116.

  Next, the CPU 181a refers to the card table of FIG. 5A to determine whether or not there is a prepaid balance (payment balance) (step Sh2). If it is determined that there is no payment (NO in step Sh2), the remaining payment cannot be taken out, so the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that there is no remaining payment and the withdrawal of the remaining payment is to be stopped (step). Sh3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a deposit remaining amount (YES in step Sh2), the CPU 181a determines whether or not there is a medal (step Sh4). If it is determined that there is no (NO in step Sh4), there is no need to issue a card for possession medal even if the remaining deposit amount is taken out, so the CPU 181a has a liquid crystal display indicating that there is no possession medal and the withdrawal of the remaining deposit amount is cancelled. The information is displayed on the device 123 and notified (step Sh5). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  If it is determined that there are medals (YES in step Sh4), the CPU 181a executes the same processing as in steps Sm21 to Sm23 in FIG. 19 (steps Sh21 to Sh23). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sh22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sh23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 181a determines that the card lock function is invalid or has been matched by collation of the personal identification number (YES in step Sh22), the CPU 181a controls to display on the liquid crystal display 123 that the return button 114 is operated. (Step Sh6).

  In the remaining amount withdrawal process, even if the card lock function is valid, the password is not verified. If the card lock function is valid, the process cannot proceed to step Sh6 and the card lock function is invalidated. Only in the case where it is determined that it is determined, the process may proceed to step Sh6 and subsequent steps. In other words, the remaining amount may not be taken out unless the card lock function is disabled in advance.

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not the return button 114 has been operated (step Sh7). When determining that there is no operation (NO in step Sh7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed (step Sh8). This predetermined time is set to be shorter than the time-out time of the input operation of the ball splitting process in step Sg15 of FIG. 27 described later. Thereby, the time when a game is not performed can be shortened as much as possible. If it has not elapsed (if NO is determined in step Sh8), the processes in steps Sh7 and Sh8 are repeated.

  If it is determined that the predetermined time has passed without the return button 114 being operated (YES in step Sh8), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the withdrawal of the remaining amount of money is to be stopped due to the time being over. (Step Sh9). Thereafter, the CPU 181a advances the process to be executed to step Sh19.

  If it is determined that the return button 114 has been operated before the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step Sh7), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being received (step Sh11).

  If it is determined that the member card is being accepted (YES in step Sh11), the CPU 181a transmits to the card management computer 500 that the card is a deposit balance corresponding card and the deposit balance.

  In the card management computer 500, as shown in FIG. 7A, the prepaid balance corresponding to the card ID of the card in the member card table is updated to the received deposit balance, and the deposit balance correspondence flag is turned on. Change to (value "1").

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted, that is, the visitor card is being accepted (NO in step Sh11), the CPU 181a informs the card management computer 500 that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card and the deposit balance. The information is transmitted for registration, and the information is recorded on the visitor card (step Sh13).

  In the card management computer 500, as shown in FIG. 7B, the prepaid balance corresponding to the card ID of the card in the visitor card table is updated to the received deposit balance, and the deposit balance correspondence flag is turned on. Change to (value "1").

  After Step Sh12 and Step Sh13, the CPU 181a causes the RAM 181b to store the card ID of the deposit remaining amount correspondence card (Step Sh14). Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to discharge the member card or the visitor card that is being accepted as a deposit remaining amount correspondence card (step Sh15). Next, the CPU 181a turns on a remaining amount discharge flag indicating that the deposit remaining amount correspondence card has been discharged (step Sh16).

  Then, the CPU 181a deletes the deposit remaining amount stored in the RAM 181b (step Sh17). Next, since the CPU 181a has a medal number, the card ID is assigned to the medal management computer 550 in order to move the visitor card stored in the card reader / writer 187 to the read / write position and perform the issuing process. If it can be issued, the number of medals and the card ID are transmitted to the medal management computer 550, and the number of medals is recorded on the visitor card (step Sh18).

  In step Sh19, the CPU 181a validates the operation of the lending button 116. Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 which is the caller of the remaining amount withdrawal process.

  As described above, the remaining amount of medals remains in the medal lending machine 100 only by operating the “remaining amount withdrawal” button in step Sg1 in FIG. 27 and the return button 114 in step Sh7 in FIG. Can be discharged. In the case of holding ball split or prepaid balance split, which will be described later, in addition to the operation for instructing the split, an operation for specifying the quantity to be split needs to be performed. As a result, when the remaining amount is discharged with the number of medals remaining, it is possible to perform a simple operation without requiring a complicated operation of specifying the quantity.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if it is determined that the “remaining amount withdrawal” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg 1), the CPU 181 a operates the “insert after card” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 with the touch panel 124. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg2).

<<< Post-card insertion process >>>
When determining that the “insert after card” button has been operated (YES in step Sg2), the CPU 181a executes post-card insertion processing (step Sg12).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the post-card insertion processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 29, first, CPU 181a determines whether or not a member card is being accepted (step Sj1). If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sj1), the CPU 181a displays on the liquid crystal display 123 that the acceptance of the operation of the post-card insertion button is stopped because the membership card is being accepted. Notification is made (step Sj2). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when determining that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sj1), the CPU 181a determines whether or not there are counted medals stored in the RAM 181b (step Sj3). If it is determined that there are no medals (NO in step Sj3), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that there is no medals and the acceptance of the post-card insertion button operation is stopped (step Sj4). ). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there are medals (YES in step Sj3), the same processing as in steps Sm21 to Sm23 of FIG. 19 is executed (steps Sj21 to Sj23). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sj22), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sj23). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG.

  On the other hand, if the CPU 181a determines that the card lock function is invalid or has been matched by collation of the password (YES in step Sj22), the CPU 181a changes the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 187 to invalid, Return to the card storage unit (step Sj5). Then, the CPU 181a displays on the liquid crystal display 123 that a membership card or a visitor card is to be inserted (step Sj6).

  Next, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a card has been received (step Sj7). When determining that it has not been received (NO in step Sj7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed (step Sj8). If it has not elapsed (if NO is determined in step Sj8), the processes in steps Sj7 and Sj8 are repeated.

  If the CPU 181a determines that the predetermined time has passed without accepting the card (YES in step Sj8), the CPU 181a notifies the liquid crystal display 123 that the insertion after the card is canceled due to the time being over (step). Sj9). Thereafter, the process to be executed is returned to the touch panel operation process of FIG.

  If it is determined that the card has been received before the predetermined time has elapsed (YES in step Sj7), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the remaining amount discharge flag stored in the RAM 181b is in an on state (step Sj11). .

  When it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is on (YES in step Sj11), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the accepted card is a deposit remaining amount correspondence card (step Sj12). Whether or not the card is a deposit balance card is determined by inquiring the card management computer 500 and confirming whether or not the deposit balance flag in the membership card table or the visitor card table described in FIG. 7 is on. Is done.

  If the CPU 181a determines that the card is a deposit-amount-compatible card (YES in step Sj12), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the card ID of the received card matches the card ID of the deposit-amount-compatible card stored in the RAM 181b. (Step Sj13).

  If it is determined that the card ID of the reception card matches that stored (YES in step Sj13), the CPU 181a stores the remaining balance corresponding flag stored in the card management computer 500 and the card in the case of a visitor card. The recorded deposit balance correspondence flag is turned off (step Sj14).

  It should be noted that even when the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is turned off, the history that the deposit remaining amount correspondence flag is turned on or off may be stored. Thereby, it is possible to grasp how many times the “remaining amount withdrawal” operation is performed for the card during a predetermined period (a specific day or a certain period).

  Then, the CPU 181a turns off the remaining amount discharge flag stored in the RAM 181b, and deletes the card ID of the deposit remaining amount corresponding card (step Sj15).

  After step Sj15 and when it is determined that the remaining amount discharge flag is not on (NO in step Sj11), the CPU 181a stores the number of medals held in the card table of FIG. 5A of the RAM 181b of the medal lending machine 100. Is registered in the member saving management table or visitor saving management table of FIG. 9 in association with the card ID of the received card, and information such as the card ID and the number of medals is sent to the medal management computer 550 and received. If the received card is a visitor card, the number of medals held is recorded in the visitor card (step Sj16).

  In addition, the setting and processing of the specific function of the previous card returned to the card storage unit are transferred to the received card (step Sj20).

  Specifically, if the specific function is a card lock function, the card lock valid flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card, and if the received card is not a membership card, the password of the previous card is Let the number be transferred to a later card.

  When the specific function is the theft card restriction function, the theft card flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card. If the specific function is a small-scale lending function, the small card lending valid flag of the previous card is transferred to the subsequent card.

  When the specific function is the game history totaling function, the history totaling process executed on the previous card is handed over to the subsequent card. That is, the number of big hits and the number of ARTs, which are the game histories accumulated in the history aggregation process, are taken over. In this takeover, for example, when a card is inserted later in the middle of the big hit gaming state and the ART state, the number of the gaming state in the middle is not double counted.

  This history tabulation process is managed by a management device such as the medal management computer 550. That is, the number of big hits is stored in the member saving management table and the visitor saving management table of FIG. 9 of the medal management computer 550. Then, when a history totaling process executed for the previous card is taken over by the later card, the management device such as the medal management computer 550 stores the number of jackpots in association with the card ID of the later card. By doing so, it is managed that the process in which the function for the previous card is executed is taken over for the subsequent card.

  If the specific function is the possession ball payout function, the possession ball payout process executed on the previous card is taken over. For example, in accordance with the operation of the replay button 121, when the ball payout process for returning the possessed medals or the saving medals is executed, the number of possessed medals and the saving medals satisfies the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. If there is not enough possession medals and saving medals in the subsequent card, the post-card insertion process is executed if there is not, and if there is a shortage of medal and saving medals, the lending unit amount summed up with the previous card and the subsequent card Held medals and saving medals are paid out.

  After step Sj20, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of the post-card insertion process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not a deposit remaining amount corresponding card (NO in step Sj12) or does not match the stored card ID (NO in step Sj13), the received card corresponds to the correct deposit remaining amount. The fact that it is not a card is displayed and notified on the liquid crystal display 123 (step Sj17). Then, the fact that an error has occurred is notified by the liquid crystal display 123 and the speaker (step Sj18).

  Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not an error reset operation has been performed by the store clerk (step Sj19). When determining that the reset operation has been performed (step Sj19), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 which is the caller of the post-card insertion process. Thereby, the store clerk can cope with the situation where a player may illegally acquire a medal.

  In the post-card insertion process shown in FIG. 29, when there are medals, the process of associating the number of medals with the card inserted later is performed. On the other hand, when there are no medals, even if there is a prepaid balance, the process of associating the prepaid balance with a card inserted later is not performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when there are no medals, if there is a prepaid balance, a process for associating the prepaid balance with a card inserted later may be performed.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if it is determined that the “insert after card” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg 2), the CPU 181 a operates the touch panel 124 to operate the “small amount lending” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg3).

<<< Small amount loan processing >>>
If it is determined that the “small amount lending” button has been operated (YES in step Sg3), the CPU 181a executes a small amount lending process (step Sg13).

  In the small amount lending process, a medal of a smaller amount than the number of medals lent out by operating the normal lending button 116 is lent. For example, normally, medals M (for example, 50) corresponding to 1,000 yen are lent out, but in the small amount lent processing executed by operating the “small amount lending” button, medals M (for example, 200 yen) (for example, 10) are lent out. In this small amount lending process, the rented amount may be set in advance by the store clerk or may be set by the player.

  Further, in the small amount lending process, only the lending amount is set to be smaller than usual. After the small amount lending process is executed, the lending button 116 is operated so that a small amount of medals can be lent. Good. In this case, the loan amount may be returned to the normal amount by executing a small amount loan process next. This makes it possible to borrow a small amount while avoiding a wasteful amount such as borrowing up to a normal amount in the case where a small amount of medals is found due to the big hit.

  Further, similarly to the lending process in step Sb21 of FIG. 15 described above, even when the number of held balls and the number of stored balls are displayed on the liquid crystal display 123, the small-scale lending process is not disabled. Specifically, the process of step Sg13 is executed regardless of whether the ball information display flag is on or off.

<<< Card lock processing >>>
If it is determined that the “small amount lending” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg3), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the operation of the “card lock” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 has been detected on the touch panel 124. (Step Sg4). When determining that the “card lock” button has been operated (YES in step Sg4), the CPU 181a executes a card lock process (step Sg14).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the contents of the card lock process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 15, in the card lock process, the accepted card is locked so as not to be returned only by operating return button 114. Specifically, a password is set. Thus, when the return button 114 is operated, the password is requested to be input, and when the correct password is input, the accepted card is ejected. Further, in the card lock process, when the identification information of the portable terminal is received from the portable terminal incorporating the non-contact IC chip, the card is locked and the return button 114 is operated. If the identification information is accepted, the accepted card may be ejected. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the accepted card from being stolen.

  First, the same processing as Step Sm21 to Step Sm23 of FIG. 19 is executed (Step Sq1 to Step Sq3). If it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sq2), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sq3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by the collation of the personal identification number (YES in step Sq2), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being accepted (step Sq4).

  If it is determined that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sq4), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display a message confirming whether the card can be locked (step Sq5). Then, it is determined whether or not the selection of whether or not to lock the card is “YES” (step Sq6). If it is determined that the selection is not “YES” (NO in step Sq6), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the selection is “YES” (YES in step Sq6), the CPU 181a turns on the card lock valid flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 5A (step Sq7) and validates it. To the card management computer 500 (step Sq8). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, when determining that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sq4), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the visitor card is being accepted (step Sq11). When determining that the visitor card is not being received (NO in step Sq11), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the visitor card is being received (YES in step Sq11), the CPU 181a changes the lock method to a method using a personal identification number or a method using a portable terminal incorporating a non-contact IC chip. The liquid crystal display 123 is controlled so as to display that it is to be selected (step Sq12).

  First, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a method using a personal identification number has been selected (step Sq13). When determining that it is not selected (NO in step Sq13), the CPU 181a determines whether or not a portable terminal incorporating a non-contact IC chip is detected (step Sq14). When determining that it has not been detected (NO in step Sq14), the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to step Sq13.

  When determining that the mobile terminal is detected (YES in step Sq14), the CPU 181a acquires the terminal ID of the mobile terminal from the non-contact IC chip of the mobile terminal (step Sq15). Then, the CPU 181a turns on the card lock validity flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 5 (a), stores the acquired terminal ID as a personal identification number (step Sq16), and indicates that it has been activated and the acquired terminal ID. The data is transmitted to the card management computer 500 (step Sq17). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. 7 and stores the terminal ID as a personal identification number. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the method using the password is selected as the lock method (YES in step Sq13), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display the password input screen (step Sq21). Then, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a personal identification number has been input (step Sq22). When determining that it has not been input (NO in step Sq22), CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sq22.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the password has been input (YES in step Sq22), the CPU 181a turns on the card lock valid flag of the card in the card table of FIG. 5A and stores the input password. (Step Sq23), the fact that it has been validated and the input personal identification number are transmitted to the card management computer 500 (Step Sq24). With this reception, the CPU 502 of the card management computer 500 turns on the card lock valid flag of the member card table or visitor card table of FIG. 7 and stores the password. Thereafter, the CPU 181a of the medal lending machine 100 returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of the card lock process.

  When the card lock function is enabled, it is preferable to display a display (for example, a symbol) indicating that the card lock function is enabled on the display 123. Thereby, the player can recognize that the card lock function is effective.

  Returning to FIG. 27, if it is determined that the “card lock” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg 4), the CPU 181 a operates the “divide ball” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 on the touch panel 124. It is determined whether or not it has been detected (step Sg5).

<<<< Mochitama split processing >>>>
When determining that the “divide ball” button has been operated (YES in step Sg5), the CPU 181a executes a ball division process (step Sg15).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the coin splitting process executed in the medal lending machine. Referring to FIG. 31, in the possession ball dividing process, the number of medals designated by the player out of the current number of medals or the number of saved medals is divided by associating it with another visitor card. The number of medals to be divided may be designated as a numerical value or selectable from choices.

  First, the same processing as Step Sm21 to Step Sm23 of FIG. 19 is executed (Step Sr1 to Step Sr3). When it is determined that the card lock function is valid and the passwords do not match (NO in step Sr2), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the card lock function is not matched. (Step Sr3). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card lock function is invalid or matched by the collation of the passwords (YES in step Sr2), the CPU 181a determines whether the number of medals is more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. It is determined whether or not (step Sr11). When the number of medals is less than the number corresponding to the lending unit amount, usually the medals cannot be paid out. It is necessary to be at least twice the number corresponding to.

  If it is determined that the number of medals is not more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (NO in step Sr11), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to notify that the number of medals is insufficient ( Step Sr12).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number is twice or more (YES in step Sr11), the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 to display a screen for inputting the number of medals to be divided (step Sr13). The number of divisions may be selectable from options, or may be input by increasing or decreasing the number of units corresponding to the lending unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or a numerical value can be directly input. You may do it. Then, it is determined whether or not the division number has been input (step Sr14). When determining that the division number has not been input (NO in step Sr14), the CPU 181a repeats the process of step Sr14.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of divisions has been input (YES in step Sr14), the CPU 181a determines whether the member card is being accepted (step Sr21). When determining that the membership card is being accepted (YES in step Sr21), the CPU 181a subtracts the number of divisions from the number of medals and transmits the number of medals after the subtraction to the medal management computer 550 (step Sr22). The medal management computer 550 updates the number of medals held in the member saving management table of FIG. Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 to discharge the member card (step Sr23).

  Next, the CPU 181a takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer 187 to the reading position, and performs a process for issuing the taken-out visitor card (step Sr24). Specifically, the status of the visitor card table of the card management computer 500 is changed during use, the latest issue date is updated, the latest issue date of the visitor saving management table of the medal management computer 550 is updated, and both tables are updated. Reset other items in.

  Then, the CPU 181a associates the visitor card with the number of divisions as the number of medals (step Sr25). Specifically, the division number is stored as the number of medals held in the card table of the medal lending machine 100, and the division number is stored as the number of medals held in the visitor saving management table of the medal management computer 550. Next, the CPU 181a controls the card reader / writer 187 so as to eject the visitor card (step Sr26).

  Next, the CPU 181a controls the liquid crystal display 123 so as to notify the user that the re-insertion of the previously ejected member card is urged (step Sr27). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (NO in step Sr21), the CPU 181a stores the card information stored in the card table in FIG. Retreat to the area (step Sr31).

  Then, the CPU 181a resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted, and performs the issuing process as described in step Sr24 (step Sr32). Next, as in step Sr25, the CPU 181a associates the number of medals with the visitor card as the number of medals (step Sr33), and controls the card reader / writer 187 to eject the visitor card (step Sr34).

  Next, as in step Sr24, the CPU 181a takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer 187 to the reading position, and performs the process of issuing the taken-out visitor card (step Sr35). Then, the CPU 181a associates the card information saved in step Sr31 with the visitor card (step Sr36). Thereafter, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the touch panel operation process of FIG. 27 that is the caller of this card lock process.

  If it is determined that the “divide ball” button has not been operated (NO in step Sg5), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the operation of the “information inquiry” button displayed on the liquid crystal display 123 has been detected on the touch panel 124. Judgment is made (step Sg6). When determining that the “information inquiry” button is not operated (NO in step Sg6), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the ball information display flag is in an on state (step Sg7). The ball information display flag will be described in detail later.

<<< Information inquiry processing >>>
When it is determined that the “information inquiry” button has been operated (YES in step Sg6) or the ball information display flag is on (YES in step Sg7), the CPU 181a executes an information inquiry process (step Sg16).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the processing contents of the information inquiry processing executed in the medal lending machine 100. Referring to FIG. 32, first, PCU 181a of control unit 181 determines whether or not a card is being accepted (step St1).

  If it is determined that the card is being accepted (YES in step St1), the CPU 181a controls the display 123 to display the detailed card information acquired from the medal management computer 550 and stored in the memory when the card is accepted (step St2). ). The card detailed information includes the number of balls held for each rate, the number of balls stored, a game history, and the like (see FIG. 33C described later). The rate is the unit price required for lending one medal or one pachinko ball. For example, one pachinko ball, one yen, two yen, one four yen, and one medal, five yen, One sheet is 20 yen.

  Here, all types of game media and the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls for all unit prices are received from the medal management computer 550 in step Sn7 of the card receiving process of FIG. 16 executed in step Sb20 of FIG. It is assumed that it is stored in

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and all types of game media and the number of possessed balls and the number of accumulated balls for all unit prices may be acquired from the medal management computer 550 when the processing of step St2 is executed. In that case, in step Sn7 of FIG. 16, only the number of possessed balls and the number of stored balls related to the type and unit price of the game medium handled by the medal lending machine 100 are acquired.

  After step St2, the CPU 181a changes the ball information display flag to the on state (step St3) and starts measuring the display time (step St4).

  After step St4, the CPU 181a determines whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the display of the card detailed information screen was started (step St5). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the display of the card detailed information screen (NO in step St5), the CPU 181a determines whether or not an operation for ending the display of the card detailed information screen has been performed. It is determined whether or not the “return” button has been operated on the detailed information screen (step St6).

  When it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the card detailed information screen (step St5) or that the “return” button has been operated (step St6), the CPU 181a turns the ball information display flag off (step St7). ), Control to display the main menu screen shown in FIG. 26 on the display 123 (step St8).

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the display time of the card detailed information screen exceeds a predetermined time, the display of the card detailed information screen is ended. However, regarding the display of the card detailed information screen, it is not always necessary to end the display even if the display time exceeds the predetermined time (that is, the determination process in step St5 of FIG. 32 may be omitted).

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the card is not being received (NO in step St1), the CPU 181a determines whether or not the terminal ID has been received in response to the member player holding the member portable terminal over the terminal reader / writer 170. (Step Sta1).

  If it is determined that the terminal ID has been accepted (YES in step Sta1), the CPU 181a obtains terminal detailed information associated with the accepted terminal ID from the medal management computer 550, and displays the obtained terminal detailed information on the display. The display is controlled to be displayed in 123 (step Sta2). In the present embodiment, the CPU 181a inquires the medal management computer 550 to acquire the terminal detailed information every time the terminal detailed information is displayed. Note that the medal management computer 550 may not be inquired every time the terminal detailed information is displayed. For example, when the terminal ID is received, the medal lending machine 100 acquires the terminal detailed information from the medal management computer 550 and stores it, and then stores the terminal detailed information every time the terminal detailed information is displayed. May be displayed.

  Thus, the terminal detailed information is displayed when the “information inquiry” button is operated (YES in step Sg6 in FIG. 27) and the terminal ID is accepted (in the case of YES in step Sta1 in FIG. 32). The Therefore, the terminal detailed information is displayed at a timing unrelated to the execution of the replay process (that is, a timing unrelated to the display timing of the valuable information in Sna8 in FIG. 17). Further, the display of the terminal detailed information is terminated at a timing unrelated to the medal payout (that is, a timing unrelated to the display end timing of the valuable value information in Sna8 in FIG. 17).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining a display procedure of terminal detailed information. In order to display the terminal detailed information, the player first performs an operation of touching the “information inquiry” button on the menu screen displayed on the display 123 (see FIG. 33A). Thus, YES is determined in step Sg6 in FIG. 27, and the information inquiry process in step Sg16 (FIG. 32) in FIG. 27 is started.

  Next, the player performs an operation of holding the member portable terminal 171 owned by the player over the terminal reader / writer 170 (see FIG. 33B). Thereby, the terminal ID is acquired from the member portable terminal 171 and it is determined whether or not the acquired terminal ID is accepted (step Sta1 in FIG. 32).

  If the acquired terminal ID is accepted (YES in step Sta1 in FIG. 32), a terminal detailed information screen as shown in FIG. 33C is displayed on display 123 (step Sta2 in FIG. 32). .

  Thus, the player can display the terminal detailed information by a simple operation of holding the member portable terminal over the terminal reader / writer 170 after touching the “information inquiry” button on the menu screen. The terminal detailed information may be displayed by an operation in which the “information inquiry” button is touched after the member portable terminal is held over.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the terminal detailed information screen includes, as with the card detailed information, the number of possessed balls and the number of accumulated balls by rate, game history, and the like. At the beginning of the screen, the number of medals held and stored at 20 yen per piece (denoted as 20 slots in the figure), which is the rate lent by the medal lending machine 100, is displayed. Below that, there are pachinko balls 1 yen 4 yen, pachinko balls 1 yen 1 yen, 1 medal 5 yen (4 pachis, 1 each in the figure), which are rates lent by other medal lending machines 100 and card units. The number of pachinko balls or medal holding balls and storage balls of a pachi and 5 slots) is displayed. Below that, information on the game history (see FIG. 11B) is displayed. In the lower right part, a “return” button for returning the display screen to the main menu screen (see FIG. 26) is displayed. Note that the content and layout of the terminal detailed information shown in FIG. 33 (c) are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Returning to FIG. 32, after the terminal detailed information is displayed, the CPU 181a changes the ball information display flag to the ON state (step Sta3) and starts measuring the terminal detailed information display time (step Sta4). In addition, after starting the time measurement of the terminal detailed information display time, the player makes an inquiry on the terminal detailed information screen (for example, an operation for sending the terminal detailed information screen to the next screen, an operation for selecting the terminal detailed information, etc. ), The terminal detailed information display time may be extended by a predetermined time.

  After starting to measure the terminal detailed information display time by accepting the terminal ID, or when the terminal ID is not accepted in this cycle (NO in step Sta1), the CPU 181a executes the terminal detailed information display impossibility process. (Step Sta5).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a detailed procedure of the terminal detailed information display impossibility process. In step Su1, CPU 181a determines whether there is a history of displaying the detailed terminal information.

  If there is a history of displaying the detailed terminal information (YES in step Su1), CPU 181a determines whether or not the terminal detailed information display time has exceeded a predetermined displayable time (for example, 1 minute) (step Su2). .

  If the terminal detailed information display time does not exceed the displayable time (NO in step Su2), CPU 181a determines whether or not the game has ended based on the image captured by face image capturing camera 188 (step Su3). ). For example, the CPU 181a determines that the game has ended when a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes) has elapsed since the player is no longer shown in the image captured by the face image capturing camera 188. It should be noted that it may be determined that the game has ended when the player shown in the image captured by the face image capturing camera 188 has changed.

  When the game has not ended (NO in step Su3), CPU 181a determines whether or not the player has performed an operation of touching the “return” button on the terminal detailed information screen (an operation to end display of the terminal detailed information). Is determined (step Su4).

  When the terminal detailed information display time does not exceed the displayable time, the game has not ended, and the player has not touched the “return” button (steps Su2, Step Su3, Su4). In any case, the CPU 181a does not execute the terminal detailed information display impossibility process (step Su5).

  On the other hand, when the terminal detailed information display time exceeds the displayable time (YES in step Su2), or when the game ends (YES in step Su3), or the player touches the “return” button. If so (YES in step Su4), CPU 181a determines whether or not a terminal ID has been newly accepted (step Su6).

  When the terminal ID is newly received (YES in step Su6), CPU 181a determines whether or not the newly received terminal ID matches the terminal ID received last time (step Su7).

  When the newly accepted terminal ID matches the previously accepted terminal ID (YES in step Su7), CPU 181a does not execute the terminal detailed information display impossibility process (step Su5).

  If the terminal ID is not newly received (NO in step Su6), or if the newly received terminal ID does not match the previously received terminal ID (NO in step Su7), CPU 181a determines the terminal details. An information display impossibility process is executed (step Su8). By executing the terminal detailed information display disabled process, the terminal detailed information cannot be displayed. As for the terminal detailed information being displayed, the display is terminated and the subsequent redisplay is suppressed. Further, the subsequent redisplay of the terminal detailed information that has already been displayed is suppressed.

  After executing the terminal detailed information display disabled process, the CPU 181a resets the terminal detailed information display time to “0” (step Su9).

  After the process of step Su5 or step Su9, the CPU 181a returns the process to be executed to the process of the caller of this process.

  As described above, the medal lending machine 100 according to the embodiment of the present invention receives the member portable terminal in response to the holding of the member portable terminal, and the terminal detailed information associated with the accepted member portable terminal. Is obtained from the medal management computer 550 and displayed on the display 123. Then, after the display of the terminal detailed information is started, the condition that the terminal detailed information display time has exceeded the displayable time, the condition that the player has ended the game, and the operation that the player ends the display of the terminal detailed information are performed. If either of the conditions is established, the terminal detailed information is disabled. For this reason, terminal detailed information can be made undisplayable to other players at an appropriate timing. Note that the medal lending machine 100 does not execute the display disable process when the same member portable terminal is held again. Therefore, the same player can redisplay the terminal detailed information.

  In the present embodiment, as the conditions for executing the display impossible process, the condition that the terminal detailed information display time exceeds the predetermined displayable time, the condition that the player has finished the game, and the player detailed terminal information However, the conditions for executing the display disabling process are not limited to these conditions. For example, a “detailed information cannot be displayed” button is newly provided on the terminal detailed information screen shown in FIG. 33C, and the condition that the “detailed information cannot be displayed” button has been touched is displayed. You may make it make it the conditions to perform.

  In the present embodiment, the processing of Sna8 in FIG. 17 (value information display), the processing of Sta2 in FIG. 32 (terminal detailed information display), and the processing of Su7 in FIG. However, the management device such as the medal management computer 550 may transmit a signal for causing the medal lending machine 100 to perform these processes.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the case where the invention is applied to the medal lending machine 100 provided corresponding to the slot machine 1 has been described. In the second embodiment, a case where the invention is applied to a card unit 750 provided corresponding to the pachinko gaming machine 701 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a front view showing a pachinko gaming machine 701 and a card unit 750 according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750.

  The pachinko gaming machine 701 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 701 has a glass door frame 702 formed in a frame shape that can be opened and closed in the game frame. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games described later) attached to them. And the board 706).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 702 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 703, there are provided an extra ball receiving tray 704 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 703, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 705 for firing the hitting ball, and the like. A game board 706 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 702. The game board 706 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 706 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 707 is formed on the front surface of the game board 706 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member forming the extra ball tray (lower tray) 704 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position (for example, the central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray body, for example, A stick controller 7122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 7122 has a predetermined controller finger, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 7122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 7125 (see FIG. 36) that can be instructed is provided. In addition, the stick controller 7122 incorporates a vibrator motor 7126 (see FIG. 36) for causing the stick controller 7122 to vibrate.

  A member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 703 is operated by a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by, for example, pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 7122). A possible push button 7120 is provided.

  On the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 703, a ball lending button 751 that is operated when lending a ball, a return button 752 that is operated when a card is returned by specifying the remaining amount of the card, the number of balls acquired, etc., and a card A remaining frequency display portion 753 for displaying the remaining frequency is provided.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 707, there is provided an effect display device 709 capable of variably displaying (also referred to as variable display) effect symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. On the right side of the effect display device 709 in the game area 707, a first special symbol display 708a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each, and a plurality of types that can identify each of them. And a second special symbol display 708b for variably displaying the second special symbol as the identification information.

  Each of the first special symbol display device 708a and the second special symbol display device 708b is configured by a simple and small display device (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 709 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and displays various images such as a change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the display screen. An area is provided. In such a display area, for example, a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (for presentation) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right” is formed.

  Each of the first special symbol display 708a and the second special symbol display 708b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on the main board (game control board). The effect display device 709 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 708a, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 709 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 708b performs the first display. Since the effect display is executed by the effect display device 709 along with the change display when the change display of the 2 special symbols is being executed, it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  When the jackpot display result (bonus symbol) as the specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a, or the jackpot display result (jackpot symbol) as the specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 708b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 709 also derives and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbol) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this manner, the specific game state (big hit game state) is controlled as an advantageous state to which a value (advantageous value) advantageous to the player is given.

  Further, in the effect display device 709, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) It is stopped, swinging, enlarged, reduced, or deformed in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols may fluctuate in synchronization with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol may be switched. An effect that is performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect.

  Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 709 constitute a part of the jackpot combination, the change of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed is continued. This is a display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are synchronously changing while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, reach means a state in which identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least some of the variable areas are in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed, for example, in a state where the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

  The display effect in the reach state is reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during the reach, an unusual performance may be performed with a lamp or sound. This production is called reach production. Further, in the case of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect design etc.)) or a display mode (for example, color etc.) of the background image of the effect display device 709 is displayed. ) May change. This change in character display and background display mode is called reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is likely to occur compared to a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

  On the right side of the effect display device 709, a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 708a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them is provided. The first special symbol display 708a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9. In addition, on the right side of the effect display device 709 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 708a), a second special symbol display (second display) that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information that can identify each of them. Fluctuation display portion) 708b is provided. The second special symbol display 708b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying special symbols such as numbers 0 to 9.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 708a and the second special symbol indicator 708b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 708a and 708b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 713 or the second start winning opening) After passing 714 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) Is started and a big hit game is not executed), and when a variable display time (variable time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 713 is provided below the effect display device 709. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 713 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the first start opening switch 713a.

  A variable winning ball device 715 having a second starting winning port 714 through which a game ball can be won is provided below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 713. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 714 is guided to the back of the game board 706 and detected by the second start opening switch 714a. The variable winning ball device 715 is opened by a solenoid 716. When the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second start winning port 714 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second starting winning port 714 than the first starting winning port 713. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 714. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 713 than the second starting winning port 714. Note that, in a state where the variable winning ball device 715 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win). Hereinafter, the first start winning port 713 and the second start winning port 714 may be collectively referred to as a start winning port or a starting port.

  Above the second special symbol display 708b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 718b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 714, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 718b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 708b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, further above the second special symbol hold memory display 718b, the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 713, that is, the first reserved memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 718a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 718a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 708a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In the gaming machine, a ball hitting device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a hitting operation handle 705 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the game area 707. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 707 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 707, and then descends the game area 707. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 713 and is detected by the first start port switch 713a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 708a starts the first special symbol variation display (variation), and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 713. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 714 and is detected by the second start port switch 714a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 708b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 709 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. In other words, the variation display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 714. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  The effect display device 709 is used for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 708a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 708b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 708a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 708b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 709 are synchronized. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 708b, the effect display device 709 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 709, a first reserved memory display unit for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit for displaying the second reserved memory number are formed. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 720 is provided below the variable winning ball device 715. The special variable winning ball apparatus 720 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 708a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 708b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 721 in a specific game state (a big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 723.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened is called a round. Thus, the repeated continuation control is also called round control. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are provided. When it is determined that a jackpot is to be made, one of the jackpot types is selected.

  On the left side of the effect display device 709, there is provided a normal symbol display 710 that variably displays normal symbols that can be distinguished from each other. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 710 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) that can display numbers 0 to 9 in a variable manner. That is, the normal symbol display 710 is configured to display the numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9 in a variable manner. The small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 732 and is detected by the gate switch 732a, the display variation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 710 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is closed in a disadvantageous state for a player for a predetermined number of times. To an open state advantageous to the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 710, a normal symbol holding storage display 741 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 732 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 732, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 732a, the normal symbol hold storage display 741 increments the LED to be lit by one. Then, each time the fluctuation display of the normal symbol display 710 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one.

  At the bottom of the game board 706, there is an out port 726 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. Also, four speakers 727 that emit sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper and lower left and outer sides outside the game area 707. A frame LED 728 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 707.

  In addition, a card unit 750 that enables ball lending by accepting cards (visitor card, member card, member portable terminal) is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The card unit 750 is a card that records the card remaining amount and the number of balls acquired from a card that records the remaining amount of the card as a value that can be used for the game by the player and the number of balls acquired as a value acquired by the player as a result of the game. Upon accepting the withdrawal, a control signal for instructing the ball dispensing device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to pay out the pachinko balls as a rental ball corresponding to the withdrawal amount is output to the dispensing control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701. By using the pachinko ball, the player can play a game with the pachinko gaming machine 701. Thus, the control signal output from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701 is an example of a pachinko ball lending command based on the value recorded on the cards. However, the present invention is not limited to signals exchanged between the card unit 750 and a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 701. When the card unit is built in the gaming machine, the lending command is exchanged inside the gaming machine. It may be a control signal.

  The card unit 750 includes, for example, a usable display lamp indicating whether or not the card unit 750 is in a usable state, a connecting table direction indicator indicating which side of the pachinko gaming machine 701 corresponds to the card unit, and a card unit. When checking the card insertion indicator lamp indicating that a card is inserted in the card, the card insertion slot into which the card as a recording medium is inserted, and the card reader / writer mechanism provided on the back of the card insertion slot A card unit lock for releasing the card unit is provided.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701, a player can play a game using cards (visitor card, member card, member portable terminal).

  The membership card is a recording medium made up of an IC card. A card ID is recorded on the membership card. Various information (card information) such as a card remaining amount as a consideration for a player's input price, earned ball number information, accumulated ball number information, and member information for identifying a member individual is associated with the card ID and will be described later. Recorded on the management server. The acquired ball management server can determine various corresponding card information based on the membership card. Card information such as the remaining card amount, information on the number of stored balls, information on the number of points visited, and member information is managed by the acquired ball management server using the card ID.

  Here, the stored ball refers to an act of depositing an acquired value such as an acquired ball acquired by the player to the game hall side and the deposited value. The accumulated ball number information is information indicating the number of accumulated balls of the player who owns the member card. The earned ball refers to a value indicating the score or ball obtained by the player through the game. The acquired number-of-balls information is information indicating the number of acquired balls of the player who owns the member card. The replay means that a player plays a game by lending a ball using a stored ball or an acquired ball not deposited in a game hall.

  When a player plays a game, first, money (1000 yen) is inserted into the money insertion slot. Then, when the inserted money is discriminated and is a proper money, when the ball lending button 751 is operated, the game balls are lent out within the range of the amount of the inserted money, and a game becomes possible. Note that money other than 1000 yen bills can also be used. When the card is returned, the number of balls acquired by the player can be added to the number of balls specified by the card ID of the inserted member card. If no membership card is inserted, a visitor card is issued from the card unit 750. The number of balls acquired by the player is recorded on the visitor card and discharged to the player. In this way, the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount used for the game from the deposit amount is stored in the member card and the visitor card in an identifiable manner.

  When a player plays a game using a visitor card, the visitor card is inserted into a card slot provided in the card unit 750. Then, card information recorded on the inserted visitor card such as the remaining card amount and the number of balls acquired is read by a card reader / writer provided in the card unit 750. Then, based on the read card information, the remaining card amount is displayed on the remaining number display unit 753 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701, and the acquired number of balls is displayed on the count display unit 7555 provided in the card unit 750. Is displayed. The count display unit 7555 is configured to display the remaining card amount and the number of acquired balls with a predetermined number of digits. A game can be played using the displayed card remaining amount and the number of acquired balls.

  When a player plays a game using a membership card, the membership card is inserted into a card slot provided in the card unit 750. Then, the card ID recorded on the inserted member card is read by the card reader / writer. Then, the ball number data (acquired ball number data, accumulated ball number data) specified by the acquired ball management server based on the read card ID is displayed on the count display unit 7555. A game can be performed using the displayed card remaining amount, the number of acquired balls, and the number of stored balls.

  When a player plays a game using a member portable terminal, the member portable terminal is held over a terminal reader / writer 7170 provided in the card unit 750. Then, the card ID recorded on the held member portable terminal is read by the terminal reader / writer 7170 in a non-contact manner. Then, the ball number data (acquired ball number data, accumulated ball number data) specified by the acquired ball management server based on the read card ID is displayed on the count display unit 7555. A game can be performed using the displayed card remaining amount, the number of acquired balls, and the number of stored balls.

  The card unit 750 is provided with a replay button 7554 that is operated when receiving a lend using a stored ball or an acquired ball, that is, when replaying.

  When the ball lending button 751 is operated, a predetermined lending unit amount is deducted from the remaining card amount displayed in the remaining frequency display portion 753 and reduced, and in exchange for that, a ball for the lending unit amount is deducted. Is paid out from the pachinko machine 701 as a ball. Further, the remaining card amount is displayed on the remaining frequency display portion 753. Such an operation is called a ball lending operation.

  If the replay button 7554 is operated in a state where a card is inserted in the card slot, the number of balls corresponding to the number of return units determined in advance from the number of acquired balls or the number of stored balls displayed on the counting display portion 7555. Are deducted and subtracted, and in exchange, balls for the number of return units are returned from the ball payout device 797 of the pachinko gaming machine 701. Such an operation is called a replay operation. The balls paid out in this way are called return balls.

  If the return button 752 is operated in a state where the membership card is inserted in the card slot, information such as the number of balls acquired at that time, the remaining card amount, and the number of stored balls is stored in the acquired ball number management server, The membership card in which the card ID specifying the stored information is recorded is ejected from the card slot and returned to the player.

  Balls paid out as balls for lending from the card unit 750 are paid out on a ball supply tray 703 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 from a ball dispensing device 797 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  In the game, the player operates a hitting operation handle 705 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 to eject and fire the balls stored in the hitting ball supply tray 703 and to hit the game area 707. Then, when the balls that are driven into the game area 707 win the various winning areas as described above, a predetermined number of premium balls for each winning area are paid out to the hitting ball supply tray 703. When the hitting ball supply tray 703 becomes full, balls are sent to an excess ball receiving tray 704 provided below and stored.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701, pachinko ball counting devices called individual counters 705 are provided corresponding to the respective pachinko gaming machines 701. Each counter 705 includes a counting ball storage 794 provided below the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  The counting ball storage unit 794 is provided below the surplus ball receiving tray 704 and has a shape capable of receiving and storing the balls discharged from the surplus ball receiving tray 704. When the discharge lever provided in the surplus ball receiving tray 704 is operated due to the storage ball becoming full or the like, the ball stored in the surplus ball receiving tray 704 is opened at the bottom of the surplus ball receiving tray 704. Is discharged downward and received by the counting ball reservoir 794.

  The counting ball storage unit 794 is provided with a counting shutter 794a that can be operated by the player. The counting shutter 794a is a member for opening and closing an opening provided at the bottom of the counting ball storage portion 794, and is opened and closed according to an operation of the integrally formed lever portion 794b. The counting shutter 794a is closed in a normal state to make the counting ball storage portion 794 ready to store balls, and is opened when the lever portion 794b is operated by the player. When the counting shutter 794 a is opened, the balls stored in the counting ball storage unit 794 are discharged to the ball discharge passage 7520 connected to the bottom of the counting ball storage unit 794. On the entry side of the ball discharge passage 7520, there is an acquisition ball detection switch 7501 comprising a passage detection sensor that detects the ball discharged from the counting ball storage unit 794 (hereinafter referred to as “acquired ball”). Is provided.

  When a ball is detected and counted by the acquired ball detection switch 7501, the count value is displayed on the count display portion 7555 provided in the card unit 750. This count value (also referred to as “acquired ball count”) is recorded on the visitor card as acquired ball count information at the end of the game, and can be used for various purposes such as prize exchange. The member card is stored in the acquired ball management server in association with the card ID of the member card, and can be used for various purposes such as prize exchange. Further, the number of acquired balls indicated by the acquired number of balls information can be converted into the number of stored balls and recorded as the number of stored balls information.

  When returning, the return button 752 is operated by the player. When the return button 752 is operated, all the count values obtained by the above-described acquired ball detection switch 7501 are settled for the exchange of prizes, and information such as the settled count value (in other words, the number of obtained balls) is stored in the card. The data is written on the visitor card by the reader / writer, and the visitor card is ejected from the card slot and returned to the player. On the other hand, when a player inserts a member card into the card slot and returns, information such as a count value (in other words, the number of balls acquired) is stored in the acquired ball management server in association with the card ID of the member card. Is done.

  Of the “big hit”, after being controlled to the big hit gaming state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is higher than the normal state (the normal gaming state (low probability state) that is not a probable change state) as a special gaming state A type of jackpot (type) that shifts to a state of probability variation (an abbreviation of probability variation state, also referred to as high probability state) is called “probability variation jackpot”.

  As the big hit gaming states with different numbers of rounds, there are provided a plurality of types of big hit gaming states such as a normal big hit and a big hit gaming state of 15 rounds with a probable big hit, and a two round big hit gaming state with a sudden probable big hit. In addition, the big hit gaming state where the number of rounds is the same, but the opening times of each round are different, the big hit gaming state with a normal big hit and a probable big hit is 29 seconds and the open time due to a sudden probable big hit is 0.5 seconds A plurality of types of big hit game states are provided. In the small hit, the small hit game state of the number of times of opening (2 times) and the opening time (0.5 seconds) is the same as the sudden probability change big hit.

  Specifically, in the big hit game state of the normal big hit and the probable big hit, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is set in the open state, a predetermined open state end condition (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) in the open state) is set. The closed state is established in accordance with the elapse of time or when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is generated. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of releases in the big hit gaming state reaches 15 rounds (final round), which is a predetermined upper limit value.

  Also, in the big hit gaming state with sudden probability change big hit, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened, a predetermined open condition end condition (predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) elapses). In other words, the closed state is established when a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls has been established. When the opening end condition is satisfied, a right to continue is generated, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the big hit gaming state reaches two rounds (final round) at which a predetermined upper limit value is reached.

  As described above, the sudden probability variation jackpot is allowed up to the number of times the opening of the big winning opening is less than 15 rounds (two in this embodiment), and the opening time of the big winning opening is short (for example, 0. 0. It is a big hit type (type) for 5 seconds.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state based on the probability variation jackpot is accompanied by the probability variation state, and the variation time (variation display period) of the special symbol and the production symbol is more than the non-short-time state (normal variation time state). When shortened, it is controlled to the short state. In the present embodiment, the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot is controlled to be a short time state.

  In this way, the transition time to the short-time state reduces the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol. Therefore, when the short-time state is reached, it is easy for an effective start winning to occur, and a big hit game may be performed. Rise.

  Note that the type of jackpot (type) that does not shift to the probability change state after being controlled to the 15-round jackpot gaming state among the “hits” is called “ordinary jackpot”.

  In addition, as a special game state based on the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit, the frequency of the game ball entering the variable prize ball device 715 is increased by increasing the frequency at which the variable prize ball device 715 is opened. It is controlled to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approach, higher frequency) to the device 715. On the other hand, the special gaming state based on the sudden probability change big hit is controlled to the probability change state, but is not controlled to the electric chew support control state.

  Here, electric Chu support control will be described. As electric support control, normal symbol variation time (time from the start of variation display to display result derivation display time) is shortened and the display result is derived and displayed at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), normal symbol Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol of the game will be a winning symbol (ordinary symbol probability control), control to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 715 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of opening of the variable winning ball device 715 Control (opening number increase control) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball apparatus 715 is open is higher than when the control is not performed, so the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased. As a result, the game ball becomes easier to start and win (the execution conditions for the variable display in the special symbol displays 708a and 708b and the effect display device 709 are more easily established). In addition, by increasing the winning frequency to the second starting winning port 714 by such control, a gaming state is achieved in which the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is increased.

  The state (high frequency state) in which the winning frequency to the second start winning opening 714 is increased by such electric Chu support control is the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball according to the winning with respect to the number of shot balls. Since the ratio “base” is higher than when the control is not performed, it is called “high base state”. Further, when such control is not performed, it is called a “low base state”. Such control is control for facilitating winning to the variable winning ball apparatus 715 by supporting the winning with the variable winning ball apparatus 715, that is, the electric tulip, and is referred to as “electric chew support control”.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the state of jackpot probability, and terms indicating a combination of base states are used. , “High base state (electric Chu support control state)” and “low base state (non-electric Chu support control state)” are used.

  Furthermore, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to a state in which any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increase control state are combined, You may make it transfer to a high base state. In addition, as the electric chew support control, by shifting to any one of the normal symbol shortening control state, the normal symbol probability changing control state, the opening time extension control state, and the opening number increasing control state, You may make it transfer to a state. As described above, as the electric chew support control, any one of a normal symbol shortening control state, a normal symbol probability changing control state, an opening time extension control state, and an opening number increasing control state, any one of a plurality (all) Any control may be performed as long as the control is performed in a combined state or a combined state.

  In the present embodiment, the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot is controlled to the time reduction state and the electric chew support control state accompanying the control to the probability variation state. In addition, as a relationship between the short time state and the electric chew support control state in the special game state, the electric chew support control state may be controlled in association with the short time state. You may make it control to a control state.

  In the case of this embodiment, there is a case where the special game state is not controlled to the short-time state and the electric chew support control state as the special game state after the end of the big hit game state like the sudden change big hit. In addition, after the big hit gaming state, when it is in the normal state without being controlled to the probability change state, the period is not limited by the number of variable display times, and the short time state and electric support are available until the next big hit occurs. You may make it control to a control state.

  In this embodiment, “high probability state (probability variation state)” and “low probability state (non-probability variation state)” are used as terms indicating the jackpot probability state. The “high base state (electric power support control state)” and the “low base state (non-electric power support control state)” are used.

  In this embodiment, terms indicating a combination of the state of the big hit probability and the base state are “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy high base state”, “high accuracy low base state”, and Use “highly accurate base state”. The “low probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “low probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the low probability state and the base state is the high base state. The “high probability low base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the low base state. The “high probability high base state” is a state indicating that the state of the big hit probability is the high probability state and the base state is the high base state.

  The normal jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to the non-probability changing state, the time-short state, and the electric chew support control state (low-accuracy high-base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state. The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to the probability variation state, the short time state, and the electric chew support control state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15-round jackpot gaming state.

  Sudden probability change big hit is controlled to shift to the probability change state after the end of two rounds of big hit game state with very short opening time, and shifts to the short time state and electric chew support control state (high probability / high base state) This is a big hit that is controlled to the non-time-short state and the non-electricity Chu support control state (high probability / low base state) without performing control.

  In the probability variation big hit, the probability variation state, the time reduction state, and the electric Chu support control state continue for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied. In the normal big hit, the period until the shorter condition is satisfied, which is the condition that the time reduction state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times of the variable display or the condition that the next big hit occurs. continue. The number of times of variable display in which the time reduction state continues is also referred to as the time reduction number.

  Also, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the special gaming state consisting of the probability change state continues for a period until the condition that the next big hit occurs is satisfied.

  When the small hit game state is reached, the big hit probability and the base state as the gaming state before the start of the small hit gaming state are maintained after the small hit gaming state ends. In this embodiment, the small hit is an example in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is opened in the small hit gaming state with the same number of times and the same opening time as the sudden probability change big hit. However, as for the small hits, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720 is not completely the same as the opening mode at the time of sudden probability variation big hit, but it is difficult to distinguish from the opening mode at the time of sudden probability variation big hit. It may be visible. In other words, as a small hit, the opening mode of the special variable winning ball device 720 may be a hit in which the special variable winning ball device 720 is opened with substantially the same number of opening times and approximately the same opening time as the sudden probability variation big hit.

  Since the sudden probability variable big hit and the small hit are the same as the number of times and the release time of the special variable winning ball apparatus 720, whether the sudden odd-change big hit or the small hit is in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state? Is difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, when a common performance that does not notify that the probability change state is performed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden probability change big hit and the end of the small hit gaming state, it is determined whether or not the probability changed state. It is difficult for players to recognize. In addition, suddenly probable big hits have a low base after the end of the big hit gaming state, so compared to the small hits where the base does not change after the end of the small hit gaming state, and after the end of the big hit gaming state of the sudden probable big hit, It is difficult for the player to distinguish the operation status after the gaming state is finished. Since such a control state is a state in which the probability variation state is latent, it is called a latent state, and the control for making such a latent state is called latent control. In the case of a sudden probability change big hit that occurs in the high probability low base state, after the big hit gaming state is ended, it may be controlled to a short time state and controlled to electric chew support control. In this way, when shifting to the high-accuracy and high-base state, it is desirable not to perform a latent effect described later.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to this embodiment, in the effect control CPU 7101, after the end of the big hit gaming state and after the end of the small hit gaming state, a latent effect that provides a common effect without notifying whether or not it is in a probable change state. Is done. For example, in the effect control CPU 7101, when a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command is received at the end of the big hit, the common background image after the big hit gaming state (the small hit gaming state in the case of the small hit) is ended. A common effect, such as displaying. By performing such a latent effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the player is in a probable state, and to improve the interest of the game. The latent effect may be transmitted by sending a command instructing execution of the latent effect from the game control microcomputer 7100 and the effect control CPU 7101 may execute the latent effect in response to the command.

  FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 731. As shown in FIG. FIG. 36 also shows a payout control board 737, an effect control board 780, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 7560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to a program is mounted on the main board 731. The game control microcomputer 7560 includes a ROM 754 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 755 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 756 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 757. The game control microcomputer 7560 is a one-chip microcomputer in which a ROM 754 and a RAM 755 are incorporated. The game control microcomputer 7560 further includes a random number circuit 7503 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In addition, the RAM 755 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 7910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 755 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM.

  In the game control microcomputer 7560, the CPU 756 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 754, so that the game control microcomputer 7560 (or CPU 756) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 756 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 731.

  The random number circuit 7503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to win a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. Random number circuit 7503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. Further, the game control microcomputer 7560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 7503.

  An input driver circuit 758 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 732a, the first start port switch 713a, the second start port switch 714a, and the count switch 723 to the game control microcomputer 7560 is also mounted on the main board 731. Also, an output circuit 759 for driving a solenoid 716 for opening / closing the variable winning ball device 715 and a solenoid 721 for opening / closing the special variable winning ball device 720 for forming a special winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 7560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 731.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 7560 includes a first special symbol display 708a, a second special symbol display 708b, which displays special symbols in a variable manner, a normal symbol display 710, which displays normal symbols in a variable manner, and a first special symbol hold memory. The display control of the display 718a, the second special symbol storage memory display 718b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 741 is performed.

  The effect control board 780 includes an effect control microcomputer 7100, a ROM 7102, a RAM 7103, a VDP 7109, an I / O port unit 7105, and the like. The ROM 7102 stores a program and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 7103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 7102 and the RAM 7103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 7100. The VDP 7109 performs display control of the effect display device 709 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 7100.

  The effect control microcomputer 7100 provides an effect control command for instructing the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 7560 via the relay board 777 that allows the signal to pass only in one direction from the main board 731 to the effect control board 780. And display control of the frame LED 728 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 735 and also from the speaker 727 via the audio output board 770. Various effects are controlled, such as controlling the sound output.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 7101 receives an operation detection signal from the trigger sensor 7121 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 7125 of the stick controller 7122 has been detected. Further, the effect control CPU 7101 inputs an operation detection signal from the push sensor 7124 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 7120 has been detected. In addition, the effect control CPU 7101 inputs an operation detection signal from the tilt direction sensor unit 7123 as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 7122 has been detected. The effect control CPU 7101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 7126 to vibrate the stick controller 7122.

  A card unit 750 is connected to the payout control board 737 via an interface board 766. The card unit 750 outputs a signal instructing the payout control board 737 to pay out game balls such as a lent ball, an acquired ball, and a stored ball. Each counter 705 is connected to the card unit 750. Each counter 705 outputs a signal that can specify the number of balls acquired by the acquired ball detection switch 7501 to the card unit 750.

  In such a gaming machine, when the detailed information screen as described in FIG. 33C is displayed on the display 7123, even if the replay button 7554 is operated, the process for replaying is performed. The ball lending process according to the operation of the ball lending button 751 is executed while the counting is not performed by the acquired ball detection switch 7501 because the operation of the lever portion 794b is disabled. It will not be prevented.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 37, the present invention is provided in correspondence with a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 701) and can identify the amount of gaming value (card balance) that can be used for gaming (card ID). Accepts the insertion of a game recording medium (member card or visitor card) on which is recorded, and performs a process (ball lending process) for using the magnitude of the game value for the game in the corresponding gaming machine Based on accepting the operation of the use processing means (card reader / writer, the control unit of the card unit 750) and the return operation means (return button 752) for accepting the operation for returning the inserted game recording medium. A gaming device (card unit 750), and a return processing means (card reader / writer, control unit of card unit 750) for performing return processing for returning the game recording medium. In particular, a confirmation operation means (touch panel type display 7123) for accepting a confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted game recording medium and the return process on condition that the confirmation operation is accepted. Return setting means (set by the card management computer 500) for setting which one of the first return process or the second return process for performing the return process without the condition that the confirmation operation has been accepted. The control unit of the card unit 750 for storing “whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary”, and the return processing unit accepts the operation of the return operation unit (in FIG. 40, the return of S202) The first return process or the second return process set by the return setting means is executed based on the reception of the request signal) (It is determined whether or not “confirmation operation is required” is set in S204. If there is no setting, the card is immediately returned in S209. If there is a setting, the card is returned in S209 if it is determined that the confirmation button is operated in S208. This is a gaming device characterized by that.

  In the following, an example will be described in which the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine 701, the gaming medium is a pachinko ball, and the gaming medium is loaned. In the following description, the database may be abbreviated as “DB”, the reader / writer as “R / W”, and the step as “S”.

  The membership card or visitor card is an example of a game recording medium, and is recorded with information that can identify the remaining amount of the card that can be used for a game (pachinko ball lending). A card ID for individually identifying a card or a visitor card and the remaining card amount are recorded. This membership card or visitor card is formed by forming a recording area in which a card ID, the balance of the card, etc. are recorded at a predetermined part of a thin plastic plate having a rectangular shape. This is an IC card on which a non-contact type integrated circuit (IC chip) equipped with a functional EEPROM is mounted.

  The payout control board 737 and the card unit 750 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 are connected via an interface board 766. A PSI signal line, a PRDY signal line, a BRDY signal line, a BRQ signal line, and an EXS signal line are provided between the card unit 750 and the payout control board 737.

  The PSI signal line is a signal line for confirming the connection between the card unit 750 and the pachinko gaming machine 701. By transmitting a connection confirmation signal via the PSI signal line, the launch handle can be operated in the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  The PRDY signal line provides a payable signal indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 701 is in a state (standby state) where communication between the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 is possible with respect to the corresponding card unit 750. This is a signal line for transmission. Specifically, as shown in S1 of FIG. 37, when the voltage level applied to the PRDY signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, a payout enable signal is sent from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750. Sent.

  The BRDY signal line transmits a ball lending possible signal from the card unit 750 to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701 when there is a ball lending operation in the standby state in which the card unit 750 receives the payable signal. Signal line. Specifically, as shown in S2 of FIG. 37, the voltage level applied to the BRDY signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, so that the ball lending possible signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  In addition, the BRDY signal line terminates the ball lending from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701 when the ball lending processing for a predetermined number of times (in this example, 5 minutes) associated with one ball lending operation is completed. A signal line for transmitting a signal. Specifically, as shown in S7 of FIG. 37, when the voltage level applied to the BRDY signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH, a ball lending end signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The BRQ signal line is an example of a lending command signal line (= ball lending command signal line), and a lending request signal (= ball lending) requesting lending of game media from the card unit 750 to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701. Request signal). Specifically, as shown in S3 of FIG. 37, when the voltage level applied to the BRQ signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW, the ball lending request signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The BRQ signal line is a signal line for transmitting a lending command signal (= ball lending command signal) that commands lending of a pachinko ball to the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701 from the card unit 750. Specifically, as shown in S5 of FIG. 37, when the voltage level applied to the BRQ signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH, the ball lending command signal is sent from the card unit 750 to the pachinko gaming machine 701. Sent.

  The EXS signal line is an example of a request acknowledge signal line, and a request acknowledge signal indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 701 has accepted the ball lending request to the card unit 750 (that is, the ball lending request signal has been received). Is a signal line for transmitting. Specifically, after the pachinko gaming machine 701 receives the ball lending request signal, it is confirmed that the pachinko gaming machine 701 is ready to lend a pachinko ball (that is, there is no ball out and no error). Later, as shown in S4 of FIG. 37, the request acknowledge signal is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750 when the voltage level applied to the EXS signal line is switched from HIGH to LOW. .

  The EXS signal line is a signal line for transmitting a ball lending completion signal indicating that the ball lending processing is completed from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750 when the ball lending processing for several times is completed. It is. Specifically, when the ball lending process is completed, that is, when the pachinko ball has been paid out, the voltage level applied to the EXS signal line is switched from LOW to HIGH as shown in S6 of FIG. As a result, a ball lending completion signal is transmitted from the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the card unit 750.

  That is, the card unit 750 gives a lending preparation signal (for example, a LOW level of the PRDY signal) indicating that a gaming medium (for example, a pachinko ball) can be lent by a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 701). A first receiving means for receiving from the machine, and a lending request signal (for example, a LOW level of the BRDY signal) indicating that a lending operation (for example, operation of the ball lending button 751 of the pachinko gaming machine 701) has been received to the gaming machine. A first transmission means for transmitting; a second transmission means for transmitting a lending command signal (for example, a LOW level of a BRQ signal) for instructing lending of a game medium to the gaming machine after transmission of the lending request signal; and the lending A loanable signal (for example, indicating that the game medium transmitted from the gaming machine can be loaned in response to the request signal and the loan command signal (for example, Second receiving means for receiving the LOW level of the EXS signal), third sending means for sending a loan confirmation signal (for example, HIGH level of the BRQ signal) indicating confirmation of reception of the loanable signal to the gaming machine, Lending of game media (for example, actual payout of pachinko balls, addition of the number of game balls) is executed in the gaming machine in response to the lending confirmation signal, and is sent when completed, indicating completion of lending of game media Third receiving means for receiving a signal (for example, HIGH level of the EXS signal), and fourth transmitting means for transmitting a loan request end signal (for example, HIGH level of the BRDY signal) indicating the end of the loan request to the gaming machine. Is provided.

  The touch panel display 7123 is for accepting operations from the player and displaying various information. Specifically, as shown in D0 of FIG. 39, it functions as a display means for displaying a warning regarding the return of the membership card or visitor card, and the return button 752 is operated as shown in D1 of FIG. It functions as a return operation notification means for notifying the effect, and further functions as a confirmation operation means for accepting a confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted member card or visitor card as shown in D2 of FIG. .

  When the setting mode is activated in the card management computer 500, a setting screen shown in FIG. In this setting screen, a radio button for setting whether or not the confirmation operation is necessary and a radio button for setting whether or not to display the alert display are displayed. Then, by operating the input device of the card management computer 500, selecting whether the confirmation operation is necessary or not and whether or not to display a warning, and operating the “Setting” button, the setting is performed. The contents are transmitted to each card unit 750 and stored in the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750.

  Here, the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 is the first return process that performs the return process on the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted, or the return process without the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted. This function functions as a return setting means for setting which of the second return processing to be executed, and a confirmation operation is required according to the setting content received from the card management computer 500 (that is, the first return processing is performed). Or whether the confirmation operation is unnecessary (that is, the second return process is performed) is stored. The EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 functions as display setting means for setting whether or not to perform a warning display, and displays a warning display according to the setting content received from the card management computer 500. Alternatively, it memorizes whether or not to display an alert.

  Next, the operation of the card unit 750 (that is, processing performed by the control unit of the card unit 750) will be described.

  The ball lending process performed by the control unit of the card unit 750 will be described. When the card unit 750 accepts a ball lending operation with the card remaining amount recorded on the membership card or the visitor card being several minutes or more once, the control unit of the card unit 750 first passes a pachinko game via the BRQ signal line. The ball lending request signal (S3 in FIG. 37) is transmitted to the payout control board 737 of the machine 701, and the request acknowledge signal (S4) transmitted from the payout control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 via the EXS signal line is received. Wait. If it is determined that the request acknowledge signal has been received, the ball lending command signal (S5) is transmitted to the payout control board 737 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 via the BRQ signal line, and the pachinko machine via the EXS signal line. It waits for the reception of the ball lending completion signal (S6) transmitted from the payout control board 737 of the gaming machine 701. If it is determined that the ball lending completion signal has been received, the card reader / writer updates and subtracts the amount of money for one time from the remaining amount of card recorded on the member card or visitor card, and a remaining number display portion 753 The display of the remaining frequency at 1 is subtracted by 1 frequency, and the process ends. The control unit of the card unit 750 performs processing (ball lending processing) for using the remaining amount of the card specified from the recorded information of the member card or visitor card accepted for use in the game in the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701. It functions as a usage processing means.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the alert display processing performed by the control unit of the card unit 750 will be described. When the card unit 750 accepts a membership card or a visitor card (that is, is inserted), the control unit of the card unit 750 displays “a warning display” based on the stored contents of the EEPROM functioning as the display setting means. It is determined whether or not “Yes” is set (S301). If it is determined that “not display alert” is set (NO), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that “notice display” is set (YES), the display timing (for example, every 2 minutes) is waited (S302). An alerting display (for example, “Please be careful about forgetting to remove the card or theft” shown in D0) is displayed on the display 7123 (S303), and the process is terminated. That is, if “to display caution” is set, a caution display is displayed at each display timing. According to this, an alerting display can be performed regardless of whether the first return process or the second return process is performed. The display timing can be arbitrarily set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the return process performed by the control unit of the card unit 750 will be described. If there is a return operation (operation of the return button 752) on the pachinko gaming machine 701 in a state where the card unit 750 is receiving a membership card or a visitor card (that is, inserted) (YES in S201), the pachinko gaming machine When the return request signal is transmitted from 701 to the card unit 750 (S202) and the card unit 750 receives the return request signal, a return process is started and a return operation notification (for example, “Return button shown in D1” Is operated ”) is displayed on the display 7123. Thus, by executing the return process based on the receipt of the return request, the pachinko gaming machine 701 only performs a normal process of transmitting a return request signal by operating the return button 752, so the pachinko machine There is no need to change the gaming machine 701. Further, since the fact that the return button 752 has been operated is notified, the player can discover that another person has operated the return button 752.

  Next, the control unit of the card unit 750 determines whether or not “confirmation operation is required” is set based on the stored contents of the EEPROM functioning as the return setting means (S204). Here, when it is determined that “confirmation operation is not required” is set (NO), that is, when it is set to execute the second return process in which the return process is performed without the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted. Returns the received member card or visitor card, and displays a return indication (for example, “Please take the card” shown in D3) on the display 7123 (S209). finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that “confirmation operation is required” is set (YES), that is, when it is set to execute the first return processing that performs the return processing on the condition that the confirmation operation is accepted The time measurement is started (S205), a confirmation operation request display (for example, “please press the confirmation button” and confirmation button shown in D2) is displayed on the display 7123 (S207), and the time is up (for example, 10 seconds have elapsed). Until the operation of the confirmation button is waited until (S207, S208).

  If it is determined that the confirmation button has not been operated before the time is up (NO in S207), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a confirmation button operation before the time is up (YES in S208), the process proceeds to S209 and the process is terminated. Here, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S205 functions as a time measuring unit that starts timing based on the reception of the return request signal, and the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processes of S207 to S209. If the return setting means is set to execute the first return process (YES in S204), the return process performs the return process on the condition that the time measured by the time measuring means is received within the predetermined time. It functions as a processing means. According to this, since the membership card or the visitor card is not returned unless the confirmation operation is performed within a predetermined time, it is possible to make it difficult for the other person to steal the membership card or the visitor card. The predetermined time can be set arbitrarily, but it is longer than the time required for the player to operate the return button 752 until the confirmation button is operated, and another person who aims to steal the membership card or visitor card returns the return button. It is preferably shorter than the time required for operating the confirmation button after operating 752.

  Moreover, it is preferable that the confirmation button is provided at a position away from the return button 752 by a predetermined interval. Here, the predetermined interval is, for example, within a range in which the player can see both the return button 752 and the confirmation button in view. According to this, since it is difficult for another person who operates the return button 752 to operate the confirmation button without noticing the player, the member card or the visitor card can be more effectively prevented from being stolen. Since the return button 752 is often provided on the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 701, the confirmation button is not only the card unit 750 arranged on the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 701, but also the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 701 itself. Alternatively, it may be provided on the calling lamp 200 installed on the upper side of the pachinko gaming machine 701.

  As described above, the confirmation operation means (confirmation button displayed on the touch panel display 7123) for accepting the confirmation operation for confirming the return of the inserted membership card or visitor card and the confirmation operation are accepted. A return button 752 for setting which of the first return process for performing the return process or the second return process for performing the return process without receiving the confirmation operation as a condition. Since the first return process or the second return process is executed based on the receipt of the operation, the theft is closely monitored by a store clerk in order to prevent the game recording medium from being stolen during the game. The amusement hall that operates to prevent the situation should just set the execution of the second return process, reducing the monitoring burden on the store clerk, but by making the player troublesome Since game arcade wishing to operate to prevent the flame may be set to execute the first return processing, it is possible to provide a card unit 750 capable of supporting both a game arcade.

  Note that the gaming device is provided with each unit counting device for counting the number of acquired game media (the number of possessed balls) acquired by the player, and the remaining card amount and the number of retained balls are stored and displayed on the gaming device. In this case, the storage and display of the remaining amount of the card is erased, the remaining amount card (corresponding to the membership card or the visitor card of the present invention) that can specify only the remaining amount of the card is discharged, and the storage and display of the number of balls is retained It is conceivable to configure a gaming device. According to this, when a big hit or the like occurs in the corresponding pachinko gaming machine 701, the remaining card can be discharged for the time being, so that the card remaining can be prevented from being stolen. The number of balls you have may be stolen, but if you have two cards to return to the player, handling will be cumbersome. Later, it is possible to discharge a ball card that can specify the number of balls. However, with such a gaming device, it is possible to discharge the remaining card without erasing the memory and display of the number of balls, so even if the remaining card is stolen by another person, If it is set that the first return process is performed by applying the invention (confirmation operation is necessary), it is particularly effective because the remaining amount card is difficult to be stolen.

Next, a modification of the above embodiment will be described.
In the above embodiment, the card balance recorded on the member card or visitor card is compared with the card balance managed by the card management computer 500 in association with the card ID of the member card or visitor card. In the above description, an example in which ball lending using the remaining card amount recorded on the membership card or the visitor card is performed when the verification is OK has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the card remaining amount is not recorded on the member card or visitor card, but the card remaining amount managed by the card management computer 500 is used in association with the card ID of the member card or visitor card. The ball management may be performed, and conversely, the card management computer 500 does not manage the remaining amount of the card, and the remaining amount of the card recorded on the membership card or the visitor card is used. good.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the return operation means (return button 752) and the return confirmation means (confirmation buttons displayed on the touch panel display 7123) are separate has been described. It may be a button.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the return confirmation unit is a confirmation button displayed on the touch panel display 7123 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return confirmation unit is provided at a predetermined location of the card unit 750. It may be an independent button.

  Also, the return confirmation means is a numeric keypad displayed on the touch panel display 7123 (or a numeric keypad provided separately on the card unit 750), and the password desired by the player is entered and stored using the numeric keypad. When the operation is requested, the input of the personal identification number is accepted with the numeric keypad, and the confirmation operation may be accepted when it is determined that the inputted personal identification number and the stored personal identification number coincide with each other. . According to this, although the time and effort of the player is increased, the confirmation operation is not accepted unless the password stored by the player is inputted, so that it is possible to reliably prevent the game recording medium from being stolen.

  The return confirmation means is an IC chip R / W provided in the card unit 750, and the IC chip identification information built in the portable terminal possessed by the player is read in advance by the IC chip R / W. When the confirmation operation is requested, the identification information is read from the IC chip of the portable terminal with the IC chip R / W, and it is determined that the read identification information matches the stored identification information. Thus, the confirmation operation may be accepted. According to this, since the confirmation operation is not accepted unless it is the portable terminal of the player, it is possible to reliably prevent the game recording medium from being stolen.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, the card management computer 500 sets whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary and whether or not a warning display is to be performed. The example in which the data is transmitted to the card unit 750 and stored (set) in the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each card unit 750 may be set to determine whether or not a confirmation operation is necessary and whether or not to display a warning. For example, each card unit 750 may be set by providing a dip switch, or each card unit 750 may be set by a remote controller, or may be set by a touch panel display 7123. According to this, even if the card management computer 500 and each card unit 750 are offline, these settings can be performed. Note that the setting on the touch panel display 7123 may be set not only by the store clerk but also by the player.

  Further, the same setting may not be made for all card units 750 provided in the game hall, but different settings may be made for each card unit 750. For example, it is set that a confirmation operation is necessary for a card unit 750 on a certain amusement island (that is, the first return process is performed), and the monitoring operation is reduced, while a confirmation operation is performed on a card unit 750 on a certain amusement island. It can be set to be unnecessary (that is, the second return process is performed), so that the salesclerk can be closely monitored. In this case, as described above, the setting is not limited to each card unit 750, but can be set for each card unit 750 in the card management computer 500.

  In the above-described embodiment, a setting content screen indicating whether the first return process (confirmation operation is required) is set or the second return process (confirmation operation is not required) is set is displayed on the display 7123. Anyway. This setting content screen is displayed at a position close to the confirmation button, or is displayed together with a screen on which the remaining number (and the number of balls in the card unit 750 with each counter) is displayed. An unauthorized person who steals a game recording medium often decides whether or not to steal by looking at the screen, but it can be expected to abandon the theft by displaying this setting content screen.

  In the above embodiment, the display 7123 displays the remaining number and the number of balls, and a camera is provided in the card unit 750. When the camera senses a person approaching the card unit 750 other than the player playing the game, You may make it erase | eliminate the display of the number of remaining degrees or the number of balls. According to this, since an unauthorized person cannot immediately grasp the remaining number and the number of balls, it leads to theft prevention. Here, it is more preferable to display an alert instead of erasing the display of the remaining number and the number of balls.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in S208 of FIG. 40, an example in which a member card or a visitor card is returned when a confirmation operation (operation of a confirmation button) is accepted once has been described. If the operation is received a plurality of times, the member card or the visitor card may be returned.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, an example in which a membership card or a visitor card is returned when a confirmation operation (operation of the confirmation button) is accepted after a return operation (operation of the return button 752) is accepted. However, not limited to this, the membership card or the visitor card may be returned when the return operation is received after receiving the confirmation operation. According to this, if the confirmation operation is not received, the ball rental is possible. Even if the user wants to press the button 751 and presses the return button 752 by mistake, the membership card or the visitor card is not returned. That is, the order of the return operation and the confirmation operation is not particularly limited.

  In the above embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 701 is not operated for a predetermined time with the membership card or visitor card inserted in the card unit 750 (for example, the player enters a break without returning the membership card or the visitor card). When the user leaves the seat), the user may enter a safe mode in which the operation of the return button 752 or the ball lending button 751 is restricted in order to prevent the theft of the membership card or the visitor card and the use of the remaining card amount. Specifically, the safe mode is started after the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is stopped, and the safe mode is entered when the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes). This predetermined time can be arbitrarily set. If the return button 752 is operated during the safe mode timing, the timing is temporarily stopped. If the confirmation button is operated before the time is up in S207 of FIG. 40, the membership card or the visitor card is returned. When the time is up without the confirmation button being operated, the temporarily stopped timing is resumed. In order to return from the safe mode, a remote control operation by a game clerk, input of a personal identification number, or the like is accepted.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 45, the present invention is provided corresponding to a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 701) and accepts a value (banknote, membership card or visitor card) owned by the player (in S101 and S102). YES) based on the received acceptance value (acceptance amount, remaining card amount), usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for a game in the corresponding gaming machine (S117, The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S108), and the use process (ball lending process) that uses the usable value (number of remaining times) that can be used by the usable process for the game in the corresponding gaming machine. Use processing means (the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S135), and a post-use residual value obtained by subtracting the use value provided for the use processing from the usable value And return processing means for returning process for returning an identifiable recording medium (control unit of the card unit 750 performs the process of S126), a device for a game having a (card unit 750).

  Then, in the gaming device according to the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the usable processing means provides a condition that the accepted value is less than a predetermined value (NO in S116) as the usable processing. As a condition, all available processing (S117) is performed in which all of the received value is used as the available value, and the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S116). A partial usable process (S118) with a part as the usable value is performed, and the return processing means performs the return process based on accepting a return operation (YES in S125), while Before accepting a return operation based on the fact that a part usable process has been performed, the remaining value at the time of reception that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value can be specified By performing the value accepted at returning process for returning the recording medium (S119), characterized in that to prevent the overuse of the value of the game.

  In addition, in the gaming device according to the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, a cumulative value specifying process for performing a cumulative value specifying process for enabling each player to specify a cumulative value that is a cumulative value of the use value. Means (the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S136), and the return processing means performs the return process based on accepting a return operation (YES in S125), while the value is Based on having been accepted (YES in S101), on condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (YES in S116 ′), a part or all of the accepted value is accepted without accepting a return operation. It is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game by performing a return process at the time of receiving a value for returning the identifiable recording medium (S119).

  The EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 stores a predetermined amount table shown in FIG. This predetermined amount table can be partially used in the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment for each player's age (in this example, 20's, 30's, 40's, 50's and 60 or more). Whether to perform return processing upon receipt of value in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment and the first predetermined amount to be compared with the received amount in order to determine whether or not to perform processing and return processing upon receipt of value A second predetermined amount to be compared with the accumulated amount to determine the value and a specific amount to be compared with the accumulated amount to determine whether or not to perform value reception prohibition processing described later in both embodiments are set and stored. ing.

  Here, the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount are set to different values for each player (in this example, for each player's age). A player who is easy to use too much (in this example, in his 20s and 60s or more) is set at a lower price than a player of other ages. According to this, for example, overuse of the value to the game can be prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easy to use too much.

  The predetermined value is an amount corresponding to a preset high denomination currency, specifically 5000 yen for players in their 20s and 60s, and for players of other ages. It is 10,000 yen. According to this, when accepting money of a high denomination, a partly usable process and a return process at the time of receiving a value are performed, so that it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Further, the EEPROM of the control unit of the card unit 750 also stores a display reference amount corresponding product table shown in FIG. In this display reference amount corresponding product table, for each display reference amount (10000 yen, 20000 yen, 30000 yen ... in this example) to be compared with the cumulative amount in order to determine whether or not to perform product notification processing described later, Genre products are set and stored.

  The card reader / writer is an example of a recording medium receiving means, and accepts a membership card or a visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 25a, and receives the card ID and the card remaining amount recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card. Read. The card reader / writer includes an IC chip R / W corresponding to an IC chip of a membership card or a visitor card that is the IC card. Then, as shown in FIG. 45, the card reader / writer adds and updates the received amount to the remaining card amount recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card when deposit is made (S117). When this is done, the ball lending usage amount is subtracted and updated from the remaining card amount (S135). When the member card or visitor card is returned from the card reader / writer (S126), the stock card, which is a visitor card stored in the card storage unit, is transported to the card reader / writer and becomes a reserved card (S127).

  The face image photographing camera is for photographing a player who plays a game with the pachinko gaming machine 701 corresponding to the card unit 750. Face data is extracted from the face image of the player imaged by the face image photographing camera by the image recognition processing of the control unit of the card unit 750.

  Next, the card management computer 500 is a computer provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the game hall. The card management computer 500 stores a card DB shown in FIG. In this card DB, for each card ID of each member card or visitor card, a card remaining amount and a return flag upon deposit are stored. If the deposit return flag is “1”, it indicates that the card is a member card or a visitor card returned in the value reception return process. The remaining card amount is not cleared even after the business day ends, but the return flag at the time of deposit is cleared to “0” after the business day ends.

  Next, the hall computer 540 is also a computer provided at a predetermined location (for example, a management office) in the game hall. The hall computer 540 stores a player DB shown in FIG. In this player DB, for each face data extracted from the player's face image captured by the face image capturing camera (that is, for each player), the player's age determined based on the face data, The accumulated amount obtained by accumulating the amount used by the player for the game is stored. Note that the stored content of the player DB is cleared after the business day ends.

  Next, the settlement apparatus 580 is provided at a predetermined location in the amusement hall (for example, in the vicinity of a prize exchange counter, etc.). And when the card balance stored in the card DB in association with the card ID is received from the card management computer 500, the received card balance and the card balance recorded on the member card or visitor card Are matched, an error process is performed if they do not match, and a settlement process for paying out the remaining money of the card is performed if they match.

  In the checkout process, the deposit return flag stored in the card DB in association with the card ID of the accepted member card or visitor card is also received from the card management computer 500, and the received return flag received Is “1”, that is, if the received member card or visitor card is the first card returned in the return process at the time of value reception, a notification prompting the reception of the second card returned in the normal return process May be performed. According to this, since the payment of the second card is not forgotten, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the operation of the card unit 750 (that is, the process performed by the control unit of the card unit 750) which is a gaming apparatus according to the present invention will be described. Here, the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described first, and then only the differences of the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment from the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described. explain.

  First, the card unit 750 waits for reception of banknotes (S101) or reception of a membership card or visitor card (S102). If a bill is accepted in S101 (YES), the accepted bill is identified (S111), and if it is identification NG, the bill is returned, while if identification is OK, player identification processing is performed (S112). In this player identification process, a player is imaged by a face image capturing camera, face data is extracted from the captured player's face image by image recognition processing, and the extracted face data is sent to the hall computer 540. Send.

  The hall computer 540 that has received the face data determines whether or not the face data is registered in the player DB. If registered, the age and the total amount corresponding to the face data are stored in the card unit 750. If not registered, the player's age is specified based on the face data, the specified age is stored in association with the face data, and the age corresponding to the face data is stored. The accumulated amount (here, zero) is returned to the card unit 750.

  Next, the card unit 750 specifies the predetermined amount (here, the first predetermined amount) and the specific amount stored in the predetermined amount table in association with the age received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112. Then, it is determined whether or not the accumulated amount received from the hall computer 540 is equal to or greater than the specified specific amount (S114). If it is determined in S114 that the accumulated amount is less than the specific amount (NO), the accepted banknote is returned (S115), and the process is terminated.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S115 performs a value reception prohibition process (in this case, a process of returning the banknote in S115) for prohibiting the reception of the value on the condition that the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value. It functions as a value reception prohibition processing means for performing. According to this, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the specific value, the acceptance of the value is prohibited, so that overuse of the value for the game can be prevented.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S114 that the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the specified amount (YES), it is determined whether or not the received amount is equal to or greater than the specified predetermined amount (S116). If it is determined in S116 that the received amount is less than the predetermined amount (NO), the received amount is stored in the remaining number, and the received amount is recorded on the reservation card, and the process proceeds to S122. On the other hand, if it is determined in S116 that the accepted amount is equal to or larger than the predetermined amount (YES), the half of the accepted amount is stored in the remaining frequency (S118), and the half of the accepted amount is recorded on the reservation card and returned. (S119), the process proceeds to S120.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processing of S117 and S118, based on receiving the value (banknote) owned by the player, the received reception value (acceptance amount) in the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as a usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for a game, and as the usable processing, the acceptance value is provided on condition that the acceptance value is less than a predetermined value. All usable processes (S117) to make all of the received values usable, and on the condition that the received value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part (half price here) of the received value is used as the usable value. The partially usable process (S118) is performed.

  Further, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S119 does not accept the return operation based on the fact that the partially usable process has been performed, and does not regard the usable value among the accepted values. It functions as a return processing means for performing return processing at the time of value reception (S119) for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception (here, half of the received amount).

  According to this, if the reception value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part of the reception value is subjected to a partially usable process and the usable value is not included in the reception value. Since the return processing at the time of receiving a value for returning a recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception is performed, it is necessary to receive the recording medium in order to use the remaining value at the time of reception for a game (that is, one-hour work) Therefore, overuse of value for games can be prevented. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 performs card management of a return notification at the time of deposit including the card ID of the member card or visitor card returned in S119 and the card remaining amount recorded in the member card or visitor card (here, half of the accepted amount). It is transmitted to the computer 500 (S120), one of the membership card or visitor card stored in the card storage unit is transported to the card reader / writer and reserved, and the usable value (here, the received amount) for the reserved card (Half price) is recorded (S121), and the process proceeds to S122.

  Here, the card management computer 500 that has received the deposit return notification in S120 associates the remaining amount of the card included in the received deposit return notification with the card ID included in the received deposit return notification in the card DB. And a deposit return flag “1”. The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S120 functions as a return processing unit that performs a value reception return specifying process that can specify that the recording medium is returned in the value reception return process (S119). is there.

  If the member card or visitor card is received in S102 (YES), the member card or visitor card (retained card) reserved by the card reader / writer is stored in the card storage unit (S103), and the received member is received. The card ID and card remaining amount of the card or visitor card are read (S104), and collation processing is performed (S105).

  In this verification process, the read card ID is transmitted to the card management computer 500, and the remaining card amount and the deposit return flag stored in the card DB in association with the card ID are received from the card management computer 500. Then, it is determined whether or not the received card remaining amount matches the read card remaining amount. If they do not match, error processing is performed, and if they match, the process proceeds to S105.

  Next, the card unit 750 determines whether or not the deposit return flag received in the verification processing in S105 is “1”, that is, the received membership card or visitor card is returned in the value reception return processing. It is determined whether or not there is (S106). If it is determined in S106 that the return flag at the time of deposit is “0” (NO), that is, the received member card or visitor card is not returned in the return process at the time of value reception, the card remaining amount read Is stored in the remaining frequency (S108), and the process proceeds to S122.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the processing of S108 receives the value (member card or visitor card) possessed by the player and uses the received reception value (card balance) as the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as usable processing means for performing usable processing (remaining frequency storage processing) that can be used for games in the game.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S106 that the return flag at the time of deposit is 1 (YES), that is, the received member card or visitor card is returned by the return process at the time of value reception, an alert notification (for example, "Do you use too much?" Shown in D0 is displayed on the display 7123 (S107), and the process proceeds to S108.

  The control unit and the display 7123 of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S107 are based on receiving the recording medium that has been returned in the value reception return process (S119) and that has undergone the value reception return specifying process (S120). Thus, it functions as a caution alerting means for performing alerting. According to this, since the alert for calling attention is performed when the recording medium returned in the return processing at the time of receiving the value is received, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 waits for operation of the ball lending button 751 (S122), reception of banknotes (S123), reception of a membership card or visitor card (S124), or operation of the return button 752 (S125). If there is an operation of the ball lending button 751 in S122 (YES), it is determined whether or not a predetermined confirmation condition is satisfied (S131). Here, the confirmation condition is, for example, “the accumulated value is a certain value or more”. Specifically, the accumulated amount received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112 is displayed in the display reference amount corresponding product table. One of the stored display reference amounts has been reached.

  If it is determined in S131 that the confirmation condition is satisfied (YES), as shown in D2, the accumulated amount is stored in the display reference amount corresponding product table in association with the reached display reference amount. The displayed product and a confirmation button are displayed on the display 7123 (S132), and the process proceeds to S133.

  Here, the control unit and display 7123 of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S132 displays the accumulated value on the condition that the confirmation condition (here, the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value) is satisfied. It functions as a means. According to this, by letting the player grasp the accumulated value, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  Further, the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S132 and the display 7123 function as a product notification unit that notifies the product corresponding to the accumulated value. According to this, since the commodity purchased with the value used in the game is notified, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  Next, the card unit 750 switches the display of D2 and the display of D2 ′ that displays “Please press the confirmation button” and the confirmation button at predetermined intervals (for example, every 3 seconds), and operates the confirmation button. (S133), and if there is a confirmation button operation (YES), the display of D2 and D2 ′ is erased and the ball lending process is performed (S135). The ball lending process is also performed when it is determined in S131 that the confirmation condition is not satisfied (NO) (S135). This ball lending process has been described in the third embodiment.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S135 causes the usable value (remaining frequency) made available by the usable process (S117, S118, S108) to be used for the game in the corresponding gaming machine. It functions as a usage processing means for performing usage processing. Here, the usage processing is performed based on accepting the usage operation (operation of the ball lending button 751) (YES in S122), and the accumulated value is constant. Based on the fact that the use operation is accepted on the condition that it is equal to or greater than the value (YES in S131), and a specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) different from the use operation is further accepted (YES in S133), Use processing is performed. According to this, if the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value, the number of operations for performing the use process increases, so that excessive use of the value for the game can be prevented.

  Next, the card unit 750 transmits a ball lending usage amount notification including the ball lending usage amount used for the ball lending processing and the card ID of the reservation card to the card management computer 500, and the ball lending usage amount. A ball lending usage amount notification including face data is transmitted to the hall computer 540 (S136), and it is determined whether the remaining frequency after the ball lending process is zero (S137). ) Return to S122, and if it is zero (YES), the process is terminated.

  The card management computer 500 that has received the notice of the amount used for the ball loan subtracts the amount used for the ball loan included in the notification from the remaining amount of the card stored in the card DB in association with the card ID included in the notification. The hall computer 540 that has received the ball lending usage amount notification adds the ball lending usage amount included in the notification to the accumulated amount stored in the player DB in association with the face data included in the notification.

  The control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S136 functions as a cumulative value specifying processing unit that performs a cumulative value specifying process for enabling each player to specify a cumulative value that is a cumulative value of use. . According to this, various processes based on the accumulated value can be performed.

  If a bill is accepted in S123 (YES), the process proceeds to S111. If a membership card or a visitor card is received in S124 (YES), the process proceeds to S103. If the return button 752 is operated in S125 (YES), the membership card or visitor card retained by the card reader / writer is returned (S126), and the membership card or visitor card stored in the card storage unit is returned. One sheet is conveyed to the card reader / writer and reserved, and the process is terminated.

  Next, a difference between the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment and the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the first predetermined amount is specified in S113 of FIG. 45, but in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the second predetermined amount in S113. Is identified. Specifically, the predetermined amount (here, the second predetermined amount) stored in the predetermined amount table and the specific amount are specified in association with the age received from the hall computer 540 in the player identification process of S112.

  In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, it is determined in S116 of FIG. 45 whether or not the received amount is equal to or larger than the first predetermined amount. In the embodiment, in S116 ′ instead of S116, it is determined whether or not the accumulated amount is greater than or equal to the second predetermined value. If the accumulated amount is less than the second predetermined value (NO), the process proceeds to S117, and the accumulated amount is determined. Is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES), the process proceeds to S118, and a return process upon receipt of value is performed in S119. In this example, in the return process at the time of value reception, half of the received amount is recorded and returned on the reservation card, but the entire received amount may be recorded on the reservation card and returned.

  That is, based on the fact that the control unit of the card unit 750 that performs the process of S119 in the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment has accepted the value (YES in S101), the accumulated value is equal to or greater than the predetermined value. It functions as a return processing means for performing return processing at the time of value reception for returning a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the received value without receiving a return operation on the condition (YES in S116 ′). Is.

  According to this, when the value is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the value is received for returning a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the accepted value. When the return process is performed, in order to use the returned value for the game, it is necessary to accept the recording medium (that is, the time and effort is increased). Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

Finally, a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second to fourth embodiments, the example in which the currency is a banknote has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the currency may be a coin or both a banknote and a coin. . In addition, it is not limited to accepting deposits of money that is tangible, but it is not limited to money that is intangible (for example, money data equivalent to the amount of money such as electronic money, balance of deposit account specified from debit card record information, or credit You may make it accept the payment of the credit amount etc. which are specified from the record information of a card | curd in contact or non-contact. Further, the gaming apparatus (card unit 750) may be one that cannot accept money (that is, cannot deposit money).

  In the first to fourth embodiments, the money (banknote) received by the money receiving means (banknote identification machine 24) is discharged to the outside of the gaming apparatus (card unit 750) and is transported by the banknote transport mechanism. Alternatively, the accepted money may be stored inside the gaming device.

  In the above first to fourth embodiments, the example in which the member card or the visitor card is an IC card that records information using a non-contact type IC chip has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The visitor card may record information using a contact IC chip, a magnetic stripe, a two-dimensional code (for example, a bar code), a three-dimensional code, or optical interference (for example, a hologram). Further, these shapes are not limited to the card type, and may be a coin type. Further, the game recording medium may be a mobile phone or the like mounted with an IC chip, instead of a membership card or a visitor card.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the recording medium is a membership card or a visitor card has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the recording medium is information that can specify the number of acquired game media (the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls). May be a possession card or a membership card. That is, the recording medium may be any recording medium on which information capable of specifying the value owned by the player is recorded.

  If the recording medium is a possession card, the number of possessions is managed by the possession management device in association with the card ID of the possession card, and when the card unit 750 receives the possession card, In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the card ID of the possession card is transmitted to the possession management device, and the number of possessions managed in association with the card ID is received. If the amount equivalent to the received number of balls is equal to or more than the first predetermined amount (YES in S116), half of the number of balls is stored as the number of available balls (S118), The possession card that can specify half of the number is returned (S119).

  According to this, if the received value (the number of possessed balls) is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a partly usable process is performed in which a part of the received value (in this example, half of the number of retained balls) is an available value. As a result of the return processing at the time of receiving the value to return the recording medium that can specify the remaining value at the time of reception (in this example, half of the number of possessions) that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value In order to use the remaining value at the time of reception in the game, it is necessary to receive the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value in the game.

  In the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment, if the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES in S116 '), the processes in S118 and S119 are performed. According to this, when the value (mochitama card) is accepted, if the accumulated value, which is the accumulated value of use, is greater than or equal to the predetermined value, it is possible to specify a part or all of the received value (the number of coins). By performing return processing at the time of receiving a value for returning the recording medium, it is necessary to receive the recording medium in order to use the returned value for the game, so that excessive use of the value for the game is prevented. it can.

  When the recording medium is a member card, the number of stored balls is managed by the stored ball management device in association with the member ID recorded on the member card. When the card unit 750 receives the member card, The member ID of the membership card is transmitted to the storage management device, and the number of storages managed in association with the member ID is received. In the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment, the received If the amount corresponding to the number of stored balls is equal to or greater than the first predetermined amount (YES in S116), half of the number of stored balls is stored as the number of usable stored balls (S118), and the member capable of specifying half of the number of stored balls can be specified. The card is returned (S119).

  According to this, if the received value (the number of stored balls) is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a part of the received value (a half of the number of stored balls in this example) is used as a usable value. At the time of reception, the return processing at the time of receiving the value for returning the recording medium that can identify the remaining value at the time of reception (in this example, half of the number of stored balls) that was not regarded as the usable value of the received value is performed. In order to use the remaining value for the game, it is necessary to accept the recording medium, so that it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  In the second embodiment, if the accumulated amount is equal to or greater than the second predetermined value (YES in S116 '), the processes of S118 and S119 are performed. According to this, when the value (member card) is accepted, if the accumulated value that is the accumulated value of use is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, a recording medium that can specify a part or all of the received value (the number of stored balls) Since the return process at the time of receiving the value for returning the game requires the reception of the recording medium in order to use the returned value for the game, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game.

  In the above second to fourth embodiments, as shown in FIG. 35, an example in which the remaining frequency display portion 753, the ball lending button 751, and the return button 752 are provided in the pachinko gaming machine 701 has been described. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and some or all of these may be provided in the card unit 750.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount are set for each player's age in the predetermined amount table of FIG. 41 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first predetermined amount, the second predetermined amount, and the specific amount may be uniform regardless of the player's age, and conversely, different values are set for each player. May be. According to this, for example, overuse of value to a game can be more effectively prevented for a low-income person or a player who is easy to use too much.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the age and the accumulated amount are stored in association with the player's face data in the player DB of FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the player's face data, the card is stored in association with information that can individually identify the player, such as the card ID of a member card or visitor card, or the member ID of a member card. There may be.

  In the above embodiment, it is determined in S106 of FIG. 45 that the return flag at the time of deposit is “1”, that is, the accepted membership card or visitor card is returned in the value reception return process (S119). And the example where alerting alerting | reporting is performed by S107 was demonstrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where it is determined that the return flag at the time of deposit is “0”, that is, the accepted membership card or visitor card is returned by the normal return process (S126). You may perform alerting alerting | reporting.

  In the above embodiment, when it is determined in S116 of FIG. 45 that the received amount is greater than or equal to the first predetermined amount, and when it is determined in S116 ′ that the accumulated amount is greater than or equal to the second predetermined amount, in S119 Although the example in which the return process at the time of receiving a value is described has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the return process at the time of receiving a value may be always performed without performing the determination of S116 or S116 ′. According to this, since the return process at the time of receiving the value is always performed, in order to use the returned value for the game, it is necessary to receive a recording medium (that is, increase in labor). Prevent overuse of value. Further, since there is an opportunity to settle the value of the returned recording medium with the settlement apparatus 580, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value for the game.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in S118 of FIG. 45, the example in which half of the received amount is stored in the remaining frequency in the partially usable process has been described. However, the amount is not limited to half of the accepted amount, and any portion of the accepted amount may be stored in the remaining frequency. That is, the usable processing means may be a part that performs a partly usable process that uses a part of the received value as a usable value on condition that the received value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value.

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the confirmation condition shown in S131 of FIG. 45 is “the accumulated value is equal to or greater than a certain value” has been described. However, the confirmation condition is not limited to this, and it may be “a game time is a certain time or more” or “a predetermined time has elapsed during the game”.

  Here, when the confirmation condition is “the time during which the game is played is a certain time or more”, for example, in the player DB of the hall computer 540, the time during which the game is played in association with the face data Is stored, and if the time during which the game is played is equal to or longer than a certain time (for example, 2 hours), the process of S132 is performed assuming that the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  When the confirmation condition is “a predetermined time has elapsed during the game”, for example, in the player DB of the hall computer 540, the time when the game is started is stored in association with the face data, Every time a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) elapses from the stored time, the process of S132 is performed assuming that the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  According to this, by letting the player grasp the accumulated value, it is possible to prevent overuse of the value to the game.

  The use operation (operation of the ball lending button 751) is accepted on the condition that the playing time is a certain time or more, or a predetermined time has elapsed during the game, and the use operation is Based on the fact that a different specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) is further accepted (YES in S133), the use process (ball lending process in S135) is performed. According to this, if the time during which the game is played exceeds a certain time, or if a predetermined time has elapsed during the game, the number of operations for performing the use processing increases, so that excessive use of the value for the game can be prevented. .

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which the specific operation (operation of the confirmation button) is received in S133 to perform the ball lending process on condition that the confirmation condition shown in S131 of FIG. 45 is satisfied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a specific operation may always be accepted in order to perform the ball lending process regardless of whether the confirmation condition is satisfied. According to this, since it takes one more time to perform the ball lending process, it is possible to prevent excessive use of the value for the game. It is also effective to make the user aware of overuse by displaying the accumulated amount on the display 7123 at that time.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the specific operation is the operation of the confirmation button indicated by D2 or D2 ′ in FIG. 45 has been described. However, the confirmation button is not limited to that displayed on the touch panel display 7123, and may be an independent button provided at a predetermined location of the card unit 750. The specific operation may be a re-operation of the return button 752. That is, the specific operation may be a specific operation different from the use operation.

  As described above, the object of the present invention is to prevent overuse of value in games, but the prevention of overuse can also be achieved by the following method.

  When the cumulative amount reaches a certain amount, the error goes down. According to this, since a player can be calmed down by taking a certain period of time until error handling, overuse can be prevented.

  After accepting bills of high denomination (5000 yen, 10,000 yen), display the desired amount of use below the set amount (for example, 5000 yen) and make it available up to the selected amount. The lending button 751 is invalidated. According to this, overuse can be prevented by having the player decide the desired amount of money at the time of payment.

  For each player, the number of deposits of each denomination is managed, and when a player who has received a denomination of a denomination inserts a banknote of that denomination, the banknote is returned. According to this, overuse can be prevented by limiting the number of times of deposit.

  Each time a bill is inserted, a confirmation operation (for example, an operation of a deposit button displayed on the display 7123) is accepted. According to this, excessive use can be prevented by adding one effort to the deposit. It is also effective to make the user aware of overuse by displaying the accumulated amount on the display 7123 at that time.

  The game time from insertion of the membership card or visitor card to return is displayed on the display 7123. According to this, the display of the game time and making the player aware of the game can prevent the sinking.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the second to fourth embodiments, a case has been described in which the invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine 701 that is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball. In the fifth embodiment, the invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses a game ball and gives a score in response to detection of a winning ball.

  Specifically, the gaming machine of the above embodiment is a gaming machine in which a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the game ball or rental ball that the player has paid out is launched into the game area. However, the game score for use in the game is given using the frequency that is the game value of the size specified by the record information of the game recording medium such as the membership card or the visitor card, and is given. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by hitting a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a gaming score given by winning a game score or winning a game. .

  In other words, after the game medium (game ball) passes through the start area, based on the establishment of the start condition that allows the start of the variable display, a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified are displayed in a variable manner and a display result is derived. A game machine that includes a variable display device for displaying, and when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, the game machine shifts to a specific game state that is advantageous to a player. A game ball encapsulated in the gaming machine is used to play the game area, and the game score is subtracted in response to the game ball being driven, and the game ball wins the winning area provided in the game area. Accordingly, the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine that adds game scores accordingly. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing an outline of authentication of the enclosed game machine in the fifth embodiment. Referring to FIG. 46, in such an enclosed game machine, a mechanism for authenticating whether the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 have been illegally modified is defined.

  In this mechanism, the authentication / communication control circuit 7311 of the main board 731 of the pachinko gaming machine 701 is connected to the authentication / communication control circuit 7371 of the payout control board 737, the interface board 766, and the control unit 7510 of the card unit 750. The authentication / communication control circuit 7501 and the hall server 590 are communicably connected to the key management server 600. Further, devices on the way between the main board 731 and the key management server 600 are also communicably connected to the key management server 600.

  These devices can authenticate whether these devices have been tampered with by exchanging authentication information with the key management server 600. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the security of the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 701 can give a predetermined game point when a winning occurs and can play a game using the game point. Based on the reception of the operation of the ball lending button 751 by the card unit 750, information that can specify the game points to be added using at least a part of the accepted money is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The The card unit 750 receives information from the pachinko gaming machine 701 that can identify the game points stored in the pachinko gaming machine 701 based on the reception of the counting operation at each counter 705. For this reason, it is possible to deal with a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 701 in which a predetermined game point is given by the occurrence of a winning and a game using the game point is possible.

  Next, in a game hall where a plurality of gaming machines are installed, a hall control 900 is provided separately from the hall server 801 in order to manage the appearance of each gaming machine. FIG. 47 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of the hall server 801 and hall controller 900 connected to the P platform 701 and the CU 750.

  The data output format of the P stand 701 differs depending on the gaming machine manufacturer. Therefore, the CU 750 calculates (converts) the output data of various formats into a predetermined format and outputs the data to the hall control 900 via the terminal device 901. Setting data for the calculation (conversion) is input to the CU control unit 323 and stored therein.

  Further, the data reception format of the hall control 900 differs depending on the hall control manufacturer. Therefore, the hall control 900 shown in FIG. 47 is connected to the CU 750 via the stand terminal device 901. The terminal device 901 converts the format of the output data from the CU 750 into a format that matches various Hallcons 900 and transmits the format to the Hallcons 900. Note that the number control of the P stand 701 by the hall control 900 is set in the hall control 900 in association with the stand terminal device 901. Specifically, the hall control 900 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and an EEPROM, and the CPU uses the unit number of the P unit 701 and the unit terminal device as unit number management data in accordance with the operation of the capacity or the like. The number 901 is associated with and stored in the EEPROM. Serial communication is performed between the P base 701 and the CU 750, and parallel communication output from a plurality of output pins of the CU 750 is performed between the CU 750 and the base terminal apparatus 901. Serial communication is performed between the two. However, it is not necessary to interpose the base terminal device 901 by providing the CU 750 or the hall control 900 with a function of converting to a format that matches various hall control 900s.

  Next, a configuration in which the hall control 900 is directly connected to the hall server 801 will be described. FIG. 48 is a block diagram for explaining another configuration of the hall server 801 and hall controller 900 connected to the P platform 701 and the CU 750.

  The hall control 900 is directly connected to the hall server 801 so that the CU 750 can transmit information managed by the hall controller to the hall control 900 via the hall server 801. A plurality of CUs 750 are connected to the hall server 801, and the hall server 801 collects output signals from the plurality of CUs 750 and transmits them to the hall control 900. In this case, the hall server 801 is responsible for the function of the terminal device 901 that converts to a format that matches the various hallcons 900 and transmits the format to the hallcon 900. Note that the CU 750 may be responsible for all the functions of the terminal device 901 that converts the data into a predetermined format and transmits it to the hall control 900, and also shares the roles such as which information is to be converted between the hall server 801 and the CU 750. You may control to. Furthermore, when the hall server 801 collects output signals from a plurality of CUs 750 and transmits them to the hall control 900, the contents of the information to be sent may be sent as information. For example, when the hall server 801 periodically transmits signals received from a plurality of CUs 750 to the hall control 900 (for example, every 10 seconds), the information of all the CUs 750 received during the 10 seconds is collectively hall. Send to Con 900.

  The hall server 801 must be connected to the CU 750 for managing the holding balls and the stored balls. As shown in FIG. 48, the hall server 801 collectively transmits the information from the plurality of CUs 750 to the hall control 900. In this case, existing wirings from the plurality of CUs 750 to the hall server 801 can be used effectively, and it is sufficient to newly install only the wiring connecting the hall server 801 and the hall control 900, and the number of wirings can be reduced. . In addition, when game information from each gaming machine is collectively output to the hall control 900 by, for example, the island terminal device, it is necessary to collect the gaming information for each island where the gaming machine is installed. However, in the case of FIG. 48, it is not necessary to collect each gaming machine installation island, and there is no restriction on the installation layout of gaming machines. Furthermore, there are no restrictions on the layout of the gaming machine island.

  47 and 48, the machine number may be managed by the hall control 900 in association with the holder ID that is the ID stored in the mounting frame (holder) for mounting and installing the CU 750. Even if the CU 750 is replaced with a new one, the mounting frame (holder) is not replaced, and the previous mounting frame (holder) is continuously used. When managing the unit number with the hall control 900 in association with the holder ID, when the P unit 701 of a new unit number is exchanged, the CU 750 has the unit number of the P unit 701 and the mounting frame (holder). The holder ID is read and transmitted to the hall control 900 (in the case of FIG. 48, it is transmitted to the hall control 900 via the hall server 801). Receiving this, the CPU of the hall control 900 sets and stores the unit number of the P unit 701 and the holder ID in the EEPROM in association with each other. Note that a staff member may manually enter the machine number and holder ID of the P machine 701 into the hall control 900. The hall server 801 has a CPU, ROM, RAM, and an input / output interface, and receives information transmitted from the CU 750 through the input / output interface. In the case of FIG. 48, the received information is output from the input / output interface and transmitted to the hall control 900 under the control of the CPU.

  Another management method may be as follows. 47, ID data such as the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID of the P stand 701 is transmitted to the key management server 800 via the CU 750 and the hall server 801. Also, when the board is replaced and replaced with a new main control board, ID data such as the main control chip ID of the P stand 701 is transmitted to the key management server 800 via the CU 750 and the hall server 801. Therefore, the hall server 801 can acquire the main control chip ID and transmit it to the hall control 900 during the transmission to the key management server 800.

  Therefore, in the system shown in FIG. 48, the hall server 801 sends the transmitted main control chip ID to the hall control 900, and the hall console 900 manages the gaming machine stand number based on the main control chip ID data. When replacing the base (board replacement), for example, the ID data such as the main control chip ID after the base replacement (panel replacement) and the ID data such as the main control chip ID before the base replacement (panel replacement) are obtained. The CU 750 transmits to the hall control 900, and the CPU of the hall control 900 updates the ID data stored in the EEPROM in association with the gaming machine stand number to the ID data after the stand exchange (board exchange). Similarly, in the system of FIG. 47, the CU 750 also transmits ID data such as the main control chip ID of the P base 701 to the hall control 900, and the hall control 900 performs management of the serial number using the ID data. You may do it. Specifically, in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the CPU of the hall control 900 receives the main control chip ID and the security board ID data sent from the P base 701, and associates the P data with the ID data. The unit number 701 is set and stored in the EEPROM of the hall control 900 to manage the unit number.

  Further, in the system shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the hall control 900 stores the management data of the gaming machine number that stores the model of the gaming machine in association with the gaming machine number, and based on the management data Control may be performed so that card units corresponding to gaming machines of the same model are indexed, and setting data for calculating (converting) into a predetermined format is downloaded to the batch CU 750 and set collectively.

  In the system shown in FIG. 48, since the terminal device 901 is not interposed between the CU 750 and the hall control 900, the format of the output data from the CU 750 is converted into a format that matches the hall control 900. Send to Hallcon 900. Note that if the standards by Hallcon manufacturers are unified, format conversion in the Hall server 801 becomes unnecessary.

  The number control of the P base 701 by the hall control 900 is set in the hall control 900 in association with the holder ID stored in the holder of the CU 750, or the main control chip ID and security board sent from the P base 701 The machine number may be managed by the ID or the like. Based on the unit number management data, the batch setting data may be downloaded to the CU 750 group corresponding to the P unit 701 of the same model via the hall server 801 and set collectively.

  As described above, when the P board 701 game board is exchanged (board exchange), the main control chip ID of the main control board provided in the new game board 26 is transmitted to the CU 750, the hall server 801, and the key management server 800. Is done. Therefore, by managing the unit number of the new unit based on the main control chip ID, the hall controller 900 confirms whether or not the setting of the unit number of the new unit has been changed based on the main control chip ID. In case of forgetting, it is possible to prevent forgetting to set by notifying.

  Next, processing for transmitting data from the CU 750 to the hall control 900 will be described. The P stand 701 has a counting function for adding the game points used in the game by deducting the remaining card amount received by the CU 750 and converting the acquired game points into points. Details of the sequence of these processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 61. Here, a process of transmitting the number of added balls when the game balls are added on the P stand 701 to the hall control 900 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart for explaining the transmission process of the number of added balls by the CU control unit 323. Note that the processing according to the flowchart can be applied to any of the systems shown in FIGS.

  Of the data transmitted from the CU 750 to the hall control 900, the number of balls to be added by the CU control unit 323 will be described. First, the CU control unit 323 receives information on the number of added balls from the P stand 701 (step S351).

  The CU control unit 323 converts the received number of added balls into a predetermined format (for example, converts 10 added balls into a one-pulse signal), and transmits it (step S352).

  The information received in S351 may be the number of fired balls in addition to or instead of the number of added balls. Furthermore, as another example of the information received in S351, a: the number of symbol determinations when the variable display device is variably stopped, and b: the number of times a ball is awarded to various winning openings.

  Further, the method of converting the received number of added balls into a predetermined format and outputting the same is not limited to the conversion of the above-described ten pieces into a one-pulse signal. For example, an output method may be employed in which which type of signal is assigned to which output pin, the output length of the signal, and further, a plurality of types of signals are combined into one output pin and converted into an output.

  Further, in the case of the symbol determination number of a described above, control is performed so that one pulse is output when the symbol is determined a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). If (for example, 10 balls) wins, it may be controlled to output one pulse.

  As described above, various types of information can be considered as information to be converted into a predetermined format in S352. When such information reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), the CU 750 cumulatively adds information periodically sent from the P stand 701, and when the added value reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Outputs 1 pulse and clears the cumulative addition value until then, and starts the cumulative addition of the next information. In this “clearing the cumulative addition value”, a predetermined number (for example, 10) may be subtracted from the cumulative addition value. Since this “one pulse” signal is a serial signal, it is output as data in which a specific bit indicating that the transmission information (for example, the number of added balls) is a predetermined number (for example, 10) is “1”. .

  Next, game information processing by the CU control unit 323 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart for explaining game information processing by the CU control unit 323. Note that the processing according to the flowchart can be applied to any of the systems shown in FIGS.

  First, the CU control unit 323 determines whether or not there is an input with respect to an output method of game information output from the CU 750, that is, setting data for calculating (converting) the game information into a predetermined format (step S361). ). When the CU control unit 323 determines that there is an input regarding the output method from setting means such as a remote controller (step S361: YES), based on the input output method, the bit position and output period for the game information output from the CU 750 The output method such as output presence / absence and information conversion is set (step S362). On the other hand, when the CU control unit 323 determines that there is no input for the output method (step S361: NO), the process of step S362 is skipped and the previously set output method is used.

  The output method set in step S362 is for converting gaming machine information in a data output format that differs depending on the gaming machine manufacturer into a data reception format that differs depending on the hall controller manufacturer, and outputting the data to the hall controller 900. .

  It should be noted that instead of the output method input using the remote controller described above, the output method data may be downloaded from the hall control 900 and stored in the CU control unit 323. Furthermore, output method data may be downloaded from the server of the manufacturer of the P platform 701 connected to the CU 750 and stored in the CU control unit 323. As a download path in this case, it is conceivable to download output method data from the manufacturer's server to the CU control unit 323 via the key management server 800 and the hall server 801. When downloading the data of the output method from the server of the manufacturer of the P stand 701, the game information that the person who designed and manufactured the P stand 701 intends to output to the hall control 900 can be set in the CU 750 as intended. There is an advantage that it is not necessary to set on the game hall side.

  The CU control unit 323 determines whether or not game information (for example, game table states 2 and 3) has been received from the P table 701 (step S363). When the CU control unit 323 determines that no game information is received from the P stand 701 (step S363: NO), the process ends. On the other hand, when the CU control unit 323 determines that the game information has been received from the P stand 701 (step S363: YES), the CU control unit 323 converts the received game information into the set output method (step S364). Here, since the CU control unit 323 converts the gaming information into a format that matches the hall control 900 by the set output method, the gaming machine information of the data output format that differs depending on the gaming machine manufacturer is changed to the data that differs depending on the hall control manufacturer. It can be converted into a reception format and output to the hall control 900.

  After converting the game information, the CU control unit 323 outputs the converted game information for transmission to the hall control 900 (step S365). The CU control unit 323 determines whether information to be displayed on the display 312 is included in the game information received from the P table 701 (step S366).

  When the CU control unit 323 determines that information to be displayed on the display is included (step S366: YES), the CU control unit 323 performs control to display game information on the display (step S367). On the other hand, if the CU control unit 323 determines that the information to be displayed on the display is not included (step S366: NO), the process ends.

  Note that the card unit 750 is connected to the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the hall computer 540 so as to be communicable, and converts the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 to the hall computer 540 and transmits the external output. A terminal (not shown) may be provided. For this reason, even if the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 is not information for the conventional hall computer 540, the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 is converted and transmitted to the conventional hall computer 540. Hall computer 540 can be used.

  Further, the card unit 750 replaces the information generated by the pachinko gaming machine 701 with the external output terminal for converting and transmitting the information to the hall computer 540, and converts it into the pachinko gaming machine 540. An external output terminal that relays the information generated in 701 may be provided.

  In such an enclosed game machine, when the detailed information screen as shown in FIG. 33 is displayed on the display of the card unit 750, even if an operation for replay is performed, The processing for adding the counted number of balls to the number of balls is not performed even if the operation for adding the counted number of balls to the number of balls is performed. On the other hand, the ball lending process according to the operation for ball lending is not prevented from being executed.

  Note that an operation for replaying may not be performed while the detailed information screen is displayed, or an operation for adding the number of counted balls to the number of possessed balls may not be performed.

[Modification]
Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) For example, in the above embodiment, a medal is applied as an example of a game medium, but a spherical pachinko ball (game ball) may be applied.

  (2) In the above embodiment, the pachinko parlor where the slot machine 1 or the pachinko machine is installed is illustrated as the game arcade where the medal lending machine 100 is installed, but the game arcade to which the present invention is applied. May be a game center or the like.

  (3) In the embodiment, the counted regular medals are discharged and collected from the discharge port to the game island. However, the regular medals are stored in the housing 101 in the same manner as the illegal medals. However, it may be collected as appropriate.

  (4) In the above embodiment, when medals are counted by the counting device 190, the control unit 181 adds 1 to the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 5A) (FIG. 22). When the unauthorized medal detection notification condition is satisfied, the control unit 181 subtracts the value of the accumulated unauthorized medals from the number of medals held in the card table (see FIG. 5A). However, other modes may be used. For example, when the counting device 190 counts medals, the control unit 181 suspends adding 1 to the number of medals and records it in the hold count value, and the illegal medal detection notification condition is not satisfied. The holding count value may be added to the number of medals.

  (5) In the embodiment, the authenticity of the medal counted by the counting device 190 is determined. However, when the payout device 182 pays out the medal, the authenticity of the medal is determined. The illegal medals may be stored in a storage unit in the payout device 182 to prevent the illegal medals from being paid out. Then, when the storage unit in the payout device 182 becomes full, and when a predetermined amount of medals are stored at the time of closing (end of business), the illegal medals in the storage unit in the payout device 182 are collected. You may make it perform the alerting | reporting to carry out. That is, the gaming device of the present invention includes a gaming device that includes one or both of a counting device that counts game media such as medals and a payout device (rental device) that pays out (lends) game media.

  (6) Also, in the above embodiment, at the end of the game hall business, the medal management computer 550 requests each medal lending machine 100 to execute a tightening related process (business closing process). When the request is received, when the number of medals in the medal storage box reaches a predetermined number (second storage amount), this is notified, but the predetermined number (second storage amount) The timing of notification when the game time has reached may be notified during business hours as well as when the game hall is closed, or the corresponding slot machine 1 is in a standby state (a state in which no game is being performed). You may make it alert | report at a certain time.

  (7) In the embodiment, the number of medals in the medal storage box reaches the second storage amount based on the reception of the tightening related process request for performing the request for executing the tightening related process (business closing process). However, the notification may be made based on the reception of a request other than the tightening-related processing request.

  Further, in the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of medals in the medal storage box has reached the second threshold value (second storage amount) in the tightening-related processing, and a notification is made when the second threshold value is reached. The timing for determining whether or not the second threshold value has been reached can be changed in various ways, and it is always determined whether or not the second threshold value has been reached. Whether or not it is determined that it has been reached when the game hall is closed (whether or not a predetermined flag is set). And if it is stored, notification may be performed.

  (8) In the embodiment, when the number of medals in the medal storage box reaches a first threshold value (first storage amount) that is a predetermined number that needs to be collected, the fact is notified. However, even when notification is not made, notification may be made after the end of business, for example, notification that the first threshold value has been reached in the tightening-related processing, for example. Good.

  (9) In the embodiment, when setting is performed on the illegal medal relation setting screen, “100 sheets” is set as the “full tank notification condition” as the first threshold (first storage amount), “50 sheets” is set in the “closing store notification condition” as the second threshold (second storage amount), and the first threshold and the second threshold are set as different numbers. The second threshold value may be set to be the same number.

  (10) In the embodiment, the medal lending machine 100 indicates that the medal storage amount of the medal storage box has reached the first threshold (first storage amount) or the second threshold (second storage amount). The state notification lamp 111 for notification is provided, but a speaker capable of outputting sound or a display device for notification using a predetermined image may be provided. Furthermore, if the medal lending machine 100 has a function capable of outputting to the external device (medal management computer 550, etc.) that the medal storage amount of the medal storage box has reached the first threshold value or the second threshold value, it is not always necessary. Even if it is not provided with such a notification means, it may be provided in the electrically connected external apparatus etc.

  (11) In the above embodiment, each medal lending machine 100 exemplifies a mode in which regular medals are registered individually, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these regular medals are registered. The medal image may be distributed from the medal management computer 550 to each medal lending machine 100 so that it can be registered at once, or a storage medium such as a flash memory in which the image of the regular medal is stored can be rented individually. It may be installed in the machine 100 for registration.

  (12) In the embodiment described above, the remaining amount of medals (the number of balls) is left in the medal lending machine 100 (card unit 750), and only the remaining prepaid amount is associated with the deposit amount corresponding card and discharged to the outside. It was made to be. As a result, when there are counted medals (game balls), it is possible to prevent a medal lending using a prepaid balance not used for medal lending out of accepted money from being erroneously performed. it can.

  Generally, the unit price of a game medium when a prepaid balance is used to lend a game medium such as a medal is higher than the unit price of a game medium when a medal is exchanged for a prize. For this reason, a player who uses a medal with a low unit price can play more games with less value than a player who uses a loaned medal with a high unit price. It is advantageous. Therefore, it is effective for a player to prevent the medal lending using the prepaid balance from being erroneously performed even though there are medals.

  (13) When a card return operation is performed, the card unit 750 may transmit a signal indicating that to the pachinko gaming machine 701. The pachinko gaming machine 701 may receive the signal and notify that the card has been ejected. In this way, even when the return button is accidentally touched, the fact that the card has been ejected is notified, so there is no need to forget to acquire the card and the card can be prevented from being stolen. . A signal indicating that the card return operation has been performed may be transmitted to the calling lamp 200 instead of the pachinko gaming machine 701 to notify the calling lamp 200 that the card has been ejected.

  (14) In the above-described embodiment, the membership card is a complete ID management system, and the visitor card is a system that records information on the card in addition to the complete ID system. The complete ID management method is a method in which only identification information such as a card ID is recorded on a card, and management of the remaining amount, holding balls, and storage balls is performed by a management computer in association with the identification information.

  However, it is not limited to this, the membership card and the visitor card are both complete ID management, both are stored in the card, both are used together, one is the complete ID management, the other is stored in the card, and either is used together It is possible to adopt various methods as a management method of the remaining amount, the holding ball, and the stored ball, such as the complete ID management on the other side, the combination on one side, and the other side being stored in the card.

  (15) The player's face may be imaged and stored when the deposit amount corresponding card is discharged in step Sh15 of the remaining amount withdrawal process of FIG. Then, in step Sk1 of the issue / payment process in FIG. 18, step Sm13 in the return process in FIG. 19, step Sp3 in the replay process in FIG. 21, step Sj11 in the post-card insertion process in FIG. In addition to determining whether or not the player is in a state, it is determined whether or not the player's face when the remaining amount is discharged matches the current player's face. If they match, the processing may proceed to the subsequent processing. As a result, in the case where the player does not have a matching face and does not have a deposit balance card, it is not necessary to proceed to the subsequent processing, so that unnecessary processing can be prevented from being executed.

  In particular, in the case of the post-card insertion process of FIG. 29, when the player leaves the deposit remaining amount correspondence card in a state where it is left from the card insertion slot, Even if the card is inserted by operating the “” button, the faces do not match, and therefore the processing for associating the number of medals in the medal lending machine 100 with the card is not performed, so the medal is stolen. I can't.

  (16) In the embodiment described above, in the remaining amount withdrawal process of FIG. 28, after the deposit remaining amount correspondence card is discharged in step Sh15, the possession medal correspondence card is issued in step Sh18. At this time, in the member card table or visitor card table shown in FIG. 7, the card ID of the remaining money corresponding card and the card ID of the possession medal compatible card may be associated with each other. Or you may make it memorize | store the flag which shows whether a corresponding deposit remaining amount corresponding | compatible card or a medal corresponding card | curd exists.

  That is, you may make it manage a payment remaining amount corresponding | compatible card and a corresponding medal corresponding card | curd correspondingly. This management may be performed by a management apparatus such as the card management computer 500, or may be performed by a gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100.

  Then, when the payment remaining amount corresponding card is accepted by the settlement apparatus 580, the card management computer 500 is inquired as to whether or not the flag is stored corresponding to the card ID when the prepaid balance is inquired. Only when there is a response indicating that there is a card with medals, the presence of a card with medals may be notified.

  This makes it possible to alert the player to exchange medals with the number of medals specified on the card with medals for prizes only when necessary when the balance specified with the card corresponding to the deposit is settled. . As a result, it is possible to prevent forgetting to exchange prizes without performing unnecessary notification.

  In addition, when a game device such as another medal lending machine 100 or a card unit 750 receives a card with a remaining deposit or a card with a corresponding medal, is there a corresponding card with a corresponding medal or a card with a remaining deposit? The card management computer 500 may be inquired of whether or not, and if there is a response indicating that it exists, the player may be notified of that fact.

  As a result, even when the player moves to another gaming machine, the presence of a corresponding medal-supported card or a deposit balance card can be notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the gaming medium from being lent by using the prepaid balance specified by the deposit remaining amount corresponding card even though there is a possessed medal specified by the possessed medal compatible card. In addition, when there is no longer a medal specified by the card corresponding to a medal, it is possible to notify the player that there is a prepaid balance specified by the card corresponding to the remaining payment amount, so that unnecessary payment can be prevented. it can.

  (17) In the above-described embodiment, the setting of functions for the membership card or the visitor card and the processing being executed are taken over only at the game hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be handed over to other amusement halls.

  (18) As a specific function described in step Sj20 of FIG. 29 described above, the gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 is configured to have the number of jackpots and the number of jackpot fluctuations on the display 123 and the call lamp 200 of the medal lending machine 100. A display screen custom function for customizing a display method (for example, display content, layout, etc.) of the game information may be provided. Although the index to be emphasized differs depending on the player, by providing the function, it is possible to display the game information according to the player's desire and improve the player's willingness to play. Further, the setting of the display method or the like in this function may be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Moreover, you may make it provide another function as a specific function. For example, a display design custom function for customizing a display design such as an avatar and a background displayed on the display 123 or the call lamp 200 may be provided. Thereby, since it can be set as the display design suitable for the player's taste, a player's willingness to play can be improved. The setting of the design content with this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Also, as a specific function, a game with a low ball rental machine with a low unit price per ball (for example, 1 yen per ball) (for example, a slot machine with 1 medal of 5 yen, a pachinko game machine with 1 yen per ball). Or a normal ball rental machine with a normal unit price per ball (for example, a slot machine with one medal of 20 yen, a pachinko machine with 4 yen per ball). In addition, when a card with the setting of the function is inserted into a medal lending machine or a card unit of a gaming machine different from the setting, a function of notifying that the setting is different may be provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a player from making a mistake in selecting a gaming machine having a unit price for which a game is desired. The selection setting by this function may also be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as a specific function, whether to give priority to the game with the holding ball or to give priority to the game with the storage ball is selected and set so that the set holding ball or the storage ball is used with priority. May be. Thereby, it is possible to play a game using the possession balls or storage balls to be prioritized. The selection setting by this function may also be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  Further, as a specific function, the amount used for the game after the game is started may be a predetermined amount (the amount set by the player may be a predetermined amount, for example, 30000 yen, etc. It may be provided with a squeeze-in limiting function for notifying that or limiting the game when it becomes above (or over). As a result, it is possible to limit the player's infiltration into the game. The setting of the predetermined amount with this function may be transferred to the card inserted later in the process of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as the specific process described in step Sj20 of FIG. 29 described above, in this confinement restriction function, a process of accumulating the amount used for the game after the game is started may be executed. The amount accumulated processing using this function may also be taken over by the card inserted later in the processing of step Sj20 in FIG.

  In addition, as a specific function, if it is prohibited to share a game medium such as a ball or a medal with another player in a game, if it is determined that the player is different by face authentication, that fact May be provided with a sharing prohibition function for informing the store clerk or restricting the game. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the disadvantageous situation to the game store side as the prohibition of sharing can be ensured. Furthermore, since the game store side can increase the setting of the lottery probability of the slot machine game, it can be in an advantageous state for the player.

  In addition, in each vehicle counting function as a specific function, when a process of counting game media such as medals or pachinko balls is being executed, if the membership card is not accepted, the membership card is inserted. The membership card inserted later may be transferred to the game media counting process. As a result, it is possible to easily perform processing for storing balls and storing medals with the membership card.

  In addition, in the drink ordering function as a specific function, there are not enough balls in the middle of the process of paying the price of the drink from the number of balls on the card that the clerk providing the drink has received earlier In addition, if a card with a recorded ball is inserted later, the adjustment process is taken over so that the amount of the card that has been inserted later is compensated for the missing value. You may make it settle from.

  (19) In the process of step Sj20 in FIG. 29, a process for confirming whether or not the function setting and the process in which the function is being executed can be taken over by the card inserted later may be executed.

  (20) The medal management computer 550 or the card management computer 500 manages the setting of functions for the recording medium and the processing being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be managed by another management apparatus such as the hall computer 540.

  (21) In the embodiment described above, the small-lot lending valid flag is stored only in the card table as shown in FIG. 5 of the gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100, and the card management computer 500 or the like. The information is not stored in the membership card table or the visitor card table as shown in FIG. In other words, the small lending function is not managed by the management device. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the small-lot lending function may be managed by the management device as well as other functions.

  (22) The function settings stored in the visitor card table of FIG. 7B (for example, card lock valid flag, password) are used when the visitor card is not being used but being stored. , And cleared at the game shop closing process. The function settings (for example, the card lock valid flag) stored in the member card table of FIG. 7A may be cleared during the game shop closing process, or may not be performed.

  In addition, it is preferable that a specific function setting (for example, a theft card flag of the theft card restriction function) is not cleared even at the time of a game shop closing process. Even if a theft card is used at a later date, the use of the card is restricted.

  (23) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the number of medals of the previous card is added to the card inserted later. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prepaid balance of the previous card may be added to the card inserted later, or the number of medals and the prepaid balance may be added together.

  (24) At least two of the management devices such as the medal management computer 550, the hall computer 540, and the card management computer 500 may be used.

  (25) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the card management computer 500 sets the card lock valid flag and the personal identification number, which are the card lock function settings, and the theft card restriction function. The theft card flag is now managed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11, the medal management computer 550 manages the history counting process, which is a process in which the game history counting function is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the medal lending machine 100 stores a small amount lending flag which is a setting of the small amount lending function.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting of each function and the processing in which each function is executed may be managed by any management device, or for games such as the medal lending machine 100 or the card unit 750. It may be stored only in the apparatus.

  (26) The gaming apparatus has not only the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 but also the function of counting each unit, and the number of possessed balls or information that can identify the number of possessed medals (for example, the number of possessed balls or possessed medals) The number itself, or the card ID that can identify the number of possessed balls or the number of possessed medals stored in association with the management device) is also recorded on the card.

  (27) The game history totaled by the game history totaling function may be configured to be transmitted from a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 or the card unit 750 to the player's portable terminal in a wired or wireless manner. .

  (28) In the above-described embodiment, as described in step Sj20 of FIG. 29, when the card inserted later is a membership card, the setting of the encryption number of the card lock function is not taken over. . In other words, when the later-inserted recording medium is a member-purpose recording medium, the function setting for the previously inserted recording medium is not transferred to the later-inserted recording medium.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of whether the later-inserted recording medium is for a member or non-member, the function setting for the previously inserted recording medium can be set in the later-inserted recording medium. You may make it not take over.

  In addition, instead of taking over the function settings for the previously inserted recording medium as they are, the settings whose contents and format have been changed may be taken over for the later inserted recording medium. For example, in step Sj20 of FIG. 29, the setting of the encryption number set in advance for the membership card inserted later is not inserted without taking over the setting of the security code of the visitor card inserted previously. It can also be considered that the membership card is taken over.

  (29) In the above-described embodiment, the embodiment has been described on the assumption that the recording medium processing device is the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 that use a card as a recording medium. However, the recording medium used by the recording medium processing apparatus is not limited to the card, and may be another recording medium. For example, a coin-shaped recording medium, a memory card-shaped recording medium, or a portable terminal possessed by a player may be used as the recording medium.

  (30) In the above-described embodiment, the number of held balls and the number of stored balls are acquired from a management device such as the medal management computer 550 by a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be acquired from a recording medium such as a membership card and a visitor card by a gaming device.

  (31) The functions executed by the gaming devices such as the medal lending machine 100 and the card unit 750 and the management devices such as the medal management computer 550, the hall computer 540, and the card management computer 500 are the gaming devices. It may be executed by either the management device or the management device.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, as described in steps Sc31 and Sc32 of the counting process in FIG. 22, every time a medal is detected by the medal detection sensor 190h, the remaining time for counting is reset to 10 seconds. I tried to do it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other methods may be used as long as counting is performed until it can be determined that there are no medals to be counted. For example, every time a medal is detected by the photo sensor 190e in FIG. 4, the remaining time to be counted may be reset to a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds).

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, even if the rotating disk 190g is rotated in the counting process of FIG. 22, the medals of the lending process in step Sb21 and the replay process in step Sb24 in FIG. In the payout, the operation of the payout device 182 is not particularly disabled. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and while either one of the rotating disk 190g and the payout device 182 is operating, the other operation may be disabled. It is necessary to drive the motor for each operation, but the required electric energy can be suppressed by operating only one of them. When counting pachinko balls, there is no need to use a motor or the like, so that even if counting and payout are performed simultaneously, there will be no problem with the amount of power.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 can accept two recording media such as a membership card and a visitor card, and a portable terminal. . Then, when the number of game media such as holding balls and storage balls corresponding to one recording medium is displayed, control is performed so that the payout of the game media based on the other recording medium is also disabled.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this. When game media such as holding balls and storage balls corresponding to both recording media are different, when the number of game media corresponding to one recording medium is displayed, the other The game media payout based on the recording media may not be disabled. As a result, even if replay on one recording medium is not possible, replay on the other recording medium can be performed. As a result, when a game medium is urgently needed due to the flow of the game, etc., it is possible to eliminate the need to rent a game medium based on its valuable value, so that the convenience of the player is improved. Can do.

  (35) The techniques of the first to fifth embodiments described above can be freely combined with each other as long as there is no contradiction.

  (36) In the embodiment described above, the counting device 190 is built in the medal lending machine 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each counter may be provided as an external device for a gaming apparatus such as the medal lending machine 100.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, game media (medals) are paid out from a gaming device such as the medal lending machine 100 based on the valuable value (prepaid balance or money), the number of held balls, or the number of stored balls. In addition, the game media (pachinko balls) are shown to be paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 701 according to the control signal from the gaming device, based on the valuable value (prepaid balance or money), the number of balls, or the number of balls. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and game media based on the valuable value, the number of possessed balls, or the number of stored balls may be paid out from different devices (for example, different game devices).

[Sixth Embodiment]
As a sixth embodiment, a detailed example of the enclosed game machine and card unit described in the fifth embodiment and an example of a system for managing them will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the sixth embodiment below include the gaming machine and card unit (including medal lending machines) described as the first to fifth embodiments. ).

  The present invention shown by the embodiments described below relates to a game system, a game device, and a game control device for enabling a game by a gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that perform authentication processing to ensure the security of gaming machines are known. In this conventional gaming machine, when the authentication result is inappropriate (authentication failure), the gaming operation is disabled (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-162425).

  However, a fraudster may attempt to break the security of the communication device by transmitting various data one after another to the secure gaming communication device and analyzing the response to the data. is expected.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming system, a gaming device, and a gaming system capable of making it difficult to perform an unauthorized analysis of security using responses to various transmission data, and A game control device is provided.

(1) The present invention includes a first control means (SC325bF) and a second control means (CU control unit 323F) communicatively connected to the first control means, and a gaming machine (P stand 2F, S A game system for enabling a game by a table 2SF),
The first control means includes monitoring means (SF11 in FIG. 84) for monitoring the reception interval of the message received from the second control means,
When the monitoring unit detects that the reception interval of the electronic message is less than a predetermined period (YES in SF12 in FIG. 84), predetermined error processing (transmission of error information and transmission of a response electronic message to the received electronic message) And error processing execution means (SF13 to SF15 in FIG. 84) for executing the prohibition and stopping the reception of the message from the CU control unit 323F.

  According to such a configuration, when it is detected a predetermined number of times that the message reception interval is less than the specified period, a predetermined error process is executed. Therefore, security fraud using responses to various transmission data is performed. Analysis can be made difficult.

(2) A gaming device (CU control unit 323F) for enabling gaming by a gaming machine (P stand 2F, S stand 2SF),
When it is detected a predetermined number of times that the reception interval of the message received from the gaming device is less than the specified period (YES in SF12 in FIG. 84), a predetermined error processing (error information is transmitted and a response message for the received message) Communication means (communication unit included in the CU control unit 323F) that communicates with the game control device (SC325bF) that executes transmission prohibition, and stops receiving telegrams from the CU control unit 323F,
The communication means transmits the telegram to the game control device at an interval equal to or longer than the specified period (the communication unit transmits a telegram at an interval of 200 ms measured by a timer provided in the CU control unit 323F).

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming device transmits a telegram at an interval equal to or longer than a predetermined period, the reception interval of the telegram may be less than the predetermined time on the game control device connected thereto. When it is detected a predetermined number of times, a predetermined error process is executed, and it is possible to identify whether it is a legitimate gaming device by executing the error process. As a result, it is possible to make unauthorized analysis of security using responses obtained by sending various data by connecting an unauthorized analysis device that mimics the operation of a gaming device to the game control device. It becomes.

(3) The present invention is a game control device (SC325bF) for enabling a game by a gaming machine,
Receiving means (SF10 in FIG. 84) for receiving a message necessary for controlling the gaming machines (P stand 2F, S stand 2SF);
Monitoring means (SF11 in FIG. 84) for monitoring the reception interval of messages received by the receiving means;
When the monitoring unit detects that the reception interval of the electronic message is less than a predetermined period (YES in SF12 in FIG. 84), predetermined error processing (transmission of error information and transmission of a response electronic message to the received electronic message) Error processing execution means (SF13 to SF15 in FIG. 84) for executing (prohibit the message, stop receiving the message from the CU control unit 323F).

  According to such a configuration, when it is detected a predetermined number of times that the message reception interval is less than the specified period, a predetermined error process is executed. Therefore, security fraud using responses to various transmission data is performed. Analysis can be made difficult.

  (4) In the above (1) and (2), the error processing execution means stops the message reception function as the predetermined error processing (SF15 in FIG. 84).

  According to such a configuration, when it is detected a predetermined number of times that the reception interval of the message is less than the specified period, the response function for the message is not transmitted because the reception function of the message is stopped. It is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud analysis of security using responses to various transmission data.

(5) In any of (1), (3) and (4) above,
The error processing execution means stops the reception function of the electronic message as the predetermined error processing and executes processing for transmitting error information to the gaming machine (SF13 and SF15 in FIG. 84).

  According to such a configuration, when it is detected a predetermined number of times that the message reception interval is less than the specified period, the message reception function is stopped and error information is transmitted to the gaming machine. Since the response message is not transmitted and error information is transmitted to the gaming machine, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an unauthorized analysis of security using responses to various transmission data.

  (6) In the above (1) and (3), an abnormal type determination means (in FIG. 85) for determining an abnormal type (communication error, command error (incorrect)) based on the number of communication retries (SF22 and SF27 in FIG. 85). SF23, SF24) is further included.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to classify an abnormality by paying attention to the number of communication retries.

(7) In (1) and (2) above,
The second control means (the gaming device) requests the gaming machine to transmit collation information (main control chip ID, payout chip ID) for collating identification information stored in the gaming machine. Verification request means (SF30 in FIG. 86) for
The collation request means does not respond to the request even if a predetermined waiting period (inquiry waiting timer time) elapses after requesting the gaming machine to transmit the collation information (SF33 in FIG. 86). YES) and the request is retransmitted (time-out process of SF38 in FIG. 86 (as shown in FIG. 78, the status information request (P units) is transmitted and then the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is retransmitted)) When a verification request command (health check (operation designation = game machine chip information inquiry request)) is received from the server, the request is retransmitted without waiting for the waiting period to elapse (SF35 in FIG. 86).

  According to such a configuration, even before the standby period elapses, since the transmission of verification information is requested in response to an external verification request command, it is possible to quickly respond to an external request.

(8) In the above (1), (3) and (6),
The error processing execution means changes the response period interval for the received message as the predetermined error processing to an interval longer than the predetermined period (normally, after the partner (CU control unit 323F) transmits the message). The response message is transmitted so that the response message reaches the other party in 200 ms, but the interval may be increased (for example, three times the normal time).

  According to such a configuration, when it is detected a predetermined number of times that the reception interval of the message is less than the specified period, the response interval for the received message is changed to an interval longer than the predetermined period. It becomes time-consuming to analyze this, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform fraud analysis of security using responses to various transmission data.

(9) In the above (1), (3) and (6),
The error processing execution means changes the response period interval for the received message as the predetermined error processing to an interval exceeding the specified period (normally, after the partner (CU control unit 323F) transmits the message) The response message is transmitted so that the response message reaches the other party in 200 ms, but the interval may be increased (for example, three times the normal time).

  According to such a configuration, when it is detected a predetermined number of times that the message reception interval is less than the specified period, the response period interval for the received message is changed to an interval exceeding the specified period. Analysis takes time, and it becomes possible to make it difficult to perform security fraud analysis using responses to various transmission data.

(10) In the above (1) (3) (5) (6) (8) (9),
The error processing execution means detects that the message reception interval is less than a predetermined period by the monitoring means continuously for a predetermined number of times (SF12: n1 in FIG. 84 is a predetermined number of times of 2 or more). In addition, predetermined error processing is executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined error processing is executed when the reception interval of the message is less than the specified time continuously, the reception interval happens to be normal due to a malfunction in the control and not illegal. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that error processing is executed when it deviates from the above.

(11) The present invention is a gaming system comprising a gaming machine (P 2F, S 2SF) and a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on the gaming machine,
The gaming device is:
A first control means (SC325bF) and a second control means (communication control IC 325aF) capable of communicating with each other;
Mutual authentication means (communication control IC authentication sequence of FIG. 63) for performing mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means;
On the condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication means is proper, identification information (main control chip ID and payout control chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine is received from the gaming machine, and the identification information is stored in the identification information. A gaming machine identification information authentication means (gaming machine chip information authentication sequence of FIG. 63) for performing processing for authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine based on
Communication key generation means for generating a communication key used for encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means after the processing for authentication by the gaming machine identification information authentication means is executed (Generate a communication key (session key) for communicating game machines and business messages),
The first control means and the second control means perform cryptographic communication using the communication key generated by the communication key generation means (the communication key generated by the communication control IC 325aF is transmitted to the SC 325bF, and the two are connected. Cryptographic communication is performed using this communication key).

  According to the above configuration, the generation of the communication key used for the encryption communication between the first control unit and the second control unit is an appropriate result by mutual authentication between the first control unit and the second control unit. Even if the communication key is leaked at the time of encryption communication, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as misusing the key and scrambling the mutual authentication monitoring, and this is a security vulnerability. Sex can be overcome as much as possible. In addition, the communication key is prevented from being generated without receiving any identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine from the gaming machine and authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine based on the identification information. can do.

(12) Another aspect of the present invention is a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game on a gaming machine (P stand 2F, S stand 2SF),
A first control means (SC325bF) and a second control means (communication control IC 325aF) capable of communicating with each other;
Mutual authentication means (communication control IC authentication sequence of FIG. 63) for performing mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means;
On the condition that the authentication result by the mutual authentication means is proper, identification information (main control chip ID and payout control chip ID) for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine is received from the gaming machine, and the identification information is stored in the identification information. A gaming machine identification information authentication means (gaming machine chip information authentication sequence of FIG. 63) for performing processing for authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine based on
Communication key generation means for generating a communication key used for encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means after the processing for authentication by the gaming machine identification information authentication means is executed (Generate communication key for game machine business message of FIG. 63),
The first control means and the second control means perform cryptographic communication using the communication key generated by the communication key generation means (the communication key generated by the communication control IC 325aF is transmitted to the SC 325bF, and the two are connected. Cryptographic communication is performed using this communication key.

  According to the above configuration, the generation of the communication key used for the encryption communication between the first control unit and the second control unit is an appropriate result by mutual authentication between the first control unit and the second control unit. Even if the communication key is leaked at the time of encryption communication, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as misusing the key and scrambling the mutual authentication monitoring, and this is a security vulnerability. Sex can be overcome as much as possible. In addition, the communication key is prevented from being generated without receiving any identification information for confirming the authenticity of the gaming machine from the gaming machine and authenticating the authenticity of the gaming machine based on the identification information. can do.

(13) In the gaming system (11) or the gaming device (12),
The gaming apparatus has setting means for performing communication activation information setting processing for setting communication activation information (valid key) for enabling communication between the second control means and the gaming machine (FIG. 63). Security information update sequence)
The communication key generation means performs encrypted communication between the first control means and the second control means after the processing for authentication is executed and the communication activation information setting processing is executed. A communication key to be used is generated (FIG. 63).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that a communication key is generated even though communication between the second control means and the gaming machine is not activated.

(14) In the gaming system (11) or (13) or the gaming device (12) or (13),
The communication key generation means executes a repeated generation process for newly generating the communication key every predetermined period (control to update the communication key for game machine business message when the SC 325bF detects the update period of the communication key The iterative generation process generates a communication key using change data that can be changed between the previous communication key generation and the current communication key generation (communication using current time data and random numbers). Generate a key).

  According to the above configuration, the iterative generation process for newly generating a communication key every predetermined period is performed by using the change data that can change between the generation of the previous communication key and the generation of the current communication key. Therefore, even if the communication key is once leaked, a new communication key is generated using changeable change data different from that at the time of generation of the leaked communication key, and the new communication is performed. Since encryption communication is performed using a key, even if an attempt is made to decrypt communication using the new communication key with a leaked key, decryption cannot be performed, and security can be improved.

(15) The present invention is a gaming system comprising first control means (SC325bF) and second control means (communication control IC 325aF) connected to the first control means so as to be communicable,
First mutual authentication processing means for generating an authentication key used for mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means and performing a first mutual authentication process using the authentication key (FIGS. 64 and 67). : The first authentication sequence and the second authentication sequence are performed using the authentication key immediately after the update (this authentication key)),
Operation processing means (FIG. 63, FIG. 64: first authentication sequence) for executing operation processing by the first control means and the second control means when an authentication result by the first mutual authentication processing is appropriate. When the authentication result by the communication control IC authentication sequence including the second authentication sequence is appropriate, business message communication with the gaming machine is possible)
When the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate (FIG. 67: when the authentication result by the sequence of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is inappropriate), the first control means and the second Second mutual authentication processing means for performing second mutual authentication processing using the authentication key stored in the control means from the manufacturing stage (FIG. 67: first authentication sequence and second authentication sequence using temporary authentication key) And)
The operation processing unit executes a limited operation process by the first control unit and the second control unit when an authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate (timed operation with a limited time limit). Process).

  According to the above configuration, when the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process for generating the authentication key and performing the mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means is inappropriate, the first control means When the second mutual authentication process is performed with the second control means using the authentication key stored from the manufacturing stage, and the authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate, the first control means and the second control Since the limited operation process by means is executed, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the operation process cannot be performed at all when the authentication result by the first authentication process is inappropriate. In addition, when the authentication result of the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate, the operation process is not allowed to be executed indefinitely, but is limited to the limited operation process. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience that is performed.

(16) Another aspect of the present invention is a game control device including first control means (SC325bF) and second control means (communication control IC 325aF) connected to be communicable with the first control means. And
First mutual authentication processing means for generating an authentication key used for mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means and performing a first mutual authentication process using the authentication key (FIGS. 64 and 67). : The first authentication sequence and the second authentication sequence are performed using the authentication key immediately after the update (this authentication key)),
Operation processing means (FIG. 63, FIG. 64: first authentication sequence) for executing operation processing by the first control means and the second control means when an authentication result by the first mutual authentication processing is appropriate. When the authentication result by the communication control IC authentication sequence including the second authentication sequence is appropriate, business message communication with the gaming machine is possible)
When the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate (FIG. 67: when the authentication result by the sequence of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is inappropriate), the first control means and the second Second mutual authentication processing means for performing second mutual authentication processing using the authentication key stored in the control means from the manufacturing stage (FIG. 67: first authentication sequence and second authentication sequence using temporary authentication key) And)
The operation processing unit executes a limited operation process by the first control unit and the second control unit when an authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate (timed operation with a limited time limit). Process).

  According to the above configuration, when the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process for generating the authentication key and performing the mutual authentication between the first control means and the second control means is inappropriate, the first control means When the second mutual authentication process is performed with the second control means using the authentication key stored from the manufacturing stage, and the authentication result by the second mutual authentication process is appropriate, the first control means and the second control Since the limited operation process by means is executed, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the operation process cannot be performed at all when the authentication result by the first authentication process is inappropriate. In addition, when the authentication result of the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate, the operation process is not allowed to be executed indefinitely, but is limited to the limited operation process. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience that is performed.

(17) In the game system of (15) or the game control device of (16),
When the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate, an abnormality notification means for sending a notification to the management server that an abnormality has occurred (FIG. 67: “Authentication key update abnormality” alarm is sent to the key management server) Is further provided.

  According to the above configuration, the management server can grasp that the authentication result by the first mutual authentication process is inappropriate.

(18) In the game system according to (15) and (17) or the game control device according to (16) and (17),
The operation processing means executes the operation processing only within a predetermined period (for example, two days) as the limited operation processing.

  According to the above configuration, since the operation process is executed only within a predetermined period as the limited operation process, the operation process in an unstable state where the authentication result of the first authentication process is inappropriate. It is possible to reduce the security problem caused by allowing the password indefinitely.

  Hereinafter, a sixth embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball as an example of a game medium inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F (see FIG. 52) is driven to make one shot of the enclosing ball. The game board 26F is configured so that it can be played one by one in the game area 27F in front of the game board 26F. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  51 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided at the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 51, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F includes a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols), and based on the detection signals of the start winning balls that have won the respective start winning openings 275F, 276F, 277F. Start variable display of multiple types of identification information. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  Further, the display result of the variable display device 278F becomes a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves). And a probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the probability of occurrence of the jackpot is improved after the end of the jackpot state.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in any one of the winning openings and the pachinko balls collected in the out opening 154F are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display device 54F is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and displays various effect images linked to the points, the remaining card amount, or the display of the variable display device 278F to the player. Note that the display 54F is formed integrally with the CU (card unit) 3F even if it is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2F independently of the CU (card unit) 3F as shown in FIG. (Pachinko machine) It may be configured to be fitted to the front surface of 2F. If the display unit 54F of the CU3F is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F, the CU3F and the P base 2F can be more strongly connected, and thus fraud can be further prevented. In this case, fraud can be further prevented by preventing the connection and locking with the indicator 54F from being released unless the lower door provided with the glass door 6F or the ball hitting operation handle 25F is opened. .

  Further, a 7-segment display 50 is provided in a lower portion of the display 54F. The 7-segment display 50 includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The 7-segment display 50 displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28F for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25F on the P platform 2F. In the present embodiment, the counting operation is repeatedly executed according to the time for which the counting button 28F is kept pressed. It should be noted that, regardless of the pressing duration time, if the button is pressed once, a predetermined number (for example, 100 balls) may be counted from the gaming ball to the holding ball, or when the counting button 28F is pressed once. All of the game balls currently owned by the player may be counted regardless of the pressing time (regardless of whether the button is pressed for a long time).

  As described above, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F side, it is seated facing the P table 2F as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU (card unit) 3F side. Can improve the operability of the player.

  A game ball number display 29F for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28F. The game ball number display 29F is a 7 segment type display. The game ball number display 29F may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  The P stand 2F according to the present embodiment can be divided into a game board 26F and another front frame (game frame) 5F. In particular, the game board 26F is different for each model of pachinko machine developed by each company, while the front frame 5F is a common common frame regardless of the model. For this reason, the game store only needs to replace the game board 26F when replacing a new stand.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This CU3F is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member player who has registered as a member in the playground. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of balls, or the number of accumulated balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game ball data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining balls that can be fired. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The membership card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305F described above, on the surface facing the player, the display card 312F and the membership card ID recorded on the membership card when the membership card is received (also simply referred to as a card ID or C-ID). ) And a replay button 319F for performing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the member card ID.

  The display 312F displays the prepaid balance (also referred to as card balance or simply the balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), but can display the number of game balls and other various information. In addition, the surface is configured by a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball is converted into a game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possession balls is not recorded and the storage ball is recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the storage ball is withdrawn and becomes a game ball. It is converted and the game by P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the holding ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to savings ball withdrawal.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The storage ball is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Mochitama” is a ball acquired on the day and becomes a game ball by paying out the possessionball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall. That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  A “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by a gaming machine. As described above, the data on the number of game balls is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, holding balls, or storing balls.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but stored in association with the membership card number on a server installed in a game hall such as a hall management computer, and the corresponding storage ball is searched based on the membership card number. It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is written directly on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  In addition, the timing of storing the holding ball in a card (member card, visitor card) or hall server is stored in a fixed period, for example, in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. It is conceivable that the timing is such that it is stored in a lump or when the card is returned.

  Also, when the player finishes the game and returns the card from the CU3F, the holding ball stored in the CU3F is temporarily stored as a stored ball in the hall server 801F, and the date when the player receives the return of the card When the card is inserted into the same or another CU3F again on the same day, only the possession balls for the day that are once stored as accumulated balls are stored again in the CU3F, and the game balls are added within the range of the possession balls. You may be able to do it.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit (also referred to as an IR light receiving unit) 320F, a ball lending button (also referred to as a lending button) 321F, and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU 3F. The IR photosensitive unit 320F is an IR photosensitive unit 320F that receives an infrared signal from a remote controller (not shown) possessed by a game attendant, converts it into an electronic signal, and outputs the electronic signal. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the remaining amount recorded on the inserted card and using it in a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit and the pachinko machine. With reference to FIG. 52, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

  The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. The CU control unit 323F is a main control function unit of the CU3F, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program and control data for operating the CPU, A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area for the CPU, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 54) for security management. Connected to the CU control unit 323F is a security board (SC board) 325F for communicating with the payout control board 17F of the P platform 2F while ensuring security. The security board 325F is a security monitoring function unit of the CU 3F. Note that the CU control unit 323F may be provided on the security board 325F, or the CU control unit 323F may be provided on a board different from the security board 325F. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

  The security board 325F on the CU3F side and the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side are connected to be communicable via this connector and connection wiring. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 54) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information.

  To the CU control unit 323F, the authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money identifier, and the identification result signal is input. In addition, when the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, a light reception signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the recorded information of the inserted card into the CU control unit 323F, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F writes the information to the card reader / writer. When data is transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card. The card recording information includes a card ID. The CU control unit 323F stores the card ID read by the card reader / writer until the game ends.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as the remaining amount or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is transmitted to the P stand 2F. The display data transmitted to the P platform 2F is input to the display 312F via the relay board 14F. An image corresponding to the display data is displayed on the display 312F. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F has a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a drive control of the firing motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A launch control board 31F, a variable display device 278F, and an effect control board 15F that controls display of the variable display device 278F based on a command transmitted from the main control board 16F.

  The main control board 16F and the effect control board 15F are provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F is a main control function unit of the gaming machine. A microcomputer for gaming machine control includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a RAM (RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU). Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F.

  The main control unit 161F draws random numbers for determining big hits (or further including small hits) / off when the balls win the start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F, and stores the random numbers. This is called reserved storage. The maximum value of the number of reserved memories is, for example, 4. When the variable display device 278F can start a new variable display, the main control unit 161F digests one reserved memory, makes a jackpot determination based on the reserved memory, and derives the display result from the variable start. The variable display time to reach is determined from multiple types. Further, when the big hit is determined, it is also determined whether or not the probability fluctuation is caused. The main control unit 161F transmits the result of the jackpot determination (including whether or not to change the probability) and information regarding the variable display time to the effect control unit 151F mounted on the effect control board 15F as commands.

  The command related to variable display transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F specifies a variable start command indicating the start of variable display, a display result command indicating the result of variable display (big hit / miss), and a variable display pattern. A variable display time command that is possible, a variable stop command that indicates the timing for deriving and displaying a variable display result, and the like are included. Furthermore, the commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the production control unit 151F include a command that can identify the progress status of the big hit during the big hit, a command that indicates the occurrence of a new reserved memory, and an occurrence of a gaming state error. There are commands to show.

  The effect control unit 151F determines the variable display content of the variable display device 278F based on these commands transmitted from the main control unit 161F. For example, the effect control unit 151F specifies a variable display result and a variable display time based on a command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, determines a stop symbol, and a variable display pattern (reach presence / absence, reach type). In addition, the effect pattern of the notice effect related to the big hit or reach is determined. The effect control unit 151F controls display of the variable display device 278F according to the determined variable display content.

  The effect control board 15F is also connected to the display 54F via the relay board 14F on the front frame 5F side. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for variable display or the like to the variable display device 278F, and transmits a display control signal for performing display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F to the display 54F. Is possible. The relay board 14F and the display 54F may be provided on the CU3F side. In this case, the effect control board 15F on the P platform 2F side is connected to the relay board 14F provided on the CU 3F.

  The payout control board 17F is provided on the front frame (game frame) 5F. On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control unit 171F is a payout control function unit of the gaming machine. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices.

  Further, a firing ball detection switch 903F, an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 33F, a counting button 28F, and a radio wave sensor 173F are provided in a state of being electrically connected to the payout control board 17F. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. The ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls.

  Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F.

  From main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main control chip ID, winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol determination times, jackpot information, manufacturer specific Jackpot information is sent.

  The main control chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is information transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a prize in any of the starting winning awards. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 33F, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch 903F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and various commands are transmitted from the security board 325F to the payout control board 17F as described later. Conversely, various responses are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F, as will be described later.

  In addition to the payout control board 17F, the front frame (game frame) 5F is provided with a relay board 14F, a launch control board 31F, a launch motor 18F, and a game ball number display 29F. The game ball number indicator 29F may be directly attached to the front frame 5F, but the front frame 5F is similar to an upper plate or a lower plate provided on the front side of a normal pachinko machine from which balls are paid out. You may make it provide in the aspect which can be rotated. The same applies to the display 54F. The payout control unit 171F of the payout control board 17F displays the number of game balls currently owned by the player on the game ball number display 29F.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the firing control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 18F. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F. The firing control board 31F emits a firing motor excitation output to drive the firing motor 18F when a touch ring input signal for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input.

  A display 54F is provided in the front frame (game frame) 5F. The display unit 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F via the relay board 14F. Further, the display 54F receives display data (display control signal) from the effect control board 15F via the relay board 14F.

  The relay board 14F outputs a display control signal from one of the effect control board 15F and the display controller 350F to the display 54F, and the display 54F is based on the display control signal from the effect control board 15F or the display controller 350F. A switching circuit 141F for displaying an image is mounted.

  In this embodiment, the display 54F on the P stand 2F side is configured to be controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54F is controlled to be displayed on the P stand 2F side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

  The RAM clear switch 293F is a switch for erasing game table information and game information stored in the RAM of the P table 2F. After the P table enters an error state, the store clerk operates the switch to initialize It becomes possible to return to the state. The RAM clear switch 293F is operated by a store clerk after the card is discharged, for example.

<Pachinko ball circulation route>
Here, with reference to FIG. 51 and FIG. 52, the circulation path of the pachinko balls in the P platform 2F will be outlined.

  When the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the firing motor 18F is driven. Thereby, one pachinko ball that has been supplied to the launch position is shot by the hitting hammer and the pachinko ball is driven into the game area 27F.

  The detection of the launch of the game ball is detected when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF changes from on to off. This detection is detected by a port input on a payout control board 17F (see FIG. 52) provided with a payout control unit 171F. Based on the detection, the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls. To do.

  Out of balls that have been driven into the game area 27F, the out balls that have entered the out port 154F (see FIG. 51) flow down the out ball flow path and are detected by an out ball detection switch 701F provided in the middle. . The foul balls flow down through the foul ball return path and are detected by a foul ball detection switch 33F provided in the middle thereof.

  All winning balls that have won the winning opening and the variable winning ball device are collected on the back of the gaming machine and guided to the collection ball passing path. Similarly, out balls and foul balls are also guided to the collection ball passing path. A firing ball detection switch 903F is provided in the collection ball passage route. For this reason, all the winning balls, out balls, and foul balls are detected by the firing ball detection switch 903F. That is, the fired ball detection switch 903F is a switch that detects all of the pachinko balls that are bulleted. When the number detected by this switch is equal to the number of shots of the pachinko balls shot by the firing motor 18F, it can be determined that all of the hit pachinko balls have been collected.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the difference between the number of detections of the shot ball detection switch 903F and the number of bullets is calculated. When this difference number is not 0, the balls that have been driven into the game area 27F have been collected. It is determined that it is not. By making this determination, it is possible to determine whether the game area 27F is rolling, or whether there is a floating ball that does not fall due to being caught between nails or the like in the game area.

<Display control of touch panel>
FIG. 53 is a block diagram for explaining display control of the game ball number display device 29F and the display device 54F. 53, only the main components related to the display control of the game ball number display device 29F and the display device 54F among the various configurations of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 52 are illustrated.

  The main control unit 161F mounted on the main control board 16F transmits various types of game information that change with game control to the payout control unit 171F of the payout control board 17F. The payout control unit 171F transmits ball number information and the like to the CU control unit 323F based on the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F, and controls display of the game ball number display 29F. As a result, the number of game balls currently owned by the player is displayed on the game ball number display 29F, and the display of the number of game balls is decremented and updated based on the ball launching or counting operation. The display of the number of game balls is added and updated on the basis of a ball lending operation or the like.

  The CU control unit 323F updates the game information such as the number of game balls stored by itself based on the number of balls information transmitted from the payout control unit 171F. Further, the CU control unit 323F stores the remaining card amount and the player's possession ball, and displays information for displaying based on the stored game information on the display device 54F on the P table 2F side. Send to 350F. The display control unit 350F transmits a display control signal based on the information to the relay board 14F on the P platform 2F side.

  On the other hand, a display control signal from the effect control unit 151F of the effect control board 15F is also input to the relay board 14F. The effect control unit 151F transmits a display control signal for display control of the variable display device 278F to the variable display device 278F based on various variable display commands received from the main control unit 161F, and controls the display 54F. A display control signal is transmitted to the relay board 14F.

  Usually, the display control signal is transmitted to the relay board 14F only from the display controller 350F side of the CU3F, and the display control signal is not transmitted from the effect controller 151F. As a result, normally, information such as points and card balance based on the display control signal from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F is displayed on the display 54F. However, when the effect control unit 151F detects a change in the gaming state of the gaming machine based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 161F, it transmits a display control signal corresponding to the change in the gaming state to the relay board 14F. .

  When the display control signal is input from the effect control unit 151F, the switching circuit 141F receives the display control signal input from the effect control unit 151F instead of the display control signal input from the display control unit 350F to the display 54F. Switch the circuit to transmit. As a result, the display unit 54F normally displays a score or the like based on the display control on the CU3F side. For example, when the game state changes due to a big hit display on the variable display device 278F, the display unit The display of 54F is switched to one that interlocks with the display of the variable display device 278F such as a jackpot display. After that, when transmission of the display control signal from the effect control unit 151F to the relay board 14F is stopped, the switching circuit 141F returns the signal input source to the switching source. As a result, information based on the display control on the CU3F side is displayed again on the display 54F.

  That is, in the above example, the switching circuit 141F has a configuration in which the display control signal input from the effect control unit 151F is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54F among the effect control unit 151F and the display control unit 350F. Normally, since the display control signal is input to the switching circuit 141F only from the display control unit 350F, information based on the display control on the CU3F side is displayed on the display 54F, and the switching condition such as occurrence of a big hit is established. When the display control signal is input from the effect control unit 151F, the display control signal is prioritized and transmitted to the display 54F, and the display on the display 54F is switched.

  However, instead of this, the switching circuit 141F adopts a configuration in which the display control signal input from the display control unit 350F is preferentially transmitted to the display unit 54F among the effect control unit 151F and the display control unit 350F. Also good.

  In other words, the switching circuit 141F normally performs an effect display in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F on the display 54F based on a display control signal that is constantly received from the effect control unit 151F, so that there are few remaining game points and points. When the display control signal for displaying that fact is input from the CU3F side when the predetermined switching condition is established, the signal input source is switched from the effect control unit 151F to the display control unit 350F, thereby displaying the display 54F. However, the game effect screen may change to a screen for notifying that there are few game points or points remaining.

  In the present embodiment, the display control of the game ball number display 29F for displaying the number of game balls is not performed by the CU3F but by the P stand 2F directly related to the fluctuation of the number of game balls. When used and subtracted or added by game, the updated number of game balls can be immediately reflected on the game ball number display 29F.

  If the display control of the game ball number display 29F is performed by the CU 3F, the game ball number display 29F is transferred from the CU 3F to the game ball number display 29F based on the information on the number of game balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. A display control signal is sent. However, in this case, although the number of game balls actually changes depending on the communication status between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, the change is displayed on the game ball number display 29F. There is a risk of inconvenience that it will not be reflected immediately. According to the present embodiment, such inconvenience can be prevented.

  On the other hand, since the display unit 54F performs display control on the CU3F side, the display control of the P unit 2F is compared with the case where the P unit 2F that controls the display of the game ball number display unit 29F further controls the display of the display unit 54F. The burden can be reduced.

  Here, a specific example of switching the display of the display 54F will be given. For example, normally, the remaining amount of the card is displayed on the display (touch panel) 54F based on the display control of the display control unit 350F of the CU3F, and the display on the display 54F can be changed according to the change in the gaming state such as the occurrence of a big hit. An example in which the display is switched to one linked with the display of the display device 278F can be given.

  Or, normally, the display (touch panel) 54F is displayed in conjunction with the display of the variable display device 278F (based on the display control of the effect control unit 151F), and the game points are displayed on the display 54F in accordance with the decrease of the game points. The example which displays the image which alert | reports that there are few remaining can be given.

  When the display 54F performs a display operation with a display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151F to the relay board 14F, the relay board 14F simply relays the signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151F and displays it as it is. It suffices to have a function of transmitting to the device 54F. On the other hand, the signal form of the display control signal for causing the display 54F to perform the display operation may be different from the signal form of the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151F. In addition to the switching circuit 141F, a conversion circuit that converts the signal form may be provided on the relay board 14F.

  Further, when the switching condition is established, the display image displayed on the display unit 54F by the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151F and the display control signal transmitted from the effect control unit 151F are displayed on the variable display device 278F. The images may be the same or different. If they are different, it is necessary to store two types of image data, that is, image data for the variable display device 278F and image data for the display 54F in the effect control unit 151F.

  The game ball number display 29F may be configured to be displayed and controlled by the main control unit 161F, or the effect control unit 151F may transmit a command related to the number of game balls from the main control unit 161F to the effect control unit 151F. It is good also as a structure which controls display.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment described above, the display information of variable display can be displayed on the display 54F of the P stand 2F, so that it is possible to provide a game with a high effect in combination with the variable display device 278F. In addition, when the condition for displaying game information sent from the CU3F side on the display unit 54F is established, the display control for displaying the game information on the display unit 54F is executed by the CU3F. In this case, the display 54F can be used not only for the game effect but also for displaying the game information by the CU 3F, and the display control burden of the P stand 2F accompanying the display of the game information can be reduced.

<Notification process for abnormalities in card units and pachinko machines>
FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining notification processing when an abnormality is detected as a result of mutual authentication.

  Referring to FIG. 54, when an abnormality occurs in CU control unit 323F, security board 325F, payout control unit 171F, or main control board 16F, notification is given in the direction indicated by the arrow in FIG. In this case, the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F, the payout control unit 171F, or the main control board 16F may be replaced with another illegally manufactured product, or may malfunction or break down due to noise or the like. Or offline status due to disconnection or the like. The key management server 800F shown in FIG. 54 is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F.

  First, when an abnormality occurs due to the security board 325F of the CU 3F, the CU control part 323F detects the abnormality as a result of the mutual authentication performed between the CU control part 323F and the security board 325F described above. This mutual authentication includes device authentication using a session key in addition to serial ID authentication and device authentication described later.

  The serial ID is a serial ID (substrate serial ID) of the security board 325F, and is stored in the ROM of the security chip 325bF when the security chip 325bF of the security board 325F is manufactured. When the CU3F is loaded into the amusement hall and connected to the hall server 801F, the board serial ID is downloaded from the key management server 800F of the key management center via the hall server 801F and stored in the CU control unit 323F. The

  When the CU control unit 323F detects an abnormality of the security board 325F, the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F of the fact and transmits an abnormality notification command to the display control unit 350F of the CU3F. The CU control unit 323F controls the display 312F to display that an abnormality has occurred and causes the display control unit 350F to perform an abnormality notification by lighting or blinking an abnormality notification lamp (not shown). Further, the CU control unit 323F transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred from the external communication unit to the hall management computer.

  When an abnormality occurs in the CU control unit 323F of the CU3F, the security board 325F detects the occurrence of the abnormality by the above-described mutual authentication, and notifies the payout control unit 171F of the signal (abnormality notification signal) indicating that. In response, the payout control unit 171F notifies the main control board 16F that an abnormality has occurred. As described above, main control board 16F performs control for operating the abnormality notification lamp and transmits a signal indicating that an abnormality has occurred to the hall management computer.

  When the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the security control unit 325F notifies the CU control unit 323F to that effect, and the CU control unit 323F notifies the hall server 801F accordingly.

  As described above, when the security board 325F detects an abnormality in the CU control unit 323F, the security board 325F notifies the payout control unit 171F of the fact. On the other hand, when detecting an abnormality in the payout control unit 171F, the security board 325F notifies the CU control unit 323F. The notification destination of the abnormality occurrence by the security board 325F is different. The reason for this is that even if the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred is notified that an abnormality has occurred, no abnormality notification control is performed and no abnormality prevention measure is provided. Moreover, the security board 325F has a communication control function but does not have an abnormality notification control function. Therefore, the abnormality notification cannot be controlled by itself, and for this reason, notification is made that an abnormality has occurred in the direction of the control unit opposite to the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The payout controller 171F that has received the notification of the occurrence of the abnormality from the security board 325F notifies the main control board 16F accordingly. In response to the notification, the main control board 16F performs control for abnormality notification similar to that described above.

  When an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, the fact is detected by the security board 325F, the fact that the abnormality has occurred is notified to the CU control unit 323F, and the CU control unit 323F performs the above-described abnormality notification control. Notify the hall server 801F that an abnormality has occurred. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the payout control unit 171F, it is detected that the main control board 16F has occurred, and upon receiving the notification, the above-described abnormality notification control is performed.

  As described above, the payout control board 17F detects and notifies the abnormality to the main control board 16F when an abnormality occurs in the security board 325F, and informs the main control board 16F of the abnormality when the abnormality occurs. Detected and notifies the security board 325F that an abnormality has occurred. As with the security board 325F described above, the payout control board 17F is also controlled for anomaly notification even when a notice is given to the control unit in which an abnormality has occurred when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a notification is sent to the control unit or control board on the opposite side of the control unit where the abnormality has occurred. The security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and have a function of performing abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Absent. In the above description, the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F are not connected to an abnormality notification means such as an abnormality notification lamp or an abnormality notification display, and perform abnormality notification control themselves even when an abnormality is detected. Although described as having no function, an abnormality notification function may be provided in the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F to directly notify that an abnormality has occurred.

<Encryption key used for communication between key management server and communication control IC>
Next, an encryption key used for communication between the key management server and the communication control IC will be described. FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining an encryption key used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF. First, encryption keys used for communication from the key management server to the communication control IC 325aF mainly include a board shipment key, a board initial key, a board authentication key, a main authentication key, a temporary authentication key, and an effective key (commercial). , Communication key 1 (session key) and communication key 2 (session key).

  The board shipment key is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, and is used only for encryption of a communication test message before shipment. The board initial key is used for communication of the CU control unit-SC, and is received by the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. Authentication communication (substrate initial key mode) using the substrate initial key is permitted (timed operation) only for a limited period. Here, in the board initial key mode, as described above, it is necessary to communicate normally with the hall server at least once to acquire the board initial key, and thus security is ensured.

  Here, the “limited period” is a limited period of two days, for example. In this way, by enabling timed operation, even if the key cannot be exchanged with the key management server immediately after the system is installed in the hall, the hall will start operating immediately after the system is installed. It becomes possible. In addition, as a limited period, you may set the period defined in one day, for example to every morning from 9:00 to 17:00.

  The above-described board initial key mode has a restriction that enables authentication communication using the board initial key for a limited period of time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the amount of money that can be used ( Card balance or cash) may be limited. Alternatively, when the number of symbol variations in the variable display device reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. Alternatively, when the cumulative number of jackpots reaches a certain number, the game may be forcibly terminated and the gaming machine may be controlled to be disabled. In addition, it may be possible to allow only a game by inserting cash and prevent a game using the remaining card amount, or to limit the game to a game using a holding ball.

  The board authentication key is an encryption key that is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC and is received as part of the board security information from the key management server. By performing authentication communication using the board authentication key, the communication mode (board authentication key mode) is switched from the timed operation using the board initial key to the permanent operation (normal operation). This board authentication key is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit and the RAM of the SC.

  For both the timed operation using the board initial key and the permanent operation using the board authentication key, the CU control unit 323F receives the valid key stored in the hall server, and the SC 325bF receives the valid key as the communication control IC 325aF. This is realized by enabling communication between the P platform and the CU.

  This authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, is generated by the SC 325bF from the update information received from the key management server, and is stored in the RAM of the SC 325bF. The communication control IC 325aF is also similar to the SC 325bF. Are generated from the update information and stored in the RAM of the communication control IC 325aF. Note that this authentication key may be acquired from a key management server or the like. Further, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF may generate themselves without receiving update information from a key management server or the like. In addition, the CU control unit 323F and the communication control IC 325aF themselves generate predetermined second data by acquiring predetermined first data from a key management server or the like, and the authentication key is obtained from the first data and the second data. You may make it produce | generate.

  The temporary authentication key is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and until the authentication key is generated (or until the set allowable time (for example, two days) elapses), the SC 325bF Used for encryption communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The encrypted communication using the temporary authentication key (temporary authentication key mode) is allowed (timed operation) only for a limited period (for example, 2 days). The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF store temporary authentication keys in their respective ROMs from the manufacturing stage. The valid key (commercial) is a key that is received by the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F and transmitted (set) to the communication control IC 325aF during the initial communication with the hall server. Communication with P devices becomes possible by setting the effective key. The valid key is data for activating the communication control IC 325aF. In other words, the valid key is permission information for permitting communication between the CU and the P platform.

  The communication key 1 (session key) is used for communication between the CU control unit and the SC, is used for business message communication for anti-game machines, and is created every business day by the SC 325bF using some variable. For example, a counter value (random number) or date / time information may be used as the variable. The communication key 2 (session key) is used for communication between the SC and the communication control IC, and is used for business message communication for gaming machines.

  Note that even if the key described above has a configuration in which the key data is embedded in each part as it is, the information for generating the key data is stored in each part. The key data may be generated by using the key.

  Next, a method for acquiring an encryption key and a method for performing encrypted communication using the acquired encryption key will be described. First, the SC 325bF obtains an effective key via the CU control unit 323F at the first communication with the hall server. The SC 325bF transmits (sets) the acquired effective key to the communication control IC 325aF, thereby enabling communication with the P units. The CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key at the first communication with the hall server, and is stored in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF generates a substrate initial key from the embedded information at the time of manufacture and stores it in the RAM. The SC 325bF performs cryptographic authentication with the CU control unit 323F using the acquired board initial key, and performs cryptographic communication with the CU control unit 323F in a timely manner using the board initial key.

  Further, the hall server that has received the connection request sent from the CU control unit 323F when the power is turned on returns a unified store code for identifying the game arcade where the hall server is installed to the CU control unit 323F. Specifically, the unified store code is transmitted from the input / output interface of the hall server to the CU control unit 323F according to the control of the CPU of the hall server.

  On the other hand, authentication is performed between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code stored as the initial information in both. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F. A board connection request and a board connection response are exchanged on the condition that the authentication using the board manufacturer code is successful (see FIG. 71). The unified store code is included in the board connection request transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF, and the SC 325bF acquires the unified store code by receiving the board connection request.

  Next, the CU control unit 323F requests the board security information from the key management server and receives the board security information transmitted from the key management server via the hall server, so that the board security information is included in the board security information. Get the board authentication key. The CU control unit performs cryptographic authentication with the SC using the acquired board authentication key, and performs cryptographic communication with the SC using the board authentication key. Note that the CU control unit 323F does not change the key from the board initial key to the board authentication key immediately after obtaining the board authentication key, but on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state as described later. Change the key.

  The board authentication key may be generated by the CU control unit 323F itself instead of being acquired from the key management server or the like, and the CU control unit 323F acquires the first predetermined data from the key management server or the like. Predetermined second data may be generated, and a board authentication key may be generated from the first data and the second data.

  Next, the SC 325bF performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the stored temporary authentication key. Then, the SC decrypts the update information acquired from the key management server by performing cryptographic communication with the CU control unit using the board authentication key, and inquires about the board inquiry number. If the inquiry board inquiry numbers match, the SC generates a main authentication key from the update information, and performs cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF using the generated main authentication key. The authentication key is not stored in the communication control IC 325aF from the time of shipment, and is generated from the update information as in the SC325bF.

  Next, the SC notifies the CU control unit of the communication key 1 and performs communication with the CU control unit using the communication key 1 to enable business message communication with the gaming machine. Become. In addition, the SC receives a notification of the communication key 2 from the communication control IC by setting an effective key for the communication control IC, and performs subsequent communication with the communication control IC using the communication key 2. Thus, business message communication with a gaming machine becomes possible.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU control unit and the SC>
Next, communication within the CU3F shown in FIG. 52 will be described. In particular, communication between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b of the security board 325F will be described. Here, an outline of commands and responses transmitted and received between the CU control unit 323F and the security chip (SC) 325b will be described.

  A command named board connection request is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board connection request command requests the SC 325bF to connect to a gaming machine (P unit 2F). A response named “substrate connection response” is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the board connection response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of a response to the board connection request.

  A board shipment key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board shipping key request command is for requesting the board shipping key from the SC 325bF. A board shipment key response response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipment key response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipment key.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board manufacturer code is a code that identifies the manufacturer that manufactured the security board 325F, and is stored in the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 is for requesting the board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  A board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board maker code authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board maker code authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 is a request for the board serial ID authentication to the SC 325bF. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The board serial ID authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 requests the board 325bF to authenticate the board serial ID. A response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board serial ID authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of board serial ID authentication information.

  The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  A command of the board initial key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The board initial key authentication request 2 command requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board initial key. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board initial key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the board initial key authentication result.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 requests the SC 325bF to authenticate the board authentication key. A response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 notifies the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result of the board authentication key.

  The board shipment key authentication request 1 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 1 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. The response of the board authentication key authentication response 1 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 1 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  The board shipment key authentication request 2 command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. The command of the board shipping key authentication request 2 is for requesting the board 325bF to authenticate the board shipping key. A response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board shipping key authentication response 2 is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the board shipping key authentication result.

  A version information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This version information notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the version of the board authentication key. A version information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the version information response notifies the CU control unit 323F that the version information has been received.

  A board authentication result notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. A response of the board authentication result response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the board authentication result response is to notify the CU control unit 323F of the authentication result between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF.

  A security board inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board inquiry instruction notification command requests security board inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the security board inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of the security board inquiry information.

  A security board information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This security board information notification command notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. A response of the security board information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the security board information has been received.

  A counter information request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This counter information request command requests counter information from the SC 325bF. A response of the counter information response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the counter information response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the counter information.

  A communication key request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This communication key request command requests the SC325bF for a communication key. A response of the communication key response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response of the communication key response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the communication key.

  A gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command requests gaming machine chip inquiry information from the SC 325bF. A response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result notifies the CU control unit 323F of gaming machine chip inquiry information.

  A gaming machine chip information notification command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This gaming machine chip information notification command notifies the SC325bF of the result of checking gaming machine chip information. A response of the gaming machine chip information result is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. This response to the gaming machine chip information result notifies the CU control unit 323F that the gaming machine chip verification result has been received.

  A substrate state request command is transmitted from the CU control unit 323F to the SC 325bF. This board status request command requests the board status to the SC 325bF. A response of the substrate state response is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the substrate state response notifies the CU control unit 323F of the substrate state.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on each of the CU3F side and the pachinko machine side and its transmission / reception mode. With reference to FIG. 56, main data among various data stored on each of the CU (card unit) 3F side and the P stand (pachinko machine) 2 side and its transmission / reception mode will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the P ball 2F side calculates the variation in the number of game balls, and stores and manages the current latest number of game balls. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of possessed balls (the number of cards possessed), the number of accumulated balls, and the remaining card amount (remaining amount) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 56 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main control chip ID (main control chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main control chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID ( (Payout control chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main control chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information on the main control chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main control chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Both the CU and the P platform transmit the “sequential number” added to the message. Further, both the CU and the P platform store the “serial number” received from the other party. There are three types of “serial number”: “normal serial number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Normal sequence number” indicates the sequence number of the message. The “normal serial number” is transmitted by counting up (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission with the initial value “1” on the CU3F side (primary station side). However, the “normal serial number” is not counted up at the time of retransmission. The P station 2F side (secondary station side) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that there is no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The “additional serial number” is a serial number used when the CU 3F requests the P platform 2F to add game balls. The “counting serial number” is a serial number used when the P stand 2F requests the CU 3F to count game balls.

  Only the CU3F has a normal serial number update right. When the same normal serial number as the transmitted normal serial number is returned, the CU 3F stores the normal serial number as a backup and transmits the updated normal serial number. Only the CU3F has the addition update right of the addition serial number. When the addition request is made, the CU 3F transmits an addition sequence number obtained by adding 1 to the addition sequence number used for communication to the P unit 2F. The P base 2F returns the same addition serial number when accepting the request. When rejecting the request, the previously received addition sequence number (the addition sequence number received this time-1) is returned. Only the P platform 2F has the addition update right of the counting sequence number. When making a count request, the P platform 2F transmits a count sequence number added to the count sequence number that has been used for communication to the CU 3F. When the CU3F accepts the request, it returns the same counting sequence number. When rejecting the request, the received counting sequence number (counting sequence number-1 received this time) is returned.

  In the following, regarding “normal serial number”, a configuration in which the serial number received by the CU 3F at the time of transmission is counted up (+1) and transmitted will be described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and each of the P base 2F and the CU 3F or the P base 2F counts (+1) the serial number received at the time of transmission, and the other receives the serial number received. May be transmitted as it is.

  The “addition serial number” and “counting serial number” are special serial numbers that are counted up in the addition request processing and the count request processing, respectively. Hereinafter, a description will be given of a configuration in which “normal serial number” is also counted up when the “additional serial number” and “counting serial number” are counted up. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and may be configured to stop the “normal sequence number” from being counted up when the “additional sequence number” and the “counting sequence number” are counted up. In the following, “normal serial number” is simply referred to as “serial number”. The “additional sequence number” and “counting sequence number” are also collectively referred to as “request sequence number”.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM of the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 52) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later. However, instead of this, or in addition to the game ball counter, the number of game balls may be included in the latest game table information.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”. Here, the “prize ball” is a ball that is paid out when a ball wins a winning opening, and is a safe ball. The “fired ball” is a ball fired by the gaming machine. When there is a back ball, the number of balls obtained by subtracting the back ball is the number of fired balls. The “back ball” is a ball in which the fired ball returns without jumping onto the board surface. The “out mouth passing ball” is a ball that has passed through the out mouth 154F, and the total number of the out balls and the safe balls means the number of balls passing through the out mouth.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission. You may make it memorize | store by adding the number of game balls transmitted immediately before to this last game machine information.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of balls, the remaining amount, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total subtraction are stored in the cumulative data storage area in the RAM. The number of balls (the total number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of the game ball counter (also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, hall management). An error notification may be made by a computer or hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side may be replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 56, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the remaining card amount of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 52) stores the stored balls in response to an input requesting the use of the stored balls (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 52) is an input requesting the use of a holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 52) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card remaining amount in response to an input requesting the use of the card remaining amount (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, the prepaid balance, the number of balls, or the number of balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls that are deducted is the number of balls The number of balls to be added to the counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  In the gaming system according to the present embodiment, on the other hand, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image in which, in a conventional encapsulated pachinko machine in which each counter is provided, it is prohibited to grab a ball before counting remaining on a plate by hand and use it for a wagon service.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. Has been. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Frame configuration used in communication>
Next, communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F according to the present embodiment will be described in more detail. A message used in the communication is composed of a frame having a predetermined format. Transmission data (message) is always transmitted in units of one frame. In other words, the message is not divided and transmitted. Moreover, when transmitting a message | telegram continuously, the space | interval of 1 millisecond or more is opened.

  One frame of transmission data includes a data length, a normal sequence number, an addition sequence number, a counting sequence number, a command, and a data portion. “Data length” indicates the data length of the transmission data (serial number to data portion (business message range)). “Command” is a command code of the message. The “data part” is data of a message.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

<< 1. Recovery request, 2. Recovery response >>
First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. In response to this recovery request, a response named recovery response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  The recovery request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F after the CU 3F completes the authentication. The recovery request command requests recovery information from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F, and the CU 3F transmits the command first after the authentication is completed. The recovery request includes “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, and “previous final transmission count serial number”. “Serial number” is a sequence number (1 to 255). “Command” is a command code for the recovery request, and is represented by binary data in hexadecimal representation.

  The “last last transmission serial number” is the serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P unit 2F at the previous connection. When “Previous Last Transmission Sequence Number” is “0”, this indicates a state where there is no stored sequence number. The “previous last transmission serial number” is a serial number that stores the “sequential number” as the previous final transmission serial number (serial number) on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received at the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. It is.

  “Previous last transmission count sequence number” is a count sequence number of a response to the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the previous connection. “Last transmission count sequence number” indicates that there is no stored sequence number when “0”. The “previous last transmission count sequence number” is a sequence number that stores the count sequence number as the previous last transmission count sequence number on the P unit 2F and CU3F side when the status information response is received to the CU3F when the P unit 2F transmits the status information response. .

  In the recovery process (number of balls) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2F Is matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. If they do not match, the count request ball count = 0 is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program.

  The P stand 2F refers to the “previous last transmission count sequence number” notified from the CU 3F, and when the CU 3F has not performed the count process for the count request, sets the count request ball count = 0 in the subtraction register. The user program executed on the P platform 2F is notified. When the counting process has been performed by the CU 3F, the count request ball number notified to the CU 3F is set in the subtraction register and notified to the user program. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match. Further, when the “store code” notified from the security board 325F and the “store code” held in the P stand 2F do not match, the user program side is notified of the store code mismatch via the register.

  The response of the recovery response is a response to the recovery information held in the P base 2F to the CU 3F. Recovery information includes “sequential number”, “command”, “previous last transmission serial number”, “last inserted card ID”, “previous card insertion time”, “previous last transmission addition serial number”, “game information storage presence / absence”, “ “Previous Game Table Information” and “Previous Game Information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Previous last transmission serial number” is data of a serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the time of the previous connection. When “0”, there is no stored serial number. “Previously inserted card ID” is data of the card ID of the card that was being inserted at the previous connection, and “0” indicates that there is no inserted card. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores and holds the card ID that was being inserted based on the information transmitted from the CU3F.

  “Previous card insertion time” is data on the insertion time of a card that was being inserted at the time of the previous connection, and when it is “0”, there is no inserted card. This data is also represented by year information as 2 digits YY, month information as 2 digits MM, day information as 2 digits DD, time information as 2 digits hh, minute information as 2 digits mm, and second information as 2 digits ss. It is. The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is an addition serial number included in the response of the status information response last transmitted to the CU 3F at the previous connection, and when “0”, there is no additional serial number. “Game information storage presence / absence” is “0x00” when game information is not stored, and “0x01” when game information is stored.

  “Previous game machine information” is game machine information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “game ball number”, “game ball information”, “count request ball number”, and “counting serial number”. “Number of game balls” is the number of game balls previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game ball information” is the game ball information notified last time. The game ball information is, for example, information such as the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls and the total number of prize balls notified to the CU 3F last time. The “count required ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. “Counting sequence number” is the counting sequence number notified to the CU3F last time.

  The “previous game information” is game information previously notified to the CU 3F, and includes information on “number of game information” and “game information 1” to “game information n”. The “number of game information” is the number (0 to n) of game information notified to the CU 3F last time. Note that n = 0 to 22 and the length is variable. “Game information 1” is the game information 1 previously notified to the CU 3F. “Game information n” is the game information n previously notified to the CU 3F. The game information n includes, for example, type information or game prize ball information that was previously notified to the CU 3F.

  The “previous last transmission addition serial number” is a serial number stored as the last final transmission addition serial number on the CU3F side and the P base 2F when the status information request is transmitted in the CU3F and when the status information request is received in the P base 2F.

  In the recovery process (game information) of the P base 2F, the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P base 2F If the “store code” does not match, it is processed as no recovery data. If they match, the following processing is performed.

  When there is recovery data of gaming information, “gaming information storage presence / absence” is stored: set to 0x01, and recovery data held by the P table 2F is set in “previous gaming machine information” and “previous gaming information”. When there is no recovery data of game information or when the last transmission sequence number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is set to “0x00” without storage, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. set. However, the number of game balls notified last time is set as the number of game balls. If all the store codes held by the P platform 2F are “F” (hexadecimal number), it is determined that the store codes match.

  When there is no recovery information for game information or when the last transmission sequence number is 0, “game information storage presence / absence” is not stored “0x00”, and “previous game machine information” and “previous game information” are set to ALL “0”. ”Is set. Further, when the “last previous transmission serial number” process notified from the P unit 2F has not been performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using the previous game machine information. When the “last last transmission serial number” process is being performed, the CU 3F performs the recovery process using only the previous game machine information. However, the number of balls is not recovered.

  In addition, when the recovery process cannot be performed due to a mismatch of communication partners (for example, replacement of the CU 3F or the P base 2F), it may be possible to manually correct by POS based on the display information of the P base 2F. For example, the display information of the P platform 2F can be displayed using the liquid crystal display screen of the variable display device 278F. Alternatively, a display device that is controlled by the payout control unit 171F may be further provided on the P platform 2F, and information for manual correction may be displayed on the display device. Note that POS refers to a free gift management system for exchanging free gifts and managing free gifts. In addition, POS is not limited to those for exchanging prizes or managing prizes, but records general sales information for each sale of merchandise at a store and uses the aggregated results as inventory management or marketing materials. It may be management (Point Of Sales system).

<< 3. Recovery request 2, 4. Recovery response 2 >>
A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F.

  The command of the recovery request 2 is to notify the addition recovery information to the P unit 2F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “previous last transmission additional serial number”, and “number of additional balls”. Yes. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The recovery request 2 is transmitted when the CU 3F determines that the additional ball recovery process needs to be performed on the P platform 2F. The CU 3F compares the “previous last transmission addition sequence number” included in the recovery response received from the P platform 2F with the “previous final transmission addition sequence number” stored in the CU 3F. It is determined that processing is not necessary, and in the case of mismatch, it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary. When it is determined that addition ball recovery processing is necessary, a recovery request 2 is transmitted.

  The “last last transmission addition serial number” included in the recovery request 2 is data of the addition serial number of the command of the status information request last transmitted to the P-unit 2F at the time of the previous connection. This is data on the number of balls added.

  Next, the recovery process of the P platform 2F will be described in detail. In the recovery process of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “previous last transmission serial number” notified from the CU 3F based on the recovery request 2, the number of balls is referred to the game ball. This is a process of performing addition.

  The response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F on the P platform 2F, and includes “serial number”, “command”, and “recovery result”. The “recovery result” is a recovery result process OK when “0x00”, and a recovery result process NG when “0x01”. In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, the process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  When performing the recovery process (additional number of balls) of the P unit 2F, if the P unit 2F has not performed the process of the “last last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F, the process OK is processed as a “recovery result” in the CU3F And the number of balls to be added notified from the CU3F is set in the addition register and notified to the user program. However, if the game table state 1 responds with the game ball addition result (Bit5 = 1) in the state information response when the CU state of the state information request to be described later is a game ball addition request (Bit = 1), a “recovery” is sent to the CU3F. Processing NG is returned as a “result”, and the number of balls to be added = 0 is set in the addition register and notified to the user program.

  When the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is the same as the “previous final transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P unit 2F, set the number of balls to be added = 0 in the addition register, The user program is notified, and processing NG is returned as a “recovery result” to the CU 3F.

  In addition, at the timing when the recovery process is completed (for example, when the recovery completion flag is set), the “previous last transmission addition serial number” notified from the CU3F is notified to the user program via the register regardless of the recovery result. . When the recovery request 2 is not received, the “previous last transmission addition serial number” held by the chip of the P platform 2F is notified to the user program at the timing when the recovery process is completed.

<< 5. 5. Communication start request, Communication start response >>
A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. In response to this communication start request, a response to the communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  The communication start request command notifies the P base 2F that communication has started normally. The P base 2F that has received the communication start request clears the recovery information stored so far. The communication start request command includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. The CU 3F sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after the communication start request, and the P unit 2F also sets the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value) after receiving the communication start request.

  The response of the communication start response notifies the CU 3F that the communication has started normally, and the CU 3F clears the recovery information. The response of the communication start response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 7. 7. Communication end request, Communication end response >>
A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. In response to this communication end request, a response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  The communication end request command notifies the P unit 2F that the communication has ended normally, and includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response of the communication end response is to notify the CU 3F that the communication has ended normally, and the CU 3F and the P stand 2F stop communication and wait for restart after the notification. The response of the communication end response includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

<< 9. Status information request >>
A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. Further, the status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side shown in FIG.

  Specific data of this status information request includes data of “sequential number”, “command”, “CU state”, “addition ball number”, “additional serial number”, and “counting serial number”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “CU state” represents the state of the CU 3F notified to the P base 2F, and indicates that the card is being inserted when Bit 0 is “1”, and the card is not inserted when “0”. That is, Bit0 represents a state in which a card (general card / member card) is inserted in CU3F. In addition, a general card is being inserted by depositing a stock card (general 0 yen 0 coin card) stocked in advance in the card stock section of the CU3F.

  When Bit 1 is “1”, the card unit is being opened, and when it is “0”, the card unit is being closed. That is, Bit1 notifies the card unit opening state to P stand 2F according to the state of CU3F. The timing for notifying the opening of the card unit is, for example, when the opening of the card unit is completed. The timing for notifying that the card unit is closed is, for example, when the store is closed. When the same state changes from opening to closing, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F as a count information of all the game balls it holds as a count information response.

  When Bit 2 is “1”, the card return preparation is in progress, and when “0”, the card return preparation is not in progress. The CU3F notifies the P stand 2F of “preparing for card return” for a certain period (10 seconds) by setting this bit during each operation of card return, simple leaving, and meal break. When the operation of the counting button 28F is detected, the P table 2F has operated the counting button once or a plurality of times if it receives a status information request with the bit being prepared for card return turned on. Regardless of the operation duration, regardless of the operation duration time, all the stored game balls are notified to the CU 3F by the status information response as the number of balls.

  When Bit 3 is “1”, a game ball addition request is shown, and when Bit 3 is “0”, no game ball addition request is shown. That is, Bit3 requests addition of game balls (the number of added balls) at the time of ball lending, holding ball payout, and stored ball payout operations.

  When Bit 4 is “1”, completion of counting ball reception is indicated, and “0” indicates that counting ball is not received. Bit 4 notifies the P stand 2F that the receipt is completed when the counting ball is received. That is, it is used to confirm delivery of the response “count ball” of the state information response. Bit 5 to Bit 7 are not used.

  The “added ball number” is the added ball number of game balls, and the data of the added ball number is valid only when Bit 3 in the CU state is “1”. The “addition serial number” is an addition sequence number (0 to 255), and is notified by updating (+1) the sequence number when a game ball addition request is made. The “counting sequence number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and the count sequence number received when the count is requested is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the counting sequence number is not established, the counting is not received.

<< 10. Status information response >>
In response to the status information request, a response of the status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the status information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  The specific data of this status information request includes “sequential number”, “command”, “number of game balls”, “number of fired balls”, “number of balls passed through the outro”, “total number of ball balls”, “count request ball” Data of “number”, “counting serial number”, “launch strength”, “game table state”, “tamper detection information” and “game information” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The “number of game balls” is the current number of game balls (the number of game balls as a result of calculating addition / subtraction). “Number of game balls” calculates the number of game balls held by the CU 3F using the “total number of ball balls”, “number of fired balls”, and “count ball number” described later. Thereafter, the CU 3F checks whether the calculated number of game balls of the CU 3F matches the number of game balls of the P unit 2F.

  “Number of fired balls” is the number of fired balls (summed if there are balls fired multiple times at the time of transmission). However, if there are back balls, subtract the number of back balls. That is, the “number of fired balls” (subtraction) is data to be subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  “The number of balls that have passed through the outlet” is the number of balls that have passed through the outlet 154F (when there are multiple passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together).

  “Total number of prize balls” is the total number of prize balls in the prize ball information 1-n. The prize ball information 1-n is the number of prize balls for each prize opening type such as a start opening, a big winning opening, a winning opening (ordinary winning opening), and the like. Note that the “total prize ball count” (addition) does not include the “addition request ball count” transmitted from the CU 3F. Further, the CU3F adds the data of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls held. When the total prize ball number data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not add the number of game balls.

  The “count request ball number” is the number of game balls requested to be counted. That is, the “count ball” (subtraction) is data that is subtracted from the number of game balls held by the CU 3F and added to the number of cards held. The number of counting balls is not used for the data of the number of subtraction balls transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. When the data is received without holding the card, the CU 3F does not subtract the number of game balls. CU3F does not perform subtraction when the number of game balls held by CU3F itself is zero.

  However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls held by the gaming machine are counted and set as the number of counting balls. When the card unit opening state is open, the operation of the counting button 28F is performed, so that the number of game balls is counted and set as the number of counting balls. However, when the card unit opening state changes from opening to closing, the game balls are automatically counted and set as the counting balls without waiting for the operation of the counting button 28F.

  The “counting serial number” is a counting sequence number (0 to 255), and is updated (+1) and notified when a counting is requested.

“Launch strength” is the strength for launching a game ball.
The “gaming table state” indicates the state of the P table 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P table 2F. It includes information on “table state 3” and “game table error state”.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 1” indicates whether the game is permitted or prohibited. When “0”, the game is permitted, and when “1”, the game is prohibited. Bit1 indicates whether or not the fan (player) is playing (balls are being fired), and is “0” when waiting (the fan is not firing a ball), and “1”. A game is in progress (a state in which a fan is firing a ball), but there is a game ball, and a game is being played in a state in which the launch handle (hitting ball operation handle 25F) is touched (a state in which the touch sensor is touched).

  Bit 2 indicates the presence / absence of a game ball (detection of no game ball). When “0”, there are a number of game balls, and when “1”, there is no game balls. Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. That is, it shows whether or not all the floating balls in the game area 27F have been collected. However, it does not include ball stoppages due to the fire stop switch (also called single shot switch). When it is “0”, the game is incomplete (a state where all balls are unconfirmed), and when it is “1”, a game is complete (a state where all balls are confirmed). If the completion of the game is not confirmed for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball firing, the P stand 2F times out and the game is completed.

  Bit 3 indicates whether or not the whereabouts of all the fired balls are confirmed in a state where the fire of the balls is stopped. “0” indicates game ball indefinite (state where all balls are undetermined), and “1” indicates game ball definite (state where all balls are definite). Here, for example, if the P ball 2F has not been able to confirm the whereabouts of the game ball for 15 seconds or more after stopping the ball launching, it will time out and determine the game ball. Further, the P stand 2F is set in a state in which the whereabouts of the game balls are determined (game ball determination) when the power is turned on or the RAM is cleared.

  Bit 4 indicates whether or not there is a game ball count request (whether or not a count button is pressed). When “0”, there is no request, and when “1”, there is a count ball payout request at the start of counting. When the counting operation is detected, the P platform transmits this counting request ON state information response to the CU 3F and confirms whether or not the counting request has been received. When “1”, it is a count request. Bit 5 indicates the processing result of the game ball addition, which is addition OK when “0” and addition NG when “1”. In addition, when the P platform 2F makes an addition NG response, the addition sequence number is notified without being updated. Bit 6 indicates a pressed state of the firing stop switch. When “0”, the switch is released, and when “1”, the switch is pressed. Bit 7 is reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 2” represents jackpot information jackpot 1 (all jackpots), and “1” is set during all jackpots. Bit 1 represents big hit 2 of big hit information (big hit + small hit), and sets “1” during all big hits and small hits. Bit 2 represents the big hit 3 of the big hit information (big hit of the big ball), and “1” is set during the big hit where the big ball is big. Bit 3 represents big hit 4 of big hit information (big hit of small ball), and “1” is set during big hit with small ball. Bit 4 represents a big hit 5 of the big hit information (a big hit in the outgoing ball), and “1” is set during the big hit in the middle of the outgoing ball. Bit5 to Bit7 are reserved.

  Bit 0 of “gaming table state 3” represents a big hit in the gaming state information + short time, and “1” is set in the big hit and short time. Bit1 represents the probability change of the game state information, and “1” is set during the probability change. Bit 2 represents the time of the game state information, and “1” is set during the time reduction. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “gaming table error state” indicates an error code occurring in the P table 2F, and each error code is expressed using Bit0 to Bit5. Note that there is no error when Bit 0 to Bit 5 are all “0”. Bit 6 is information for specifying a place where an error has occurred, and represents payout control when “0” and main control when “1”. Bit 7 indicates an error output method. When it is “0”, only an alarm is issued, and when it is “1”, it indicates an alarm + output to the hall server 801F.

  The “fraud detection information” is information detected by the P stand 2F at the time when the command for requesting the status information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. , “Illegal detection information 1” to “fraud detection information 4” and “additional serial number” are included.

  The “fraud detection state 1” is fraud detection information of the main control board 16F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 1” indicates fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit1 indicates that it is the positive detection information that the magnetic sensor is not detected when “1”. Bit2 represents fraud detection information for fraud detection when “1”. Bit3 to Bit7 are reserved.

  The “fraud detection state 2” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 2” indicates fraud detection information for opening the glass plate when “1”. Bit 1 represents fraud detection information for opening the frame body when “1”. Bit 2 represents fraud detection information of radio wave sensor detection when “1”. Bit 3 represents fraud detection information of the proximity sensor abnormality when “1”. Bit 4 represents fraud detection information for detecting a prize ball goto when “1”. Here, the “goto” is an illegal act of acquiring a ball in an illegal manner in a pachinko or slot machine. Bit 5 represents fraud detection information for complex goth detection when “1”. Bit 6 represents fraud detection information for fraud addition detection when “1”. Bit 7 represents fraud detection information for door / frame opening detection (nighttime) when “1”.

  “Injustice detection information 1” is data indicating information on the detection of the winning ball sensor got (number of winning inconsistent balls). The “fraud detection information 1” is valid when Bit 4 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “injustice detection information 2” is data indicating information of composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT inconsistent ball number). That is, it is data indicating information when an inconsistency between the number of shot balls and the number of out balls (the number of balls passing through the outlet) is detected. The “fraud detection information 2” is valid when Bit 5 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. “Falsification detection information 3” is data indicating information of fraud addition detection (number of fraud addition balls). The “fraud detection information 3” is valid when Bit 6 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”. The “fraud detection information 4” is data indicating information on the number of times the frame body is opened at night. The “fraud detection information 4” is valid when the Bit 7 of the “fraud detection state 2” is “1”.

  Bit 7 of “illegal detection information 4” is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 4 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 4 occurrence when “1”. Bit 6 is information indicating whether or not the nighttime monitoring switch abnormality 3 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 3 occurrence when “1”. Bit 5 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 2 has occurred, and indicates “normal” when “0” and abnormal 2 occurrence when “1”. Bit 4 is information indicating whether or not the night monitoring switch abnormality 1 has occurred, and represents “normal” when “0” and abnormal 1 occurrence when “1”. Bits 0 to 3 are information indicating the number of opening of the main body frame. When the bit is “0”, there is no opening, and “1” to “15” indicate the number of opening. The number of times of opening is counted up to 15 times, and the count after 16 times is held at 15 times.

  “Addition sequence number” is a sequence number for addition, and the addition sequence number received at the time of addition request is notified as it is. However, if the continuity of the addition sequence number is not established, the addition NG is notified.

  The “fraud detection state 3” is fraud detection information of the payout control board 17F. Bit 0 of “fraud detection state 3” indicates fraud detection information of other store game ball detection when “1”. Bit1 to Bit7 are reserved. In addition, the other store game ball detection is, for example, a sensor is provided in the collection balls passing path of P units, the sensor reads identification information (such as a marking on the surface) provided on the game ball, the game ball of the own store It is determined whether or not it matches the identification information. In the case of a mismatch, it is assumed that the game balls of other stores are mixed in the game balls, and Bit 0 of “injustice detection state 3” is set to “1” and notified to the CU 3F.

  The “game information” is information on the P device 2F at the time when the command for requesting the state information is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P device 2F. The “game information number”, “type information 1” to “type information n” , “Count information 1” to “count information n”.

  “Number of game information” is the number (n) of type information / count information, and n = 0 to 22 (variable length). “Type information 1” to “Type information n” indicate game type information 1 to game type information n, respectively. The type information is data type information from Bit 4 to Bit 7 and indicates the data type of the game information. When it is “0”, there is no information, when it is “1”, when it is “2”, it is a big prize opening. “3” is a winning opening, “4” is the number of symbol stops, “5” is a big hit, and “6” is a small hit. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are data number information, which indicates the data number for each data type of game information. When “0”, there is no information, and when “1” to “15”, each data number is indicated. . For example, when the data type is a big hit of “5”, the data number is “1”, the ball is large, “2” is the ball is small, “3” is the ball, “4” to “6” It is a spare time. Further, when the data type is a small hit of “6”, the data number is a small hit when “1”, and a spare when “2” to “15”.

  “Count information 1” to “Count information n” indicate game count information 1 to game count information n, respectively.

  Here, when the data type is a start opening, a large winning opening, and a small winning opening, the count information is information on the number of winning balls from Bit 4 to Bit 7, and the winning ball at the time of winning for each type information of game information. The numbers indicate the number of award balls when “1” to “15”. Bit 0 to Bit 3 are information on the number of wins, which indicates the number of wins (cumulative) for each type of game table information, and each of the numbers “1” to “15” represents data on the number of wins. In the count information, when the data type is the symbol stop count, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the symbol stop count, and when “1” to “15”, the symbol stop count Represents. In the count information, when the data type is big hit or small hit, Bit 4 to Bit 7 are fixed to “0”, Bit 0 to Bit 3 indicate the number of hits, and when “1” to “15”, the number of hits is shown. It represents.

  Furthermore, the response of the state information response includes a “launch intensity signal”, a “passing area signal”, a “during fluctuation signal”, and a “handle touch signal”.

  The “fire strength signal” indicates the fire strength T that is the detection result of the fire strength sensor 19 described above. As described above, in the present embodiment, the firing intensity T is a variable value that varies from 0 (minimum value) to 99 (maximum value) in accordance with the amount of steering operation. In addition, when the communication interval (for example, 200 msec) between the P stand 2F and the CU3F is shorter than the interval between the pachinko balls (for example, 0.6 sec), a firing intensity signal is basically output for each ball. become. Further, the firing intensity signal may be output as a set with data indicating whether or not it has actually been fired.

  “Passing area signal” indicates the above-described passing area signal. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass area signal is one of the pass area signals A1 to A8. Each passing area signal is associated with the firing intensity T at the time when each passing area signal is detected.

  The “in-change signal” indicates that the symbol displayed on the variable display device 278F changes as the pachinko ball passes through one of the start winning openings 275F, 276F, and 277F.

  The “handle touch signal” indicates that the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F.

<< 11. Card insertion notification, 12. Card insertion response >>
A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. In response to this card insertion notification, a response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response to the card insertion response is a response to the effect that the card insertion notification has been received with respect to the CU 3F.

  The card insertion notification command notifies the card ID and insertion time of the inserted card to the P base 2F when the card is inserted, and “sequential number”, “command”, “card ID”, “card insertion time”, Data of “store code” and “SC board ID” are included. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  “Card ID” is identification ID information of an IC card inserted into the CU 3F, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. “Card insertion time” is the time when the IC card is inserted into the card insertion / eject port 309F (see FIG. 51) of the CU3F. The year information is two digits YY, the month information is two digits MM, and the day information is two digits. The data is DD, time information is represented by two digits hh, minute information is represented by two digits mm, and second information is represented by two digits ss. The card insertion time is used to determine whether the game ball held on the P platform 2F is the current day ball or the past ball.

  The “store code” is a store identification code in which the CU 3F is installed, and is used for associating with a game ball held by the P stand 2F. It is also used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been moved to the store. The CU3F stores a store code where the CU3F is installed. The store code is notified from the security board 325F with information added thereto. The “SC board ID” is an SC board ID for identifying the CU3F, and is used to determine whether or not the CU3F has been replaced. The SC board ID is added to the security board 325F and notified to the P platform 2F. The payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F stores information notified by the card insertion notification command such as the card ID (C-ID) and the card insertion time.

  The response of the card insertion response notifies the CU 3F that the card insertion notification has been normally received, and includes “serial number” and “command” data. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion / return notification will be described. First, a card or general card is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F of CU3F, or a card is notified to the P stand 2F as a card insertion notification by depositing a general 0 yen 0 coin card. Information such as ID and card insertion time is notified. When there is a card insertion notification, the P table 2F backs up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. However, when a card insertion notification command is received and a status information request including information on the status of the CU 3F being inserted into the card (Bit 0 = 1 in the CU status) is received (determined that the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F) ), The P base 2F transmits only a response without backing up information such as the card ID and the card insertion time. When the card return button 322F of the CU 3F is pressed, a card return notification is made to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F clears information such as the backed up card ID and card insertion time.

<< 13. Card return notice, 14. Card return response >>
A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. In response to this card return notification, a response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  The card return notification command is for notifying the P platform 2F of the card return, and the CU 3F transmits the notification when the “card return” button is pressed. The card return notification includes data of “serial number” and “command”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated.

  The response to the card return response is to send a response to the card return notification to the CU 3F, and includes data of “serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time”. “Serial number”, “command”, “card ID”, and “card insertion time” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. Note that the CU3F does not return the card if the card ID included in the command does not match the ID of the currently inserted card or there is a problem with the card insertion time included in the command. , And processing such as prohibiting the writing of the holding ball to the card.

  Here, the operation of the P stand 2F at the time of card insertion notification or card return notification will be described. At the time of card insertion notification, if the CU3F is used to insert a member card, a general card, or a deposit to a general 0 yen 0 coin card, the P stand 2F backs up the card ID and the card insertion time. When an operation of pressing the “card return” button is performed on the CU 3F at the time of the card return notification, the P stand 2F clears the card ID and the card insertion time.

<< 15. Communication test request, 16. Communication test response >>
A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. In response to this communication test request, a response of a communication test response is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

  The communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the P platform 2F is not encrypted. The communication test request command includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data to be notified to the P base 2F and is arbitrary data.

  The response of the communication test response notifies the CU3F of test data. Note that the test data notified to the CU3F is not encrypted. The response of the communication test response includes data of “serial number”, “command”, and “test data”. “Serial number” and “command” are the same as described above, and therefore description thereof will not be repeated. “Test data” is test data notified to the CU 3F, and is arbitrary data.

<Main sequence in communication between CU and P platform>
<< Send command and response >>
First, transmission of commands and responses between the CU 3F and the P base 2F will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU3F (primary station) to the P station 2F (secondary station), and the P station 2F returns a response to the CU3F in response to the command. In other words, the business message transmission is a command / response system in which the CU 3F is the primary station and the P stand 2F is the secondary station.

  The period from the transmission of the first command to the P stand 2F from the CU 3F to the transmission of the next command is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds. Further, the period from the transmission of the response from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F until the transmission of the next response is controlled to 200 ms, that is, 0.2 seconds.

  Thus, both a command and a response are transmitted at intervals of 200 ms between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F. On the other hand, by operating the hitting operation handle 25F, the P platform 2F hits 100 pachinko balls into the game area 27F per minute, so the hitting time interval is 0.6 seconds. As a result, a plurality of commands and responses are transmitted and received while firing one ball.

  Therefore, responses for notifying the amount of change in the number of game balls are sequentially transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F at intervals shorter than the ball firing time interval. As a result, the P stand 2F can notify the CU 3F of the amount of change in the number of game balls.

  Here, the transmission interval of the command and the response is set to 200 ms, but the transmission interval may be longer or shorter than this. For example, the transmission interval may be a firing time interval of the P base 2F. It is also possible to match with

<< Communication line disconnection detection on CU side >>
Next, processing when communication disconnection is detected on the CU3F side will be described. When the response is not received within 200 ms after the CU 3F transmits the command to the P base 2F, the same command is transmitted to the P base 2F again. Further, if no response is received within 200 ms, a second retransmission is performed in which the same command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. The same command is retransmitted up to 14 times on the P platform 2F. If a response is not received from the P platform 2F even after the 14th retransmission, the CU 3F determines that the communication is abnormal after 3 seconds and sets “communication cut off”. This communication abnormality may be caused when the connector of the CU 3F is disconnected from the connector of the P base 2F, or the connection wiring is disconnected or the power supply of the P base 2F is cut off. The CU3F does not increment the serial number when retransmitting the command.

<< Communication line disconnection detection on P side >>
Processing when communication disconnection is detected on the P platform 2F side will be described. A command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F returns a response to the CU 3F in response to the command. After that, when the state in which the command from the CU 3F is not transmitted to the P stand 2F continues for 3 seconds, the P stand 2F determines that the communication is cut off, stops the driving of the firing motor 18F, and stops the game. The cause of this communication disconnection may be the disconnection of the CU3F connector and the P-base 2F connector, disconnection of the connection wiring, or the power supply disconnection of the CU3F.

  The command and response for detecting communication disconnection on the P platform 2F side include recovery request / recovery response, recovery request 2 / recovery response 2, communication start request / communication start response, notification end request / communication end response, and communication. Does not include test request / communication test response command and response.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 57 is a process that is executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P platform 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main control chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main control chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main control chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and returns the result. Get it. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 58 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card insertion state = OFF to the P unit 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the CU 3F requests a status information request including serial number = n + 1 and card insertion status = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  Thereafter, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and includes a serial number = n + 2, a card ID, and a card insertion time. An insertion notification command is transmitted to the P platform 2F. Note that the card insertion notification command includes the store code and SC board ID added by the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 3 and card insertion status = ON to the P base 2F, thereby notifying the P base 2F of the card insertion status. The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  During card insertion, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card insertion state = ON to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F returns a response of a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Reply to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  In response to this, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 59, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321 is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, so that the serial number = n + 1, the number of game balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a command of a status information request including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, a number of game balls = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding out the stored balls will be described. In FIG. 60, the initial number of game balls is 50. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 61 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  Also, in FIG. 61, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 61, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 62 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs a card return operation. In FIG. 62, the number of cards possessed by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F is attached with a sensor capable of determining whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F, and when the signal of the sensor is in the ON state, the card is determined to be ready for card removal. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Further, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or notify the speaker 270 that “please remove the card” in order to notify the card removal. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in the ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting the state information including “waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 62 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<Main sequence in communication between SC and IC>
Next, FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining processing of a business message sequence between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF. With reference to FIG. 63, the processing of SC325bF and communication control IC 325aF after the CU3F is turned on will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the SC325bF and the communication control IC 325aF are activated. When activated, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the CU control unit 323F, and when activated, the communication control IC 325aF performs authentication with a gaming machine (for example, the P unit 2F).

  Thereafter, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF use the authentication key as the encryption key and perform a communication control IC authentication sequence. The authentication key includes a temporary authentication key stored in advance from the manufacturing stage of the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF, and a main authentication key generated by the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF based on predetermined data sent from the key management server. is there. The temporary authentication key is an encryption key used for communication between the SC 325bF and the IC 325a until the main authentication key is generated. In the operation of the gaming machine under the authentication using the temporary authentication key, a timed operation process that is allowed only for a certain limited period (for example, 2 days) is performed, and the timed operation period has passed. A notification is sent to the host device (key management server 800F of the key management center), and the host device is in a standby state (waiting for reset) until reset processing starts. Details of the communication control IC authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF perform the security information update sequence by using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. This security information update sequence is a process in which the SC 325bF sets the valid key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server 801F) to the IC 325aF. The valid key is data for the IC 325aF to activate communication with the gaming machine. Without the valid key, the IC 325aF cannot communicate with the gaming machine. Further, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF perform a gaming machine chip information authentication sequence. The communication control IC 325aF receives the chip ID (main control chip ID) of the main control chip mounted on the gaming machine (for example, P stand 2F) and the chip ID (payout control chip ID) of the payout control chip. This is a process for verifying the authenticity of the chip ID and the payout control chip ID.

  This gaming machine chip information authentication sequence may take time due to the fact that the key management server 800F first makes an inquiry about the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID. And the operation processing after the communication key request is executed without waiting for an inquiry from the key management server 800F.

  Thereafter, the SC 325bF transmits a communication key request command for requesting a communication key to the communication control IC 325aF. The communication key request command is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the communication key request command, the communication control IC 325aF generates a communication key (session key) for communicating the business message with the gaming machine, and notifies the generated communication key to the SC 325bF as a response to the communication key response. Note that the response of the communication key response to be returned is encrypted using the authentication key or the temporary authentication key as the encryption key. Specifically, the communication key (session key) is generated using a random number and current time data. The current time data may be generated by the communication control IC 325aF itself or received from another device. The method for generating the communication key (session key) is not limited to the random number and the current time data, and any data may be used as long as it is variable data other than the key used for the above-described mutual authentication. Further, control may be performed such that the SC 325bF is generated instead of the communication control IC 325aF and notified to the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the communication key (session key) is shared between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF, and encrypted communication of the business message is performed between them, and the business message communication between the communication control IC 325aF and the gaming machine (P stand 2F). Also, encrypted communication is performed using this communication key (session key).

  In this way, the communication key (session key) is updated each time the power is turned on, thereby ensuring security. Furthermore, the communication key (session key) is updated every update cycle (periodically) in addition to when the power is turned on. That is, when the SC 325bF detects the communication key update cycle, control is performed to update the communication key (session key). Specifically, a key update command is transmitted from the hall server 801F (or key management server 800F) to the CU3F every update cycle, and the SC325bF of the CU3F that receives it transmits a communication key request to the communication control IC 325aF. Similarly, control for updating the communication key (session key) is performed. Since the key update is also generated by using the random number and the data of the current time for each update cycle, the key is updated to a key different from the communication key (session key) updated when the power is turned on, and the security is further improved.

  Next, FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the processing of the authentication sequence of the communication control IC 325aF. Referring to FIG. 64, the first authentication sequence is executed between SC 325bF and IC 325aF. For example, the first authentication sequence authenticates the SC325bF serial ID, that is, the SC325bF SID stored in the EEPROM (not shown). Next, the second authentication sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. For example, the second authentication sequence authenticates the IC 325aF serial ID, that is, the IC 325aF SID stored in the EEPROM (not shown).

  Thereafter, a version management information sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. The SC 325bF transmits a command for requesting version management information to the IC 325aF in order to check the key version. Note that the version management information request command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325aF that has received the version management information request command transmits a response of a version management information response to notify the latest key version to the SC 325bF. Note that the response of the version management information response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, an IC authentication result sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. The SC 325bF transmits an IC authentication result notification command to the IC 325aF. With this IC authentication result notification command, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified to the IC 325aF. Note that the IC authentication result notification command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325aF that has received the IC authentication result notification command transmits an IC authentication result response response to the SC 325bF. Here, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified to the SC 325bF by the response of the IC authentication result response. Note that the response of the IC authentication result response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, a counter information sequence is executed between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF. The SC 325bF transmits a counter information request command to the IC 325aF. By this counter information request command, the current time information is notified to the IC 325aF. Note that the counter information request command is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, a real authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  The IC 325aF that has received the counter information request command transmits a counter information response response to the SC 325bF. Here, the initial vector value of the counter used for encryption is generated by the response of the counter information response, and is notified to the SC 325bF. Note that the response of the counter information response is encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key.

  Next, an example of the control contents of the first authentication sequence will be described with reference to FIG. First, the authentication key random number is notified from the SC 325bF to the communication control IC 325aF. This authentication key random number is data for generating an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key). The communication control IC 325aF that has received the response returns an authentication key random number notification response indicating that the authentication key random number has been received to the SC 325bF. Next, the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF generate an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key) using the mutual authentication key random number. The sequence from the notification of the authentication key random number to the generation of the authentication key (specifically, the authentication key) is executed only when the temporary authentication key is used, that is, only when the authentication key has not yet been generated. The When the authentication key is already generated and used, the sequence from the SC serial ID authentication request 1 is executed without executing the sequence from the notification of the authentication key random number to the generation of the authentication key (specifically, the authentication key). Execute.

  Next, SC serial ID authentication is performed by repeating an SC serial ID authentication request and an SC serial ID authentication response between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the processing of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence. An example of the gaming machine chip information authentication sequence shown in FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, a gaming machine authentication result request is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the communication control IC 325aF. The gaming machine authentication result request is a command that requests the communication control IC 325aF for an authentication result with the P unit 2F. The communication control IC 325aF performs mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F of the P stand 2F, and on condition that the mutual authentication is successful, the communication control IC 325aF receives the gaming machine chip information (payout control chip ID, main control chip). ID) can be acquired from the P stand 2F side. The SC 325bF waits until the mutual authentication between the communication control IC 325aF and the P base 2F is completed.

  The communication control IC 325aF notifies the SC 325bF of the mutual authentication status with the P platform 2F as a response to the gaming machine authentication result response. The mutual authentication status includes “authentication OK” indicating the success of the mutual authentication, “authentication processing” indicating that the mutual authentication is in progress, “authentication error” indicating the mutual authentication failure, the communication control IC 325aF and the P unit. "Disconnection detection" indicating that mutual authentication is impossible due to disconnection of communication line with 2F, and indicates that mutual authentication is impossible due to communication abnormality between communication control IC 325aF and P base 2F Includes "communication error". The communication control IC 325aF includes one of these mutual authentication statuses in the gaming machine authentication result response and returns it to the SC 325bF. In the figure, “authentication OK” is illustrated.

  The SC 325bF sends a gaming machine chip information request command to the communication control IC 325aF on the condition that the “authentication OK” gaming machine authentication result response is received from the communication control IC 325aF, and the communication control IC 325aF transmits the command from the P unit 2F. Wait until the gaming machine chip information (payout control chip ID and main control chip ID) can be acquired. The gaming machine chip information request command is transmitted in response to the SC 325bF receiving a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification from the CU control unit 323F.

  The communication control IC 325aF sends a gaming machine chip information transmission instruction to the payout control unit 171F of the P table 2F on the condition that the mutual authentication with the P table 2F is successful. In response to the instruction, the payout control unit 171F sends a main control chip ID transmission instruction to the main control unit 161F. The main control unit 161F transmits the main control chip ID stored in the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F in response to the instruction. The payout control unit 171F transmits the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID stored therein to the communication control IC 325aF.

  When the communication control IC 325aF receives a gaming machine chip information request command from the SC 325bF, it returns a gaming machine chip information response to the SC 325bF. The response of the gaming machine chip information response includes “acquisition OK” indicating successful acquisition of gaming machine chip information, “acquiring processing” indicating that gaming machine chip information acquisition is in progress, and failure to acquire gaming machine chip information "Disconnection detection" indicating that the gaming machine chip information cannot be acquired due to disconnection of the communication line between the communication control IC 325aF and the P base 2F, and the communication control IC 325aF and the P base 2F "Communication abnormality" indicating that gaming machine chip information cannot be acquired due to communication abnormality between the two. Further, the acquired gaming machine chip information response of “acquired OK” includes the acquired gaming machine chip information (payout control chip ID and main control chip ID).

  When the SC325bF receives the “acquisition OK” gaming machine chip information response, the gaming machine chip inquiry response is transmitted to the CU control unit 323F as will be described later with reference to FIG. The information is transferred to the CU control unit 323F. The gaming machine chip inquiry result includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, a manufacturer code, a model code, and the like. The CU control unit 323F transmits the received gaming machine chip information to the host device. The host device compares the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID with the registered main control chip ID and payout control chip ID, and the main control chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered. Authentication is performed (see FIG. 75). As a result, the gaming machine chip information is authenticated. The host device is, for example, the hall server 801F in the hall, or the key management server 800F connected for communication via the hall server 801F. The collation result (authentication result) in the host device is transmitted from the host device to the CU control unit 323F. Then, the CU control unit 323F notifies the authentication result to the SC 325bF using a gaming machine chip information notification command (see FIG. 75).

  When receiving the authentication result from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a gaming machine chip information authentication result notification command to the communication control IC 325aF and notifies the communication control IC 325aF of the authentication result (NG, OK). Then, the communication control IC 325aF returns a response to the gaming machine chip information authentication result response indicating that the authentication result has been acquired to the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the response of the gaming machine chip information authentication result response transmits the gaming machine chip information result response to the CU control unit 323F, as will be described later with reference to FIG. By receiving the gaming machine chip information result, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication processing history information (authentication log information) from the inquiry of the gaming machine chip information until the communication control IC 325aF grasps the authentication result. (See FIG. 75).

  FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining processing of the communication control IC authentication abnormality sequence. 67, the first authentication sequence to the version management information response described in FIG. 64 are executed. The first authentication sequence to the version management information response are encrypted using an authentication key (specifically, this authentication key or a temporary authentication key) as an encryption key. The SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF both store the SC serial ID and the communication control IC serial ID, and any one of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response uses the challenge / response method. This is a sequence for authenticating the serial ID of the SC, and any one of the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is a sequence for authenticating the serial ID of the communication control IC using the challenge / response method. . The serial ID of the SC, the serial ID of the communication control IC, and the above-mentioned board serial ID are configured with different IDs.

  After these authentication sequences are completed, an IC authentication result sequence is then executed between the SC 325bF and the communication control IC 325aF. An IC authentication result notification is transmitted from the SC 325bF to the communication control IC 325aF. By this IC authentication result notification, the authentication results from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response are collectively notified. On the other hand, an IC authentication result response is transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF to the SC 325bF. The authentication result from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is collectively notified by the IC authentication result response. When the IC authentication result notification and / or the IC authentication result response is inappropriate (NG), the following control is performed.

  When the authentication from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response has been performed using the temporary authentication key, the above-described processing from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is retried. The number of retries is limited to two. If the IC authentication result notification and / or the IC authentication result response is inappropriate even after the two retries, SC325bF is ranked “communication control IC authentication error”. It notifies the device (key management server 800F of the key management center) and waits until the host device starts reset processing (waiting for reset).

  If the IC authentication result notification and / or IC authentication result response is inappropriate even after multiple (here, twice) retries, return by reset processing (for example, operation of reset button (not shown) or power-on) To do. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reset may be performed on the condition that the SC 325bF has been authenticated with the key management server 800F or the hall server 801F, which is a higher-level device, in a reset waiting state.

  Next, the authentication key immediately after the update, that is, the authentication key generated as a result of the first authentication sequence in FIG. 65 (specifically, this authentication key) is used for authentication from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response. If the generated authentication key (specifically, this authentication key) is abnormal, an alarm indicating that the authentication key update is abnormal is notified to the key management server 800F of the key management center. This is executed using a temporary authentication key from the authentication sequence. If these authentication results are appropriate, as described above, a timed operation process that is allowed only for a certain limited period (for example, two days) is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine is performed only during that period. Is possible. When the timed operation period has passed, a notification is sent to the host device (key management server 800F of the key management center), and the host device is in a standby state (waiting for reset) until the reset processing starts. In the timed operation, the control content (game content) or the like may be limited instead of or in addition to the time limit. For example, it is conceivable that an upper limit is set for the number of game balls, and the continuation of the game is not allowed unless it is once converted (counted) into the number of possessed balls when the upper limit is added.

  The control operations of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the ISC 325F and the sequence between the ISC 325F and the communication control IC 325aF described above are collectively described below.

  The communication control IC 325aF stores IC 325aF identification information for identifying the communication control IC 325aF and SC325bF identification information (stores ID information and the like), and SC325bF is SC325bF identification information (board serial ID). And IC325aF identification information (ID information and the like) are stored. Then, between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF, a challenge code is generated using the SC 325bF identification information stored in the SC 325bF and transmitted to the IC 325aF, and the IC 325aF is received using the stored SC 325bF identification information. A response code is generated from the challenge code, returned to the SC 325bF, and the second challenge response authentication process (first authentication sequence in FIG. 64) for determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored SC 325bF identification information in the SC 325bF. ) And the challenge code is generated using the IC 325aF identification information stored in the IC 325aF and transmitted to the SC 325bF. In the SC 325bF, the stored IC 325aF identification information is used. A response code is generated from the received challenge code and returned to the IC 325aF, and the third challenge response authentication process (second process in FIG. 64) determines whether the received response code is appropriate or not by using the stored IC 325aF identification information. Authentication sequence).

  According to such operation control, the challenge code received between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF using the identification information transmitted from one control means to the other control means and stored in the other control means. Since response code is generated and sent back to one control means, challenge-response authentication is performed, so even if a challenge code or response code sent or received between control means is leaked, it will be stored It is difficult to specify the identification information that is present, and fraudulent acts on the control means due to leakage of the identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

  In addition, a gaming system or a gaming device (CU3F, P stand 2F, jet counter, POS terminal, etc.) having SC325bF and IC325aF that perform encryption communication with each other has a plurality of different authentication methods between SC325bF and IC325aF. The mutual authentication processing means (first authentication sequence to version management information response in FIG. 67) for performing the mutual authentication processing of FIG. 67 and the authentication results of each mutual authentication alone in a plurality of types of mutual authentication processing performed by the mutual authentication processing means General notification means for notifying the authentication partner control means of the independent authentication result in the case of inappropriateness, but summing up the abnormalities of the results of executing all of the multiple types of mutual authentication and notifying the authentication partner control means (FIG. 67: The authentication sequence from the first authentication sequence to the version management information response is collectively notified) There. Then, the mutual authentication processing means collectively reports the abnormality by the general notification means, and then executes a re-authentication process in which a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes are performed again between the control means having the abnormality (FIG. 67: No. 67). The authentication sequence from 1 authentication sequence to version management information response is retried at most twice).

  According to such operation control, a plurality of types of mutual authentication processes with different authentication methods are performed between the first control unit and the second control unit and between the IC 325aF and the IC 325aF. Even if the security of mutual authentication by one authentication method is broken, the security of mutual authentication can be maintained by mutual authentication by another different authentication method.

  In addition, for example, when the authentication result of each type of mutual authentication of each of the multiple types of mutual authentication is inappropriate, the type of mutual authentication is notified when the authentication result is notified to the control means of the authentication partner. However, it is not desirable for security because it is known that the authentication result is incorrect. In order to sum up the abnormalities of the results of executing all of the multiple types of mutual authentication and not to notify the control method of the other party of authentication, it is not possible to see which type of mutual authentication has occurred , Can improve security.

  Furthermore, since the re-authentication process is performed again between the control means in which the abnormality occurred after the general notification of the abnormality, it is possible to check again whether the mutual authentication is really abnormal, and the reliability of mutual authentication Can be improved.

  Further, the gaming system or the gaming machine stops the subsequent processing between the inappropriate control means on the condition that the result of the re-authentication processing by the mutual authentication processing means is inappropriate (FIG. 67: Further waiting for reset).

  According to such operation control, since the subsequent processing is stopped between the inappropriate control means on the condition that the result of the re-authentication process is not reliable and the reliability is inappropriate, it is not inappropriate. Nevertheless, the inconvenience of stopping the subsequent processing can be reduced as much as possible.

  In addition, the gaming system or gaming device performs an abnormality notification for executing processing for notifying the management server of the occurrence of an abnormality on the condition that the result of the re-authentication processing by the mutual authentication processing means is inappropriate. It further includes processing means (FIG. 67: “communication control IC authentication error” is notified to the host device).

  According to such operation control, since the notification of the occurrence of an abnormality is sent to the management server on the condition that the result of the re-authentication process is not reliable and the reliability is inappropriate, it is not inappropriate. Nevertheless, the inconvenience of notifying the management server of the occurrence of an abnormality can be reduced as much as possible.

  The mutual authentication processing means in the above gaming system or gaming device generates a challenge code in the IC 325aF and transmits it to the SC 325bF, and generates a response code from the received challenge code using the identification information stored in the SC 325bF. The first challenge response authentication process (first authentication sequence in FIG. 64) for determining the suitability of the response code received using the stored identification information in IC 325aF, and the challenge code is generated in SC 325bF Then, a response code is generated from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the IC 325aF and returned to the SC 325bF, and the stored identification information is stored in the SC 325bF. Performing a second challenge response authentication process of determining the appropriateness of the response code received (second authentication sequence of FIG. 64) using a.

  According to such operation control, the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF transmit a challenge code from one control means to the other control means, and receive a response from the challenge code received using the identification information stored in the other control means. Even if a challenge code or response code sent and received between both gaming means is leaked because it is challenge-response type authentication that generates a code and sends it back to one control means, it will be stored It is difficult to specify the identification information that is present, and fraudulent acts on the gaming means due to leakage of the identification information can be prevented as much as possible.

<Main sequence in communication between CU control unit and SC>
Next, a process executed by the CPU in the CU control unit 323F and a process executed by the security chip (SC) 325b will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, with reference to FIG. 68, a description will be given of the startup process when the CU control unit 323F is turned on and the hall is installed. FIG. 68 shows a sequence when the power is first turned on after the CU3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence at the time of hall installation using the board initial key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the CU3F is installed in the amusement hall and the power is first turned on, the CU control unit 323F receives the board initial key A from the host device (specifically, from the hall server), the MAC key of the board initial key A, valid Acquire a key (for commercial / P shipment). Here, the board initial key A is an encryption key that is downloaded from the hall server and stored in the CU control unit 323F when first communicating with the host device after being delivered to the amusement hall, and is installed in the key management center. This is an encryption key used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF until the board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) stored in the key management server is acquired. The board initial key A is decrypted using the board manufacturer code, while the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board manufacturer code. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method conforming to the AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board initial key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU controllers 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform the board initial key authentication sequence, and authenticate when the board initial key authentication is completed. It becomes. Detailed processing of the board initial key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a security substrate information inquiry sequence, and acquire OK when the security substrate information can be acquired. The security board information is acquired from the key management server of the key management center, and includes a board serial ID, a board authentication key, and the like. Details of the security board information inquiry sequence will be described later. The board authentication key is an encryption key that is downloaded from a key management server installed in the key management center and used for communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF. The key management server stores the board authentication key in association with the board serial number or the like.

  When the security board information can be acquired by the security board information inquiry sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board initial key acquired from the hall server as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and exchange communication keys for business message communication.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. In the communication key exchange sequence, the substrate authentication key is used as the encryption key when the substrate information can be acquired in the substrate information acquisition sequence. However, when the substrate information cannot be acquired, the substrate initial key is used as the encryption key for a limited time. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Details of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business message communication with the gaming machine, gaming on the gaming machine is permitted. The business message communication with the gaming machine is operated using a communication key (session key). The communication at this time is time-limited communication as described above, and is allowed only for a certain period (for example, 2 days). The communication mode performed through the above processing is the restricted communication mode (substrate initial key mode (substrate initial key operation)). If a certain period of time (for example, 2 days) is exceeded in this timed operation, the temporary operation is stopped and the overage is notified from the SC 325bF to the key management server via the CU control unit 323F and the hall server. The

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a recovery request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F sends a response (recovery response) of the recovery response including the previous last transmission serial number, the previously inserted card ID, and the previous card insertion time to the CU 3F. Send back.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the process of power-on / normal startup of the CU control unit 323F will be described. FIG. 69 shows a sequence when the power is normally turned on after the CU 3F is installed in the game arcade, and in particular, a startup sequence using a board authentication key will be described.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. When the power is first turned on when the CU3F is first installed in the amusement hall, the CU control unit 323F receives a board serial ID key, a board from the host device (specifically, from the key management server via the hall server). The MAC key of the authentication key version, the board authentication key A, and the board authentication key A is acquired. The board serial ID key is decrypted using the board initial key, the board initial key A is decrypted using the board serial ID, and the MAC key of the board initial key A is similarly decrypted using the board serial ID. Is done. Such decryption is performed by a decryption method according to the AES encryption method.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence, a board authentication key authentication sequence, and a security board information inquiry sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Detailed processing of the board authentication key authentication sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a security board information inquiry sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key only when the key is updated.

  The SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF when the board authentication key can be authenticated by the board authentication key authentication sequence and there is no key update, or when there is a key update and authentication can be performed by the security board information inquiry sequence. .

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board authentication key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF further acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Details of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described later.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. By performing business telegram communication with this gaming machine, gaming can be performed on the gaming machine. A communication key (session key) is used for business message communication with this gaming machine. Communication at this time is a normal communication mode (board authentication key mode (board authentication key operation)) without restriction as in the restricted communication mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the process of turning on the power of the CU control unit 323F and starting at the time of factory shipment will be described. FIG. 70 shows a sequence at the time of factory shipment before the CU3F is shipped to the amusement hall, and in particular, a factory shipment start-up sequence using a board shipment key will be described. This sequence is processing in the CU control units 323F and SC325bF that are not connected to the host device at the time of factory shipment.

  First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated. The CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board initial key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the substrate manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the substrate initial key as the encryption key and perform the substrate initial key authentication sequence. However, since the CU3F is not yet installed in the amusement hall at the factory shipping stage, the CU control unit 323F has not been able to obtain the basic initial key from the hall server of the amusement hall. The result is NG.

  Thereafter, since the board initial key authentication sequence is authentication NG, the CU controller 323F sends a board shipping key request command to the SC 325bF to request the board shipping key used for the security board 325F test. Send to. After receiving the board shipment key request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF transmits a board shipment key response response including the board shipment key to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform a substrate shipping key authentication sequence using the substrate shipping key acquired from the SC325bF as an encryption key. Detailed processing of the board shipping key authentication sequence will be described later.

  When the board shipping key can be authenticated by the board shipping key authentication sequence, the SC 325bF performs authentication with the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the board shipment key as the encryption key, perform a communication key exchange sequence, and generate a communication key. Specifically, the communication key is generated using a random number and current time data. The method for generating this communication key (session key) is not limited to random number and current time data, but any variable data other than the key used for mutual authentication between encrypted communication devices can be used. Also good. Note that the communication key exchange sequence is for exchanging a key (communication key) used for encryption communication with a gaming machine in order to enable gaming by the gaming machine, and detailed processing will be described later.

  When the communication key can be generated by the communication key exchange sequence, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC 325aF.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF use the communication key acquired from the communication key exchange sequence as the encryption key, perform a gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, and inquire / notify gaming machine chip information. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip number and a payout control chip number. Details of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described later.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F makes a communication test request to the P base 2F, and the P base 2F transmits a communication test response to the CU 3F.

  By performing the above processing, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can communicate with the gaming machine only by the communication test message. By performing communication of this communication test message, a communication test at the time of factory shipment is performed. 68 is the hall installation startup sequence described in FIG. 68 after the CU3F that has passed the factory communication test is delivered to the amusement hall, and is executed after obtaining the board authentication key. The sequence is the normal startup sequence described with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 71, processing of the board manufacturer code authentication sequence will be described.
First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board manufacturer code authentication request 1 command for requesting board manufacturer code authentication to the SC 325bF. Since the board manufacturer code authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 1 generates a challenge code based on the board manufacturer code, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 1.

  Upon receiving the board manufacturer code authentication response 1 command, the CU control unit 323F generates a response code based on the challenge code, and notifies the generated response code to the SC 325bF using the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 command. Specifically, the response code is generated by encrypting the challenge code received using the board manufacturer code as a key.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board manufacturer code authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, if the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board manufacturer code as a key), the challenge code matches. Assume that the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board manufacturer code authentication response 2. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board manufacturer code authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  On the other hand, if the challenge codes do not match, the check result is NG (inappropriate). In this case, the authentication is repeated n times, and SC325bF is in a no-response state (HALT) in the case of NG for n times continuously, and the board authentication key and the main authentication key are cleared (see FIG. 83). After entering the no-response state (HALT), the SC 325bF does not authenticate with the communication control IC 325aF, and repairs are performed at the factory.

  The CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the CU control unit specific information (unified store code, unit number, current time), and transmits a board connection request command for requesting connection with the gaming machine.

  After receiving the board connection request command from the CU control unit 323F, the SC 325bF holds the information on the unified store code, the bedtime, and the current time. When the previous unified store code matches, the CU control unit 323F A response of the board connection response notifying that the connection request has been accepted (OK) is returned.

  On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the previous unified store code, a response of the substrate connection response notifying that the connection request is not accepted (NG) is returned to the CU control unit 323F, and the substrate stored in the RAM In addition to clearing the authentication key, a transition is made to a substrate initial key mode (see FIG. 68), which is a mode for proceeding with the substrate initial key as an encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board connection request result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate initial key or the substrate shipping key will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 72, in the state of the substrate initial key mode, which is a mode for proceeding with processing using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, authentication using the basic initial key is performed in FIG. In the case of a substrate shipping key mode, which is a mode in which processing is advanced using a key as an encryption key, authentication using the base shipping key is performed in FIG. Therefore, “/” in FIG. 72 is a symbol representing either one. The CU control unit 323F transmits a board initial key / board shipment key authentication request 1 command for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board initial key / board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key and transmits the H-MAC with the MAC key to the CU control unit 323F. It calculates and returns with the response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the board initial key / board shipping key authentication response 1 command decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board initial key or the board shipping key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and requests the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request to the SC 325bF. Send with command 2. The command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board initial key or the board shipping key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board initial key / board shipping key authentication request 2 decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board initial key or board shipping key to the CU control unit 323F. To do. Then, the SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board initial key / board shipment key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board initial key authentication result and a board shipping key authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the processing of the authentication sequence of the substrate serial ID and the substrate authentication key will be described.

  First, the communication between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF is in the state of the board authentication key mode in which the process proceeds with the board authentication key as an encryption key. The CU control unit 323F authenticates the board serial ID to the SC 325bF. The command of the board serial ID authentication request 1 for requesting is sent. Since the board serial ID authentication is performed using a challenge / response method, the CU control unit 323F requests a challenge code from the SC 325bF.

  Upon receiving the board serial ID authentication request 1 command, the SC 325bF generates a challenge code based on the board serial ID, and notifies the CU control unit 323F of the generated challenge code as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 1.

  The CU control unit 323F that received the command of the board serial ID authentication response 1 generates a response code based on the challenge code (specifically, generates a response code by encrypting the challenge code using the board serial ID as a key) The generated response code is notified to SC325bF by the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2.

  The SC 325bF that received the command of the board serial ID authentication request 2 checks the response code (specifically, the challenge code is extracted by decrypting the response code using the board serial ID as a key), and the challenge code matches. If the check result is OK. Then, the check result is notified to the CU control unit 323F as a response of the board serial ID authentication response 2. When the check result is NG, the SC 325bF includes the check result in the authentication result in the board authentication result notification and the board authentication result response to the CU control unit 323F, and notifies the NG. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board serial ID authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a version information notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the version information of the board authentication key. Note that the version information notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the version information notification command returns a response of the version information response to notify the CU control unit 323F that the version information of the board authentication key has been received. Note that the response of the version information response is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using a board authentication key as an encryption key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 for requesting authentication information to the SC 325bF. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 is not encrypted, but may be encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication request 1 encrypts the random number A of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and performs the board authentication key authentication with respect to the CU control unit 323F. Reply with response 1 response.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the command of the board authentication key authentication response 1 decrypts the random number A of the authentication information and checks the MAC in order to verify the board authentication key.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F encrypts the random number B of the authentication information with the board authentication key, calculates the H-MAC with the MAC key, and transmits it to the SC 325bF with the command of the board authentication key authentication request 2. The command of the board authentication key authentication request 2 is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  Upon receiving the board authentication key authentication request 2 command, the SC 325bF decrypts the random number B of the authentication information and checks the MAC to verify the board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F. The SC 325bF returns the authentication result as a response of the board authentication key authentication response 2 to the CU control unit 323F.

  Thereafter, the CU control unit 323F transmits a board authentication result notification command to the SC 325bF in order to notify the board authentication result. The board authentication result notification command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. The board authentication result notification command notifies the SC 325bF of the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result.

  The SC 325bF that has received the board authentication result notification command transmits a board authentication result response command to the CU control unit 323F in order to notify the board serial ID authentication and the board authentication key authentication result. The board authentication result response command is encrypted using the board authentication key as the encryption key. At this time, the CU control unit 323F acquires authentication log information such as a board authentication result from the SC 325bF.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a process in the case of inquiring about security board information. Referring to FIG. 74, first, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host apparatus. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the board serial number as the encryption key, and the key that cannot be decrypted by the CU control unit 323F and the hall server (hereinafter referred to as the key). The query information is encrypted with a “secret key”. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.), and necessary processing is performed when security board information is received.

  Thereafter, when receiving the inquiry result of the security board information (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the security board information to the SC 325bF. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board information notification command including the board serial ID and the board authentication key, which is the inquiry result, to the SC 325bF. Note that the security board information notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the security board information notification command, the SC 325bF confirms the inquiry number and sends a response of the security board information result to notify the CU control unit 323F that the security board information notification command has been normally received. Send back. The key update information is used at the next reset. The response of the security board information result to be returned does not need to be encrypted. However, in the case of encryption, a board initial key or a board authentication key is used as the encryption key.

  Thereafter, when the reception result is OK, the CU control unit 323F stores the board serial ID key and the board authentication key A and uses them as authentication key information at the next reset. Further, the CU control unit 323F acquires the authentication log information of the board information inquiry and board information notification.

  Next, the processing of the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence will be described with reference to FIG. In the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, an authentication process based on gaming machine chip information acquired from the gaming machine is executed. First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command for inquiring gaming machine chip information to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted does not have to be encrypted, but when encrypted, a communication key is used as the encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC. Thereafter, when the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command has completed the acquisition of gaming machine chip information according to the sequence described with reference to FIG. 66, the gaming machine chip inquiry result = OK containing the information of OK. A response of the machine chip inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The gaming machine chip information includes a main control chip ID, a payout control chip ID, and the like. Note that the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result is that the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID are encrypted with the secret key, and other information is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After that, when receiving the response of the returned gaming machine chip inquiry result, the CU control unit 323F includes the main control chip number and the payout control chip number in the host device (key management server or hall server: see FIG. 5). Queries gaming machine chip information. During the gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF execute the processing of the next step (business message processing with the gaming machine) without receiving a response from the host device. Since it takes time (for example, about 2 hours) to inquire about gaming machine chip information, the operation of the gaming machine cannot be stopped during that time, so the next step processing is not performed without a response from the host device. (Business message processing with game machine) is executed. It should be noted that during the gaming machine chip information inquiry, even if a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on, etc.) is performed, the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification request is not issued again.

  The host device compares the received main control chip ID and payout control chip ID with the registered main control chip ID and payout control chip ID, and the main control chip ID and payout chip ID are properly registered. Authenticate whether or not As a result, the gaming machine chip information is authenticated. The host device is, for example, the hall server 801F in the hall, or the key management server 800F connected for communication via the hall server 801F. The collation result (authentication result) in the host device is transmitted from the host device to the CU control unit 323F. After that, when receiving the matching result of the gaming machine chip information from the host device, the CU control unit 323F notifies the SC 325bF of the matching result. Specifically, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip information notification command including a matching result to the SC 325bF. Note that the gaming machine chip verification result notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  After receiving the gaming machine chip information notification command, the SC 325bF returns a gaming machine chip information result response to notify the CU control unit 323F of the gaming machine manufacturer code and model code when the collation result is OK. Note that the response of the gaming machine chip information result to be returned is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  At the same time, the CU control unit 323F acquires an authentication log such as a gaming machine chip information inquiry and a gaming machine chip information matching result included in the gaming machine chip information result from the SC 325bF. By performing the above processing, the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence is completed, and the authentication based on the gaming machine chip information is completed. This completes the hall installation startup sequence shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence in the CU control unit power-on / normal startup sequence. Further, by succeeding in the authentication based on the gaming machine chip information in the gaming machine chip information inquiry sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF can perform business message communication with the gaming machine. Thereby, CU3F will accept | permit the game with a game machine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, processing of the sequence of board authentication key authentication abnormality will be described.
First, when the power of the CU3F is turned on, the CU control unit 323F and the SC325bF are activated.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a board manufacturer code authentication sequence and a board authentication key authentication sequence.

  The board manufacturer code authentication sequence authenticates the board manufacturer code between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF using a challenge / response method. After processing the board manufacturer code authentication sequence, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF perform the board authentication key authentication sequence using the board authentication key acquired from the key management server as the encryption key. Here, when the board authentication key authentication becomes authentication NG, the SC 325bF clears the board authentication key information as an authentication abnormality.

  Thereafter, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF execute a substrate initial key authentication sequence. At this time, the communication of the board initial key authentication sequence is encrypted using the board initial key as the encryption key.

  When the authentication of this board initial key authentication sequence is authentication OK, the security board information inquiry sequence, communication key exchange sequence, gaming machine chip information inquiry is performed in the same manner as the hall installation start-up sequence shown in FIG. Processing such as a sequence is performed, and business message communication with the gaming machine becomes possible. The subsequent communication is encrypted using the communication key as the encryption key.

  Note that the SC 325bF notifies the key management server 800F of a “board authentication key update error” alarm indicating that the authentication of the board authentication key sequence is authentication NG.

  Next, FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining processing of a security board information inquiry timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information for inquiring of the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). A response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the security board information, the CU control units 323F and SC325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and process the next step (for example, communication control IC authentication process, gaming machine chip information authentication process, gaming machine Business message processing etc.).

  After that, the CU control unit 323F, when receiving the security board information inquiry result (board serial ID and board authentication key) from the host device, times out the waiting time for the security board information inquiry, A status information request command for requesting information regarding the status of 2F is transmitted. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the state information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “board inquiry present” indicating that the security board information is requested to the key management center.

  In response to the above-described security board inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the security board inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using the board initial key or the board authentication key as the encryption key.

  The SC 325bF that has received the security board inquiry instruction notification command notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (board serial number and inquiry information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). The response of the security board inquiry result is returned to the CU control unit 323F again. The response of the security board inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted using the board serial number as the encryption key and the board initial key or the board authentication key, and the inquiry information is encrypted with the secret key. As a result, the inquiry information can be decrypted and decrypted only by the key management server.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the security board inquiry result sends information (the board serial number and the board serial number and the security board 325F) to the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server) based on the board serial number and the inquiry information. Query information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Next, FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining processing of a gaming machine chip information inquiry (collation) timeout sequence.

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to the SC 325bF in order to request information (specifically, gaming machine chip information) for inquiring of the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF acquires the gaming machine chip information from the communication control IC, and then the SC 325bF that has received the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command inquires of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to notify the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information), a response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result (authentication OK) is returned to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and wait for a response from the host device. While inquiring about the gaming machine chip information, the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF do not wait for a response from the host device, and perform the next step processing (for example, communication control IC authentication processing, security board information authentication processing, gaming machine Business message processing, etc.) and the processing necessary when the gaming machine chip information is received.

  However, after that, the CU control unit 323F determines that the waiting time for the gaming machine chip information inquiry has timed out before receiving the gaming machine chip information inquiry results (main control chip information and payout control chip information) from the host device. The CU 3F transmits a status information request command for requesting information on the status of the P platform 2F. The status information request command is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key. The SC 325bF that has received the status information request command acquires the gaming machine chip information of the P unit 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Then, the SC 325bF returns a status information response response to the CU 3F. At this time, the SC 325bF returns a status information response including “chip information inquiry present” indicating that an inquiry to the key management center for gaming machine chip information is requested.

  In response to the above-mentioned gaming machine chip information inquiry, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to request the SC 325bF to make an inquiry to the host device. Note that the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command to be transmitted is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  Upon receiving the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification command, the SC 325bF notifies the CU control unit 323F of information (main control chip information and payout control chip information) for inquiring of the host device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). In order to do this, the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result is sent back to the CU control unit 323F again. Note that the response of the game machine chip inquiry instruction notification to be returned is encrypted with the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID using a secret key, and the other information is encrypted using a communication key as an encryption key.

  The CU control unit 323F that has received the response of the gaming machine chip inquiry result transmits the gaming machine chip information (mainly the main management chip information and the payout control chip information) to the higher-level device (specifically, the key management server via the hall server). Control chip information and payout control chip information) and continue to wait for a response from the host device.

  Characteristic parts of the sequence between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 78 will be described below.

  As a sequence executed after the CU3F is received and installed in the amusement hall, there is a “board initial key authentication sequence” (see FIG. 68). This "Board Initial Key Authentication Sequence" is obtained by downloading the board initial key from the host device (hall server) and authenticating using the board initial key when the power is turned on for the first time after being installed in the amusement hall. Sequence. On the condition that the authentication result of this board initial key authentication sequence is OK, the “security board information inquiry sequence” is executed using this board initial key (see FIG. 68). The board authentication key is downloaded and stored from the host device (key management server) by this security board information inquiry sequence, and thereafter, various authentication sequences, communication key exchange sequences, etc. are executed using this board authentication key, and the communication key is obtained. Using this, business message communication with the gaming machine is executed (see FIG. 69).

  On the other hand, as a result of executing the security board information inquiry sequence (see FIG. 68) using the board initial key, the board authentication key may not be acquired. This board authentication key is sent to the key management server by the CU manufacturer when the CU manufacturer ships the CU3F to the game hall, and stored in the key management server. The board authentication key stored in advance in the key management server is downloaded and stored, but the transmission of the board authentication key from the CU manufacturer to the key management server may be delayed for some reason. In addition, when the CU3F installed in the amusement hall attempts to download the board authentication key by executing the security board information inquiry sequence, an unexpected situation occurs between the key management server and the CU3F and communication is impossible. May be offline. In such a case, the board authentication key cannot be downloaded.

  If the board authentication key cannot be downloaded and the actual operation such as business message communication with the gaming machine after that cannot be performed at all, operational problems such as a decrease in the operating rate at the amusement hall occur. Therefore, when such an unforeseen situation occurs, control is performed so that the temporary operation of the actual operation can be performed using the board initial key which is a temporary authentication key. Specifically, the communication key exchange sequence is executed using the board initial key acquired from the host device (specifically, the hall server), and the communication key (session key) is generated using the random number and the time data. Then, the communication key (session key) is shared between the CU control unit 323F and the SC 325bF, and the business message communication is performed using the communication key (session key) to perform the actual operation control. The actual operation control using the communication key exchanged using the board initial key is allowed only for a certain period because the board initial key is a temporary key and the board authentication key cannot be obtained. Temporary operation is controlled. Specifically, actual operation control using this board initial key is allowed for only two days, and when the board authentication key cannot be obtained even at the time of power-up on the third day, the subsequent control is stopped, Control is performed to notify that an abnormality has occurred and to notify the hall server or hall management computer that an abnormality has occurred. Note that the temporary operation time limit control that is allowed for a certain period (for example, two days) with the board initial key is that the board initial key is stored in the hall server, so that at least the CU control unit 323F is in the hall server. It is allowed in a state where it is guaranteed that it is connected to

  Further, the above-mentioned “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” is executed at the time of factory shipment shown in FIG. 72, that is, even at a stage where the board has not yet been carried into the game arcade. When the board initial key authentication sequence is executed at this stage, since the board initial key has not yet been acquired, the result of execution of this board initial key authentication sequence using the board initial key is derived as the NG authentication result. The Then, each sequence after the board shipping key request and the board shipping key response shown in FIG. 72 is executed, and communication between the gaming machine and the communication test message is executed. In other words, it is determined by the “substrate initial key / shipping key authentication sequence” whether the substrate initial key has been acquired or not at the time of factory shipment. The sequence is also effectively used to determine whether the initial stage key has been acquired or whether the initial stage key has not been acquired.

  FIG. 79 is a flowchart for explaining specific control of “authentication using a board authentication key”. Referring to FIG. 79, a series of processing described below is performed between CU control unit 323F and SC325bF.

  In step SF201, an authentication process (unit authentication) using the board serial ID is performed using the challenge response method (see board serial ID authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 73).

  When the single authentication in step SF201 is completed, the key version is checked in the next step SF202 (see version information notification / response in FIG. 73).

  When the check of the key version in step SF202 is completed, device authentication using the board authentication key is performed in the next step SF203 (see board authentication key authentication request / responses 1 and 2 in FIG. 73).

  When the device authentication process in step SF203 is completed, the authentication results in steps SF201 to SF203 are mutually notified in the next step SF204, and the process proceeds to the next step SF205 (board authentication result notification / response in FIG. 73). reference).

  In step SF205, it is determined whether or not the notified authentication result is normal. If the authentication result is normal, the process proceeds to step SF206. If the authentication result is not normal, the process proceeds to step SF207.

  In step SF206, it is further determined whether or not the CU control unit 323F has the security board information acquired from the SC 325bF. If the CU control unit 323F has the security board information to be acquired, the process proceeds to step SF209 to acquire the security board information. If there is no security board information to be processed, the process proceeds to step SF210.

  In step SF209, the board authentication key authentication process between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF further shifts to a security board information inquiry process, and the process ends. On the other hand, in step SF210, the authentication in the board authentication key mode ends normally, and the process ends. In this case, game machine chip information verification processing is performed between the CU control units 323F and SC325bF.

  On the other hand, if the authentication result is not normal in step SF205, the process proceeds to step SF206. In step SF206, it is determined whether or not the number of retries is the third time. If the number of retries is the third time, the process proceeds to step SF208, and the number of retries is not the third time (the first or second number of retries). If so, the process returns to step SF201, and the authentication process is performed again.

  In step SF208, a SC325bF board authentication abnormality is set to a standby state until a reset operation (for example, operation of a reset button (not shown) or power-on). After the reset operation, it is activated again in a mode (substrate initial key mode) in which authentication processing is performed again using the substrate initial key as an encryption key, each authentication processing is performed, and the processing ends. In this case, the business of that day is operated in this board initial key mode throughout the day, and when the power is turned on the next day, a security board information acquisition request is issued again to the key management server to try to acquire the security board information (see FIG. 77). Further, as shown in step SF208a, the inquiry process for the security board information may be executed again at this time without waiting for the power-up of the next day. In this case, while the game is progressing by the operation in the board initial key mode, the inquiry process of the security board information is also advanced in parallel.

  FIG. 80A is an example of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process between the CU control unit and the SC. Referring to FIG. 80A, in step SF211, the CU control unit 323F requests the key authentication server for a board authentication key, and the process proceeds to the next step SF212.

  In step SF212, the CU control unit 323F acquires the board authentication key from the security board information sent from the key management server, and transmits the update information in the security board information to the SC 325bF, and the next step SF213. The process proceeds.

  In step SF213, the CU control unit 323F determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. When the mode switching process of the next step SF214 is performed, it becomes impossible to communicate the number of add / subtract balls with the gaming machine that is executing the switching process, so that the gaming machine is not in operation before the mode switching process of step SF214 is performed. It is determined whether or not. Whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state is determined based on whether or not a player's card is inserted in the CU. When no card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an inoperative state, while when a card is inserted, the gaming machine is determined to be in an operating state. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F is in a non-operating state, the process proceeds to step SF214. If the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F is not in a non-operating state, the gaming machine is in a non-operating state. Step SF213 is processed until.

  In step SF214, based on the board authentication key acquired in step SF212, the CU control unit 323F advances the process using the board authentication key as the encryption key from the mode in which the board initial key is used as the encryption key (board initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode), and the process ends.

  FIG. 80B is an example of a flowchart for explaining a communication mode switching process between the SC and the communication control IC. Referring to FIG. 80 (b), in step SF216, the SC 325bF acquires update information from the CU control unit 323F. As described above, the CU control unit 323F transmits update information to the SC 325bF in step SF212. Receiving it, the SC 325bF acquires the update information. Next, in step SF217, the SC 325bF generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, similarly to step SF213 described above, in step SF218, the SC 325bF determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, and executes the process of step SF219 on the condition that it is in a non-operating state. In step SF219, the SC 325bF performs processing using the authentication key as the encryption key from the mode (temporary authentication key mode) in which the process proceeds with the temporary authentication key as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF based on the generated authentication key. Switch to the advanced mode (authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, before the authenticity of the CU is authenticated by the board authentication key registered in the key management server, a normal communication mode is entered and the game on the P cards using the remaining card amount is performed. It can be prevented from becoming possible. Furthermore, even when the board authentication key registered in the key management server cannot be received, the restricted communication mode is set and a game on the P units is allowed, so that flexible operation is possible. In addition, in this case, since the game is allowed under a predetermined restriction compared to the normal communication mode, the operation can be performed without requiring authentication with the board authentication key stored in the key management server. It can be prevented from continuing.

  81 (a) and 81 (b) are other examples of a flowchart for explaining the communication mode switching process. Referring to FIG. 81 (a) showing the communication mode switching process between the CU control unit and the SC, in step SF221, the CU control unit 323F requests security board information from the key management server, and the next step SF222 is performed. The process proceeds.

  In step SF222, the hall server obtains the security board information requested by the CU control unit 323F from the key management server from the key management server, and the hall server obtains the board authentication key from the security board information. Next, in step SF223, the hall server determines whether or not the gaming machine corresponding to the CU control unit 323F that requested the security board information is in a non-operating state for the same purpose as in step SF213 described above. When the gaming machine becomes non-operating, the hall server transmits the acquired board authentication key to the CU control unit 323F in step SF224, and the CU control unit 323F receives the update information in the security board information in SC325bF. Send to. Next, in step SF225, based on the substrate authentication key acquired in step SF2224, the CU control unit 323F processes the substrate authentication key as an encryption key from the mode in which processing is performed using the substrate initial key as an encryption key (substrate initial key mode). The communication mode is switched to the mode (board authentication key mode) to advance the process, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 81 (b) showing the process of switching the communication mode between the SC and the communication control IC, in step SF226, the SC 325bF acquires update information from the CU control unit 323F. As described above, the CU control unit 323F transmits update information to the SC 325bF at step SF224. Receiving it, the SC 325bF acquires the update information. Next, in step SF227, the SC 325bF generates this authentication key from the acquired update information. Next, in step SF228, the SC 325bF uses the temporary authentication key as the encryption key for the communication mode between the SC 325bF and the IC 325aF based on the generated real authentication key. To the mode in which the process is advanced (this authentication key mode).

  According to such an embodiment, even when the hall server receives the board authentication key from the key management server in the restricted communication mode, the board authentication key is immediately transmitted to the CU when the P units are in operation. Provided in the restricted communication mode because the board authentication key is sent from the hall server to the CU and switched to the normal communication mode on the condition that the gaming machine is in a non-operating state, instead of switching to the normal communication mode. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages by affecting the game that has been played.

<Authentication operation between SC325bF and CU control unit 323F>
Next, the unified store code check and the board manufacturer code authentication will be described in more detail.

  First, with reference to FIG. 82, the unified store code check process by SC325bF will be described. This process is an authentication operation in which the SC 325bF checks the unified store code notified at the time of board connection request and the unified store code notified last time, and determines that the installed store has changed if there is a mismatch. SC325bF determines whether or not the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step SF1101). For example, all data of the dummy code of the unified store code is “0xFF”. This dummy code is used in place of the normal unified store code at the time of shipment before the CU3F is installed in the game hall (store), and is already stored in the SC 325bF at the time of shipment. Then, at the time of shipment, the dummy code is input to the SC 325bF via the CU control unit 323F, and the SC 325bF authenticates the input dummy code and the stored dummy code by matching. The dummy code is stored as a default in the hall server of the amusement hall as a temporary shop code when a unified store code has not yet been acquired for a newly opened game hall (hall). Then, the dummy code is downloaded from the hall server to the CU3F installed in the game hall of the newly opened store, and the SC325bF determines that the downloaded dummy code and the stored dummy code match and authenticates, and the P unit 2F Allows gaming.

  The hall server that has acquired the regular unified store code transmits the unified store code to the CU control unit 323F. Upon receiving the request, the CU control unit 323F transmits the unified store code to the SC 325bF at the next board connection request when the power is turned on. Receiving it, SC325bF, when determining that the previous unified store code stored is a dummy code (step SF1101: YES), updates the storage to the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request. However, it does not initialize the board authentication key and the main authentication key information and operates by taking over the previous authentication modes. Thereafter, the SC 325bF stores the authentication log information (step SF1106). The initialization of the board authentication key and the main authentication key information is a process that is required when a CU3F installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall, but a dummy code stored in the SC325bF. Is updated to the unified store code when the amusement hall of the newly-opened store obtains the unified store code and downloads the unified store code to the CU3F. It is not necessary to initialize the key and the authentication key information. Conversely, if the board authentication key and this authentication key information are initialized in such a case, a board authentication key acquisition request is required again, increasing the number of board initial key operations (timed operation) in one business day, and timed operation. There is a disadvantage that the grace period is reduced. In order to avoid such inconvenience, control is performed so that the board authentication key and the main authentication key information are not initialized.

  On the other hand, if the SC325bF determines that the previous unified store code stored is not a dummy code (step SF1101: NO), the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request and the stored previous store code are stored. It is determined whether or not the unified store code matches (step SF1102).

  When the SC325bF determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request matches the previous unified store code stored (step SF1102: YES), the authentication process is performed on the board initial key. Transition to an authentication sequence, or transition to a board authentication key authentication sequence (step SF1103). Note that the SC 325bF transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is the board authentication key mode, and shifts to the board initial key authentication sequence when the previous authentication mode is any other authentication mode.

  On the other hand, if the SC 325bF determines that the unified store code notified from the hall server at the time of board connection request does not match the previous unified store code stored (step SF1102: NO), the board authentication key information , And this authentication key information is initialized (cleared) (step SF1104). Such a mismatch in the unified store code occurs when a CU3F that has been installed in a certain game hall is moved to another game hall. Since the CU3F has been moved to another amusement hall, the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information used in the previous amusement hall are initialized (cleared) to ensure security. When the unified store code notified from the CU control unit 323F is changed, the SC 325bF sets the authentication key initialization (clear) to the IC 325aF and starts authentication with the temporary authentication key. Note that when the SC 325bF initializes (clears) the authentication key information, the IC 325aF may also control to initialize (clear) the authentication key information, and without performing such control in particular. At the next authentication with the IC 325aF, the SC 325bF may return to authentication with the temporary authentication key because there is no real authentication key.

  Further, the SC 325bF initializes (clears) the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information in step SF1104, and then transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence and the temporary authentication key sequence (step SF1105).

  In step SF1103, the SC 325bF transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, or transitions to the board authentication key authentication sequence, and in step SF1104, transitions the authentication process to the board initial key authentication sequence, and then stores the authentication log information. (Step SF1106).

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart for explaining the board manufacturer code authentication operation. The board maker code authentication is an authentication operation in which the SC 325bF and the CU control unit 323F perform authentication using the board maker code stored as initial information. Referring to FIG. 83, first, SC 325bF and CU control unit 323F perform unit authentication by a challenge / response method using the stored board manufacturer code. (Step SF1201). The response code generated at the time of single unit authentication is generated, for example, by performing block encryption of the challenge code using the stored board manufacturer code as a key and then hashing with a hash function.

  The SC 325bF determines whether the authentication result obtained by checking the response code generated by the CU control unit 323F with respect to the generated challenge code is normal (step SF1202). If the SC 325bF determines that the authentication result is normal (step SF1202: YES), the SC 325bF determines whether it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203). On the other hand, when determining that the authentication result is not normal (abnormal) (step SF1202: NO), the SC 325bF determines whether or not the authentication result is abnormal n times (for example, three times) continuously (step SF1204).

  If the SC 325bF determines that it has already been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203: YES), the process proceeds to the board authentication key authentication process and maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence (step SF1205). On the other hand, if the SC 325bF determines that it has not been authenticated with the board authentication key (step SF1203: NO), the process proceeds to the board initial key authentication process (step SF1206).

  SC325bF returns a process to step SF1201, when it is judged that it is not abnormal continuously n times (step SF1204: NO). On the other hand, when the SC 325bF determines that the abnormality is continuous n times (step SF1204: YES), the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are initialized (cleared) in order to ensure security (step SF1207). . Thereby, the inconvenience that the board authentication key information and the main authentication key information are stolen can be prevented. Thereafter, the SC 325bF makes a transition to the board initial key authentication process (step SF1208).

  The SC 325bF maintains the board authentication key authentication sequence in step SF1205, or transitions to the board initial key authentication process in steps SF1206 and SF1208, and then stores the authentication log information (step SF1209).

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart for explaining the reception interval monitoring process. The reception interval monitoring process is a process executed by the SC 325bF. First, the SC 325bF determines whether or not a message has been received (SF10).

  The CU control unit 323F includes a timer (time measuring means) for measuring a specified time, and a communication unit (communication means) connected to the SC 325bF for transmitting a message. ) Send a message every time. For this reason, the CU control unit 323F waits for a response message to be received for a specified time after transmitting a certain message, receives the response message, and transmits the next message. Further, the CU control unit 323F waits for reception of a response message for a specified time after transmitting a certain message, and retransmits a message with the same content if a response message cannot be received. If a response message cannot be received in response to the second retransmission of the message, it is determined that communication has been interrupted.

  On the other hand, the SC 325bF receives various request messages from the CU control unit 323F at regular time intervals (for example, 200 ms), and returns response messages corresponding to the request messages. If NO in SF10, the process ends. If YES in SF10, it is determined whether the reception is before a specified time interval (SF11).

  In SF11, when it is determined that the message is received before the specified time interval from the previous message reception, the number of times of receiving the message before the specified time interval reaches the n1th (however, n1> 1) times continuously. It is determined whether or not (SF12). As described above, a situation in which messages that should be received at regular time intervals are continuously transmitted one after another before the regular time intervals cannot normally occur. Such a situation may occur, for example, when various messages are transmitted from the outside one after another in a short time for the purpose of illegally analyzing the operation of SC325bF. Therefore, if NO in SF12, the process ends. If YES, error information is transmitted (SF13).

  This error information is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F of the P platform 2F via the IC 325aF, for example. Receiving the error information, the payout control unit 171F stops the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F to make the game impossible. Note that error information may be displayed on the display 54F of the P platform 2F instead of or in addition to the inoperable state. Or in SF13, it is good also as what transmits error information to CU control part 323F.

  After the processing of SF13, transmission of a response message for the message received by SF10 is prohibited (SF14). Furthermore, the function of receiving a message from the CU control unit 323F is stopped (SF15). As a result of SF14 and SF15, it is possible to prevent an illegal act to obtain a response message for the purpose of analysis.

  In this flowchart, the number of times of receiving the message before the specified time interval has reached the n1th time continuously. However, if the message before the specified time interval is received even once, the answer is NO in SF12. It may be determined.

  Further, only one or two processes of SF13 to SF15 may be executed. Furthermore, instead of the processing of SF14 and SF15, the timing of responding to the received message may be delayed from the normal time. For example, normally, the response message is transmitted so that the response message reaches the partner in 200 ms after the partner (CU control unit 323F) transmits the message, but the interval is increased (for example, three times the normal). You may do it. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of sending a message at a shorter time interval than usual is performed, the response to the fraud will be slow, so that the efficiency of fraud analysis will be extremely poor, and it will be difficult to revise the fraud Can do.

  Furthermore, the process of slowing down transmission of a response message and the process of prohibiting transmission of a response message (SF14) may be combined. For example, when YES is determined in SF12, a process of slowing down transmission of a response message is executed, and then a response message of SF14 is detected when a predetermined number of message receptions within a specified time interval from the response message transmission is detected. A process for prohibiting the transmission of a message may be executed.

  Also, the reception interval monitoring process as shown in FIG. 84 may be performed not only by SC325bF but also by any device that receives a message from the other party. For example, the CU control unit 323F may execute a reception interval monitoring process for a message transmitted from a higher-level server (for example, a key management server). In addition, the IC 325aF may perform a reception interval monitoring process on a message transmitted from the SC 325bF. Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F may perform a reception interval monitoring process on a message transmitted from the IC 325aF. In this case, the reception interval monitoring process is executed between the CU 3F and the gaming machine (for example, P 2F). In addition, this processing may be applied in transmission / reception processing between a plurality of gaming machines such as the CU3F, the P stand 2F, the jet counter, and the POS terminal.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart for explaining the abnormal message monitoring process. The abnormal message monitoring process is a process executed by the SC 325bF. First, the SC 325bF determines whether or not a message has been received (SF20). If NO in SF20, the process ends. If YES in SF20, it is determined whether or not the received message is a command abnormal message (SF21), and if it is not a command abnormal message, it is determined whether or not the received message is a communication error message (SF26). .

  Here, a communication error message is a message that was originally detected as a normal message such as a message in which an error was detected by a CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) or a message in which the data length was detected to be different from a predetermined length. A message that arrived after being garbled from the original message due to the occurrence of an error in the message generation process or noise on the communication line even though it was scheduled to be transmitted.

  On the other hand, the command abnormal message is a message that has a correct data length and does not detect an error in CRC, but is different from a command code included in the message. Therefore, the command abnormal message may be an illegal message for the purpose of causing an illegal operation.

  If it is determined in SF26 that the message is not a communication error message, a normal message has been received, and the error message monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in SF26 that it is a communication abnormality message, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous reception of such a communication abnormality message has reached n3 times (SF27). Here, n3 is “3”, for example. If n3 times has not been reached, the CU control unit 323F is requested to resend a message (SF25). That is, when a communication abnormal message is received, two retransmissions are allowed.

  If all of the messages received for a total of n3 times including the reception of the first message are communication error messages, the result is YES in SF27, and it is determined that the communication error between CU and SC is present (SF28). In this case, CU-SC communication abnormality information is transmitted (SF29).

  The CU-SC communication abnormality information is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F of the P platform 2F via the communication control IC 325aF, for example. The payout control unit 171F that has received the CU-SC command abnormality information stops the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F, and puts it into a game-impossible state. Instead of or in addition to the game disabled state, the CU-SC command abnormality information may be displayed on the display 54F of the P platform 2F. Or in SF29, it is good also as what transmits CU-SC communication abnormality information to CU control part 323F.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in SF21 that the received message is a command abnormal message, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive receptions of such a command abnormal message has reached n2 (SF22). Here, n2 is “4”, for example, which is one greater than the threshold n3 related to the communication error message set to “3”.

  When it is determined NO in SF22, the CU control unit 323F is requested to retransmit the message. That is, when a command abnormal message is received, four retransmissions are allowed.

  If all of the messages received only n2 times in total, including the reception of the first message, are command abnormal messages, the answer is YES in SF22, and it is determined that the CU-SC command is abnormal (illegal) (SF23). ). In this case, CU-SC command abnormality information is transmitted (SF24).

  The CU-SC command abnormality information is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F of the P platform 2F via the communication control IC 325aF, for example. The payout control unit 171F that has received the CU-SC command abnormality information stops the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F, and puts it into a game-impossible state. Instead of or in addition to the game disabled state, the CU-SC command abnormality information may be displayed on the display 54F of the P platform 2F. Or in SF29, it is good also as what transmits CU-SC communication abnormality information to CU control part 323F.

  In this way, by making the threshold relating to the command abnormal message different from the threshold relating to the communication abnormal message, it is possible to distinguish between the retransmission of the message due to mere garbled data and the possibility that an illegal command is transmitted. In particular, the command code that is abnormal even if the normal data retransmission limit (n3 is included) is exceeded by making the threshold for the command abnormal message larger than the threshold for the message retransmission due to garbled data. It is possible to confirm that a message including the message has been repeatedly transmitted, so that it is possible to determine a situation where the possibility of fraud is high and to notify that there is a possibility of fraud based on the determination.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart for explaining gaming machine chip inquiry processing. The gaming machine chip inquiry process is a process executed by the CU control unit 323F. An example of this processing is shown in FIG. 75 (game machine chip information inquiry sequence) and FIG. 78 (game machine chip information inquiry timeout sequence).

  First, the CU control unit 323F transmits a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification (SF30). This requests the SC325bF for gaming machine chip information to make an inquiry to the key management server. Upon receiving this gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification, the SC 325bF requests gaming machine chip information from the P table 2F via the communication control IC 325aF.

  Next, the inquiry waiting timer is reset (SF31). The inquiry waiting timer is a timer for measuring a response waiting time for the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification, and is reset every time the gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted, and a new timing is started.

  Next, it is determined whether a gaming machine chip inquiry result is received from SC325bF (SF32). The gaming machine chip inquiry result includes an acquisition result indicating whether or not chip information has been acquired, a manufacturer code, a board serial number, a main control chip ID, a payout chip ID, and the like. If the gaming machine chip inquiry result has not been received, it is determined whether or not the inquiry timer has timed out (SF33). If a time-out occurs, a time-out process is executed (SF38). In the timeout process, as shown in FIG. 78, a status information request is transmitted, and a status information response (with chip information inquiry) is waited.

  If the inquiry timer has not timed out in SF33, it is determined whether or not a health check whose operation designation is a gaming machine chip information inquiry request has been received from the key management server (SF34). That is, it is determined whether or not an inquiry request for gaming machine chip information has been received from the key management server. When an inquiry request for gaming machine chip information is received from the key management server, a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted to the SC 325bF (SF35), and the inquiry waiting timer is reset (SF36). As a result, time counting by the inquiry wait timer is started from the beginning. Thereafter, the process proceeds to SF32.

  In other words, even if a gaming machine chip inquiry instruction notification has already been transmitted and a response request for gaming machine chip information is newly received separately from the key management server, even when waiting for a response thereto Then, a game machine chip inquiry instruction notification is transmitted again.

  By processing in this way, it becomes possible to quickly return a response to a request from a key management server connected to many halls (CUs in the hall) existing throughout the country. That is, since the “gaming machine chip information inquiry request” by the health check request is a compulsory instruction from the key management server, the SC 325bF reliably manages the key even in the gaming machine chip information inquiry mode in response to the request from the CU control unit 323F. The CU control unit 323F executes an inquiry for gaming machine chip information until the information reaches the server.

  In SF34, when the health check (operation designation = game machine chip information inquiry request) has not been received from the key management server, the process returns to SF32 and proceeds to a step of determining whether or not the game machine chip inquiry result has been received.

  Eventually, when the gaming machine chip inquiry result is received in SF32, the result is transmitted to the upper server (key management server) (SF37), and the process is terminated.

  Here, the case of health check (operation designation = game machine chip information inquiry request) has been described as an example. However, in the above processing, the CU control unit 323F performs a health check (operation designation = security board information inquiry request). ) Is received in the same manner.

  That is, referring to FIGS. 74 and 77, CU control unit 323F transmits a security board inquiry instruction notification to SC325bF and waits for a response from SC325bF until a security board information inquiry timeout. However, if a health check (operation designation = security board information inquiry request) is received from the host server (key management server) before the timeout occurs, the CU control unit 323F sends a security board inquiry instruction notification to the SC 325bF without waiting for the timeout. Resend to.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 87 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to the S units. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 87, S platform (slot machine) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF is openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aSF with its left edge as the center of swing. Although not shown in FIG. 87, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510 is a display equivalent to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU in the same manner as the display unit 54F of FIG. 52, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (at a position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points can be obtained by withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, points, or a stored medal (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the number of bets to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is set to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 51, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28FS for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the card return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 52). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In this case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P stand 2F or the S stand (slot machine) 2S. It may be.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). This determination is made, for example, by drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base gives the player game points according to the type of winning (adds game points).

  In other words, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value by using the S units, and a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified can be displayed in a variable manner. A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the variable display device, and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, which is displayed on the variable display device Before the result is derived, a predetermining unit that determines whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to be generated, and causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining unit A slot machine including derivation control means for performing control and giving means for giving a game value when the winning occurs is configured.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and their transmission / reception modes. This FIG. 88 is obtained by replacing the term of FIG. 56 described as the configuration of the P unit with that for the S unit, and the aspect thereof is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 56. The description of is omitted.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the present embodiment described above are listed.

(1) SC-communication control IC disconnection detection function The SC 325bF transmits / receives data to / from the communication control IC 325aF by SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. In this case, SC325bF is the master side and the communication control IC 325aF is the slave side. The SC 325bF on the master side generates a shift clock, thereby displacing the shift register on the master side and the shift register on the slave side, and transmits / receives data. In normal SPI communication, the first byte and the second byte are always reversed when normal, but if a disconnection occurs between the two, the SC325bF data reception line is unstable (low or low). It will be in a high state. For this reason, in the case of a disconnection state, the relationship in which the first byte and the second byte are reversed does not hold. Utilizing this fact, the SC 325bF determines that a disconnection occurs when the received data does not change within a predetermined time.

  (2) In the present embodiment, the addition sequence number and the counting sequence number are defined in the message format as different data, but these may be shared as a request sequence number. In particular, the addition of game balls and the counting of game balls are the opposite processes, so it is unlikely that both processes will occur at the same time. From this point of view, it is possible to reduce the amount of message data by sharing both serial numbers. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a new request is generated until the request sequence number reaches a predetermined upper limit value, the sequence number is updated based on the previously updated value. However, instead of such control, when all the processes corresponding to one request are completed, the request sequence number may be initialized to a predetermined initial value. For example, in the example of FIG. 61, it is conceivable that the counting sequence number included in the last status information response indicating completion of counting is set to a predetermined initial value instead of m + 6.

  Request sequence numbers such as addition sequence numbers and count sequence numbers, and normal sequence numbers are not counted up one by one, but are updated (addition update, subtraction) according to a predetermined rule stored in both P unit 2F and CU3F. Update, update by other arithmetic expressions). In this case, the serial number is not “sequential numbers” such as 1, 2, and 3, but data that is updated based on concepts such as A, B, and C.

  (3) When S machines (slot machines), which are examples of gaming machines, are applied to the gaming system, for example, a game in which there are P reels, various sensor parts attached to the reels, and a main control board that controls the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, the S units do not require the various detection switches 41a, 701, 33, the firing control board 31F, and the firing motor 18F of the game frame shown in FIG.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in this embodiment, since the function of displaying the dollar box is provided as described above, it is possible to prevent such inconvenience. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F or 29SF.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, point payout operation) from the remaining amount of a prepaid card, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display a number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display device 510F or the display device 29SF and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (4) In the present embodiment, game points are added by consuming the card count. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (5) In the present embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (6) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (7) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (8) Referring to FIG. 61, the P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (held balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of the counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (9) When counting game balls (game points) and converting points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from a speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (10) The timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on the counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (11) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship between and may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (12) In this embodiment, the game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU side Then, it may not be stored. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (13) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (holding ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (14) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the card return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (15) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are added. It may be controlled to withdraw and add the number of game balls or game points.

  (16) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (the prepaid balance, the possession ball, the accumulated ball) and the corresponding game points are deducted, the value deducted However, instead, for example, it may be controlled to add game points that are smaller by the amount equivalent to the consumption tax with respect to the value actually withdrawn.

  (17) In this embodiment, a key management server is installed in a key management center that is remote from the game arcade. However, the key management server may be installed in the game hall. Thereby, compared with the case where a key management server is installed outside the game hall, it is easier to speed up communication between the CU and the key management server, and the occurrence rate of communication failures can be reduced.

  (18) The CU control unit 323F receives the board security information (including the board authentication key and update information) from the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F. However, instead of this, the board security information is transmitted from the key management server 800F to the CU control unit 323F without using the hall server 801F between the key management server 800F and the CU control unit 323F. For example, it is conceivable that the key management server 800F and the CU are directly connected to each other, or a relay communication device different from the hall server 801F is provided between the key management server 800F and each CU.

  (19) In the present embodiment, as an example of the game information, the explanation has been given by taking the holding ball, the game ball, the remaining amount of the card, the saving ball, and the number of balls information and the game table information. However, the game information includes other information related to the game on the gaming machine. For example, when a player's favorite character selected or customized by the player can be displayed on variable display means (variable display device) such as the variable display device 278F or the display 54F, information that can specify the character Is also included in the game information. Information on the screen design including the character that matches the player's preference is transmitted to the server at the end of the game in association with the player's card ID and stored, for example, when starting a new game. You may make it download from a server to CU or P stand.

  (20) In the game ball number display 29F, a display is made in which the number of balls is decreased one by one in conjunction with the ball firing or counting operation. In addition, the game ball number display 29 </ b> F displays that the number of balls increases by one or a predetermined number of units according to a ball lending operation or the like. When the game ball number display 29F is composed of an image display such as a liquid crystal display device, the number of game balls is not simply displayed digitally, but whether the change in the number of game balls is due to a ball or not is counted. Whether it is due to winning, winning a prize, due to savings, or due to a lending operation, an image according to the type is displayed along with the display update of the number of game balls You may make it do.

  (21) Check whether there is a change in the number of holding balls or game balls on the CU or P stand, and if the number of holding balls or game balls does not change for a predetermined period, notify the CU or P stand of that fact You may do it. Alternatively, a notification signal may be output to an external device (a hall computer, a calling lamp on the P platform). This makes it easier for the store clerk to grasp, for example, a table that has been abandoned while the remaining few balls are left unattended.

  (22) In the present embodiment, a main control chip ID, which is an example of game board side unique information, and a payout control chip ID, which is an example of frame side unique information, are shown, and both of these IDs are acquired by CU3F. If the host device (key management server or hall server) authenticates and the authentication succeeds, the game on the gaming machine is allowed. However, the CU3F (for example, the CU control unit 323F) acquires both regular IDs from the host device in advance, and the CU3F compares and verifies both the regular IDs and the two IDs acquired from the gaming machine. You may do. That is, the authentication of both IDs may be directly executed by the CU3F.

  Further, as unique information of the game board and the frame, an ID different from the main control chip ID and the payout control chip ID is embedded in a predetermined place (a place other than the payout control unit 171F and the main control unit 161F) of the game board and the frame. Alternatively, the above-described authentication may be performed using the ID. Further, the above-described authentication is performed using the unique information on the game board side and the unique information on the frame side, and if the authentication is successful, the game by the gaming machine may be permitted. Further, even if authentication fails, the CU 3F may allow a game by a gaming machine under certain conditions. For example, the game is allowed until a predetermined period elapses, and the game is disabled after the predetermined period elapses. The game is allowed until a predetermined number of card remaining amount or use of points is reached. For example, it is possible to prohibit the use of the remaining card balance or points after that.

  As described in the above embodiments, the “slot machine 1 as an example of a gaming machine and the medal lending machine 100 as an example of a gaming device” or “an example of a gaming machine”. As for the pachinko gaming machine 701 and the card unit 750 as an example of a gaming device, as described in relation to the “P 2F, S 2SF, and CU3F”, the unique information from the gaming machine is used as a game. The game device may be allowed to play a game on the condition that the device has acquired and succeeded in the authentication based on the unique information. For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 701, the pachinko gaming machine 701 may be configured with a game frame and a gaming board in the same manner as the P stand 2F, and an ID may be embedded in each of the main control unit and the payout control unit. . In the case of the slot machine 1, an ID may be embedded in the game control microcomputer that executes the game control of the slot machine 1. In the case of the card unit 750, the configuration is the same as that of the CU3F, and in the case of the medal lending machine 100, the control unit 181 may be configured by the CU control unit 323F and the security board 325F as in the case of the CU3F. Further, the game board and the game frame may have different or different specific information (ID) used for authentication.

  Further, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine, a game frame and a game board are provided, a payout control unit in which a payout control chip ID is embedded in the game frame, and a main control chip ID in which a main control chip ID is embedded in the game board. Each control unit is provided. On the other hand, also in the case of a slot machine, a game frame and a game board are provided. The game board in the slot machine is a board surface on which a game control board for executing game control is mounted, for example. In addition, the game frame in the slot machine is, for example, a housing including a front door of the slot machine, and an attachment location for attaching a board surface on which a game control board is mounted is provided at a predetermined location where the front door is opened. It is a frame. In the game frame, a payout control board for controlling game points is mounted in the same manner as a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine control board of the slot machine includes a main control unit in which the main control chip ID is embedded as in the pachinko gaming machine, and the payout control board of the slot machine is embedded in the payout control chip ID as in the pachinko gaming machine. Includes payout controller.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  1 slot machine, 100 medal lending machine, 114 return button, 120 numeric keypad, 121 replay button, 122 counting button, 123 liquid crystal display, 124 touch panel, 170, 7170 terminal reader / writer, 190 counting device, 500 card management computer, 540 Hall computer, 550 medal management computer, 701 pachinko machine, 750 card unit, 2F pachinko machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 17F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F Card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F rental button, 322F return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit, 171F Payout control unit, 323F CU control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming apparatus capable of executing a game enabling process for enabling a game on a gaming machine including a game board and a game frame using a valuable value associated with the medium identification information recorded on the recording medium. There,
Specific information acquisition means for acquiring specific information for authenticating the game board;
Authentication means for executing processing for authenticating the game board based on the unique information acquired by the unique information acquisition means;
As a result of the processing by the authentication means, an accepting means for allowing the game enabling process when authentication is successful;
An acquisition means capable of acquiring the medium identification information from the recording medium in a non-contact manner when the recording medium is held over;
An input means for inputting an operation;
Receiving means for receiving the medium identification information acquired by the acquiring means;
A game enabling means for executing the game enabling process in response to the medium identification information being received by the receiving means;
First display processing means for executing processing for displaying valuable information associated with the medium identification information received by the receiving means in response to execution of the game enabling processing;
The medium identification information is received by the receiving means, and in response to a predetermined display start operation being input to the input means, a medium detail information associated with the received medium identification information is displayed. Second display processing means for executing two display processing,
The second display processing means executes a display disable process for disabling display of the medium detailed information when a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the second display process, and the same medium as the previously received medium identification information A game device that executes the second display process again when the identification information is newly received during the display disable process.

Images